Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to the theory, methodology, and development for modeling systems of systems Modeling and Managing Interdependent Complex Systems of Systems examines the complexity of, and the risk to, emergent interconnected and interdependent complex systems of systems in the natural and the constructed environment, and in its critical infrastructures. For systems modelers, this book focuses on what constitutes complexity and how to understand, model and manage it.Previous modeling methods for complex systems of systems were aimed at developing theory and methodologies for uncoupling the interdependencies and interconnections that characterize them. In this book, the author extends the above by utilizing public- and private- sector case studies; identifies, explores, and exploits the core of interdependencies; and seeks to understand their essence via the states of the system, and their dominant contributions to the complexity of systems of systems. The book proposes a reevalTable of ContentsForeword vii Acknowledgments xv 1 Modeling and Managing Interdependent Complex Systems of Systems:Fundamentals, Theory and Methodology 1 2 Modeling, Decomposition, and Multilevel Coordination of Complex Systems of Systems 51 3 Hierarchical Holographic Modeling and Multilevel Coordination of Complex Systems of Systems 111 4 Modeling Complex Systems of Systems with Phantom System Models 141 5 Complex Systems of Systems: Multiple Goals and Objectives 183 6 Hierarchical Coordinated Bayesian Modeling of Complex Systems of Systems 229 7 Hierarchical Multiobjective Modeling and Decision Making for Complex Systems of Systems 279 8 Modeling Economic Interdependencies among Complex Systems of Systems 363 9 Guiding Principles for Modeling and Managing Complex Systems of Systems 411 10 Modeling Cyber–Physical Complex Systems of Systems: Four Case Studies 447 11 Global Supply Chain as Complex Systems of Systems 527 12 Understanding and Managing the Organizational Dimension of Complex Systems of Systems 559 13 Software Engineering: The Driver of Cyber–Physical Complex Systems of Systems 607 14 Infrastructure Preparedness for Communities as Complex Systems of Systems 647 15 Modeling Safety of Transportation Complex Systems of Systems via Fault Trees 695 Appendix 739 Author Index 773 Subject Index 779

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to the fundamental concepts, designs, and implementation schemes, performance considerations, and applications of arithmetic circuits for DSP Arithmetic Circuits for DSP Applications is a complete resource on arithmetic circuits for digital signal processing (DSP). It covers the key concepts, designs and developments of different types of arithmetic circuits, which can be used for improving the efficiency of implementation of a multitude of DSP applications. Each chapter includes various applications of the respective class of arithmetic circuits along with information on the future scope of research. Written for students, engineers, and researchers in electrical and computer engineering, this comprehensive text offers a clear understanding of different types of arithmetic circuits used for digital signal processing applications. The text includes contributions from noted researchers on a wide range of topics, including a review of circuits used in implementingTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Editors xvii 1 Basic Arithmetic Circuits 1 Oscar Gustafsson and Lars Wanhammar 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Addition and Subtraction 1 1.2.1 Ripple-Carry Addition 2 1.2.2 Bit-Serial Addition and Subtraction 3 1.2.3 Digit-Serial Addition and Subtraction 4 1.3 Multiplication 4 1.3.1 Partial Product Generation 5 1.3.2 Avoiding Sign-Extension (the Baugh and Wooley Method) 6 1.3.3 Reducing the Number of Partial Products 6 1.3.4 Reducing the Number of Columns 8 1.3.5 Accumulation Structures 8 1.3.6 Serial/Parallel Multiplication 11 1.4 Sum-of-Products Circuits 15 1.4.1 SOP Computation 17 1.4.2 Linear-Phase FIR Filters 18 1.4.3 Polynomial Evaluation (Horner's Method) 18 1.4.4 Multiple-Wordlength SOP 18 1.5 Squaring 19 1.5.1 Parallel Squarers 19 1.5.2 Serial Squarers 21 1.5.3 Multiplication Through Squaring 23 1.6 Complex Multiplication 24 1.6.1 Complex Multiplication Using Real Multipliers 24 1.6.2 Lifting-Based Complex Multipliers 25 1.7 Special Functions 26 1.7.1 Square Root Computation 26 1.7.2 Polynomial and Piecewise Polynomial Approximations 28 2 Shift-Add Circuits for Constant Multiplications 33 Parmod Kumar Meher, C.-H. Chang, Oscar Gustafsson, A.P. Vinod, and M. Faust 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Representation of Constants 36 2.3 Single Constant Multiplication 40 2.3.1 Direct Simplification from a Given Number Representation 40 2.3.2 Simplification by Redundant Signed Digit Representation 41 2.3.3 Simplification by Adder Graph Approach 41 2.3.4 State of the Art in SCM 43 2.4 Algorithms for Multiple Constant Multiplications 43 2.4.1 MCM for FIR Digital Filter and Basic Considerations 43 2.4.2 The Adder Graph Approach 45 2.4.3 Common Subexpression Elimination Algorithms 49 2.4.4 Difference Algorithms 56 2.4.5 Reconfigurable and Time-MultiplexedMultiple Constant Multiplications 56 2.5 Optimization Schemes and Optimal Algorithms 58 2.5.1 Optimal Subexpression Sharing 58 2.5.2 Representation Independent Formulations 60 2.6 Applications 62 2.6.1 Implementation of FIR Digital Filters and Filter Banks 62 2.6.2 Implementation of Sinusoidal and Other Linear Transforms 63 2.6.3 Other Applications 63 2.7 Pitfalls and Scope for Future Work 64 2.7.1 Selection of Figure of Merit 64 2.7.2 Benchmark Suites for Algorithm Evaluation 65 2.7.3 FPGA-Oriented Design of Algorithms and Architectures 65 2.8 Conclusions 66 3 DA-Based Circuits for Inner-Product Computation 77 Mahesh Mehendale, Mohit Sharma, and Pramod Kumar Meher 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Mathematical Foundation and Concepts 78 3.3 Techniques for Area Optimization of DA-Based Implementations 81 3.3.1 Offset Binary Coding 81 3.3.2 Adder-Based DA 85 3.3.3 Coefficient Partitioning 85 3.3.4 Exploiting Coefficient Symmetry 87 3.3.5 LUT Implementation Optimization 88 3.3.6 Adder-Based DA Implementation with Single Adder 90 3.3.7 LUT Optimization for Fixed Coefficients 90 3.3.8 Inner-Product with Data and Coefficients Represented as Complex Numbers 92 3.4 Techniques for Performance Optimization of DA-Based Implementations 93 3.4.1 Two-Bits-at-a-Time (2-BAAT) Access 93 3.4.2 Coefficient Distribution over Data 93 3.4.3 RNS-Based Implementation 95 3.5 Techniques for Low Power and Reconfigurable Realization of DA-Based Implementations 98 3.5.1 Adder-Based DA with Fixed Coefficients 99 3.5.2 Eliminating Redundant LUT Accesses and Additions 100 3.5.3 Using Zero-Detection to Reduce LUT Accesses and Additions 102 3.5.4 Nega-Binary Coding for Reducing Input Toggles and LUT Look-Ups 103 3.5.5 Accuracy versus Power Tradeoff 107 3.5.6 Reconfigurable DA-Based Implementations 108 3.6 Conclusion 108 4 Table-Based Circuits for DSP Applications 113 Pramod Kumar Meher and Shen-Fu Hsiao 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 LUT Design for Implementation of Boolean Function 115 4.3 Lookup Table Design for Constant Multiplication 117 4.3.1 Lookup Table Optimizations for Constant Multiplication 117 4.3.2 Implementation of LUT-Multiplier using APC for L = 5 122 4.3.3 Implementation of Optimized LUT using OMS Technique 123 4.3.4 Optimized LUT Design for Signed and Unsigned Operands 124 4.3.5 Input Operand Decomposition for Large InputWidth 126 4.4 Evaluation of Elementary Arithmetic Functions 127 4.4.1 Piecewise Polynomial Approximation (PPA) Approach for Function Evaluation 128 4.4.2 Table-Addition (TA) Approach for Function Evaluation 131 4.5 Applications 134 4.5.1 LUT-Based Implementation of Cyclic Convolution and Orthogonal Transforms 135 4.5.2 LUT-Based Evaluation of Reciprocals and Division Operation 136 4.5.3 LUT-Based Design for Evaluation of Sigmoid Function 138 4.6 Summary 143 5 CORDIC Circuits 149 Pramod Kumar Meher, Javier Valls, Tso-Bing Juang, K. Sridharan, and Koushik Maharatna 5.1 Introduction 149 5.2 Basic CORDIC Techniques 151 5.2.1 The CORDIC Algorithm 151 5.2.2 Generalization of the CORDIC Algorithm 154 5.2.3 Multidimensional CORDIC 155 5.3 Advanced CORDIC Algorithms and Architectures 156 5.3.1 High-Radix CORDIC Algorithm 157 5.3.2 Angle Recoding Methods 158 5.3.3 Hybrid or Coarse-Fine Rotation CORDIC 161 5.3.4 Redundant Number-Based CORDIC Implementation 164 5.3.5 Pipelined CORDIC Architecture 166 5.3.6 Differential CORDIC Algorithm 167 5.4 Scaling, Quantization, and Accuracy Issues 168 5.4.1 Implementation of Mixed-Scaling Rotation 168 5.4.2 Low-Complexity Scaling 169 5.4.3 Quantization and Numerical Accuracy 170 5.4.4 Area-Delay-Accuracy Trade-off 170 5.5 Applications of CORDIC 172 5.5.1 Matrix Computation 172 5.5.2 Signal Processing and Image Processing Applications 173 5.5.3 Applications to Communication 174 5.5.4 Applications of CORDIC to Robotics and Graphics 176 5.6 Conclusions 178 6 RNS-Based Arithmetic Circuits and Applications 186 P.V. Ananda Mohan 6.1 Introduction 186 6.2 Modulo Addition and Subtraction 189 6.2.1 Modulo (2n− 1) Adders 189 6.2.2 Modulo (2n + 1) Adders 191 6.3 Modulo Multiplication and Modulo Squaring 193 6.3.1 Multipliers for General Moduli 194 6.3.2 Multipliers mod (2n − 1) 195 6.3.3 Multipliers mod (2n + 1) 196 6.3.4 Modulo Squarers 199 6.4 Forward (binary to RNS) Conversion 200 6.5 RNS to Binary Conversion 203 6.5.1 CRT-Based RNS to Binary Conversion 203 6.5.2 Mixed Radix Conversion 206 6.5.3 RNS to Binary conversion using New CRT 207 6.5.4 RNS to Binary conversion using Core Function 208 6.6 Scaling and Base Extension 210 6.7 Magnitude Comparison and Sign Detection 213 6.8 Error Correction and Detection 214 6.9 Applications of RNS 216 6.9.1 FIR Filters 216 6.9.2 RNS in Cryptography 218 6.9.3 RNS in Digital Communication Systems 225 7 Logarithmic Number System 237 Vassilis Paliouras and Thanos Stouraitis 7.1 Introduction 237 7.1.1 The Logarithmic Number System 237 7.1.2 Organization of the Chapter 237 7.2 Basics of LNS Representation 238 7.2.1 LNS and Equivalence to Linear Representation 238 7.3 Fundamental Arithmetic Operations 240 7.3.1 Multiplication, Division, Roots, and Powers 240 7.3.2 Addition and Subtraction 241 7.4 Forward and Inverse Conversion 249 7.5 Complex Arithmetic in LNS 250 7.6 LNS Processors 251 7.6.1 A VLIW LNS Processor 252 7.7 LNS for Low-Power Dissipation 257 7.7.1 Impact of LNS Encoding on Signal Activity 258 7.7.2 Power Dissipation and LNS Architecture 261 7.8 Applications 265 7.8.1 Signal Processing and Communications 265 7.8.2 Video Processing 267 7.8.3 Graphics 268 7.9 Conclusions 268 8 Redundant Number System-Based Arithmetic Circuits 273 G. Jaberipur 8.1 Introduction 273 8.1.1 Introductory Definitions and Examples 274 8.2 Fundamentals of Redundant Number Systems 278 8.2.1 Redundant Digit Sets 278 8.3 Redundant Number Systems 280 8.3.1 Constant Time Addition 281 8.3.2 Carry-Save Addition 283 8.3.3 Borrow Free Subtraction 285 8.4 Basic Arithmetic Circuits for Redundant Number Systems 287 8.4.1 Circuit Realization of Carry-Free Adders 287 8.4.2 Fast Maximally Redundant Carry-Free Adders 288 8.4.3 Carry-Free Addition of Symmetric Maximally Redundant Numbers 290 8.4.4 Addition and Subtraction of Stored-Carry Encoded Redundant Operands 292 8.5 Binary to Redundant Conversion and the Reverse 297 8.5.1 Binary to MRSD Conversion and the Reverse 297 8.5.2 Binary to Stored Unibit Conversion and the Reverse 298 8.6 Special Arithmetic Circuits for Redundant Number Systems 299 8.6.1 Radix-2h MRSD Arithmetic Shifts 299 8.6.2 Stored Unibit Arithmetic Shifts 300 8.6.3 Apparent Overflow 303 8.7 Applications 303 8.7.1 Redundant Representation of Partial Products 305 8.7.2 Recoding the Multiplier to a Redundant Representation 305 8.7.3 Use of Redundant Number Systems in Digit Recurrence Algorithms 306 8.7.4 Transcendental Functions and Redundant Number Systems 306 8.7.5 RDNS and Fused Multiply-Add Operation 307 8.7.6 RDNS and Floating Point Arithmetic 307 8.7.7 RDNS and RNS Arithmetic 308 8.8 Summary and Further Reading 308 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn Engineering theory and applications, we think and operate in terms of logics and models with some acceptable and reasonable assumptions. The present text is aimed at providing modelling and analysis techniques for the evaluation of reliability measures (2-terminal, all-terminal, k-terminal reliability) for systems whose structure can be described in the form of a probabilistic graph. Among the several approaches of network reliability evaluation, the multiple-variable-inversion sum-of-disjoint product approach finds a well-deserved niche as it provides the reliability or unreliability expression in a most efficient and compact manner. However, it does require an efficiently enumerated minimal inputs (minimal path, spanning tree, minimal k-trees, minimal cut, minimal global-cut, minimal k-cut) depending on the desired reliability. The present book covers these two aspects in detail through the descriptions of several algorithms devised by the reliability fraternity and explained tTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Graph Theory: A Tool for Reliability Evaluation 2 1.1.1 Undirected Networks 4 1.1.2 Directed Networks 4 1.1.3 Mixed Networks 5 1.2 Large versus Complex System 7 1.2.1 Large System 7 1.2.2 Complex System 7 1.2.3 Large and Complex System 9 1.3 Network Reliability Measures: Deterministic versus Probabilistic 9 1.3.1 Terminal-pair Reliability Measure 11 1.3.2 All-Terminal Reliability Measure 12 1.3.3 k-terminal Reliability Measure 12 1.4 Common Assumptions 12 1.5 Approaches for NSP Network Reliability Evaluation 13 1.5.1 Non Path or Cut Sets Based Techniques 14 1.5.1.1 State Enumeration Technique 14 1.5.1.2 Network Decomposition Technique 18 1.5.1.3 Probability Transformation Technique 19 1.5.1.4 Binary Decision Diagram Based Technique 20 1.5.2 Minimal POC Based Techniques 21 1.5.2.1 Inclusion-Exclusion Technique 21 1.5.2.2 Monte-Carlo Simulation Based Technique 22 1.5.2.3 Domination Theory Based Technique 23 1.5.2.4 Reliability Bounds Technique 24 1.5.2.5 Sum-of-disjoint Product Based Technique 25 Exercises 26 References 27 2 Reliability Evaluation of General SP-Networks 31 2.1 Notation and Assumptions 33 2.2 Unit-Reliability and Failure Models 34 2.2.1 Constant-Hazard Model 35 2.2.2 Linear-Hazard Model 35 2.2.3 Weibull-Hazard Model 35 2.2.4 Extreme Value-Hazard Model 36 2.3 Module Representation of Reliability Graphs 36 2.3.1 Single-Unit Module 36 2.3.2 Multi-Unit Module 36 2.3.2.1 Series Model 37 2.3.2.2 Parallel Model 38 2.3.2.3 Standby Model 39 2.3.2.4 k-out-of-m Model 41 2.4 Misra Matrix Method 44 2.5 Algorithm 45 2.6 Implementation and Documentation 55 2.6.1 Main Module 55 2.6.2 Function formCmat 56 2.6.3 Function processCmat 58 2.6.4 Function systDetail 58 2.7 Remarks 58 Exercises 59 References 60 3 Path Sets Enumeration 63 3.1 Enumeration of (s, f) Connected Path Sets 64 3.1.1 Method 1: Using Powers of Connection matrix 65 3.1.2 Method 2: Traversing Through Connection Matrix 67 3.1.3 Method 3: Using Incidence Matrix 69 3.2 Enumeration of All-node Connected Path Sets: Spanning Tree 73 3.2.1 Method 1: Using the Cartesian Product of the Node Cut Sets 74 3.2.2 Method 2: Using the Incidence Matrix 75 3.3 Number of Spanning Trees 84 3.3.1 Matrix Tree Theorem 84 3.4 Enumeration of k-node Connected Path Sets: k-Trees 86 Appendix 3A.1: Enumeration of Path Sets Algorithm, Illustration and Matlab® Code Notation 88 Appendix 3A.2: Sample program I/O for Figure 3A.1 Contents ix 97 Exercises 100 References 101 4 Cut Sets Enumeration 103 4.1 (s, f) Cut Sets Enumeration 104 4.1.1 Method 1: Using Connection Matrix 104 4.1.2 Method 2: Using Minimal Path Sets 106 4.1.2.1 Using Set-theoretic Product of Path Sets 106 4.1.2.2 Using Path Sets Matrix 107 4.1.2.3 Using Path Sets Inversion 108 4.2 Global Cut Sets Enumeration 109 4.2.1 Testing Connectivity of a Specified Node Set 110 4.2.1.1 Node Fusion Technique 110 4.2.2 Generation of Node Set Combination from its Lower Order Node-Sets 112 4.2.3 Checking Validity of a Node Set 112 4.2.4 Formation of Cutset 113 4.2.5 General Algorithm to Enumerate Minimal Cutsets for a Reliability Measure 113 Appendix 4A.1: Node Fusion Technique and Generation of Node Set Combination 123 Appendix 4A.2: Code for Checking Validity of a Node Set and Converting Node-Sets into Link Cutsets 124 Appendix 4A.3: Sample Program I/O for Network Graph of Figure 4.3 126 Appendix 4A.4: g-Terminal Reliability Evaluation Program Sample I/O for Example of Figure 4.3 128 Appendix 4A.5: Results are provided by the program (output of g-reliability expression for the Figure 4.3 for method HM-1 of (Chaturvedi & Misra, 2002). 129 Exercises 130 References 131 5 Reliability Evaluation using MVI Techniques 133 5.1 Notation and Assumptions 134 5.2 Preliminaries 135 5.2.1 Definitions 135 5.3 MVI Methods 137 5.3.1 Method 1: KDH88 137 5.3.2 Method 2: CAREL 139 5.3.3 Comparison between KDH88 and CAREL 144 5.4 Method 3: Hybrid Methods-HM 147 5.4.1 An Alternative Representation of Path or Cut Sets 147 5.4.2 Hybrid Methods (HM) 149 5.4.2.1 HM-1 149 5.4.2.2 HM-2 149 5.5 Applying HM-1 and HM-2 149 5.5.1 Applying HM-1 150 5.5.2 Applying HM-2 151 5.5.3 Complete Solution to Example 5.2 152 5.6 Global and k-terminal Reliability with SDP Approach 159 5.6.1 All-terminal Reliability Evaluation 161 5.6.2 Characteristics of a g-reliability Expression 164 5.6.3 k-terminal Reliability Evaluation 164 5.6.4 Number of k-trees 167 5.7 Unreliability with SDP Approach 169 5.8 Some Suggested Guidelines 171 5.8.1 Directed Network Graph 171 5.8.2 Undirected Network Graph 172 Appendix 5A.1: Program output of g-reliability expression for the Figure 5.1(b). 173 Appendix 5A.2: Program output of k-terminal reliability expression for Figure 5.1(b). 179 Appendix 5A.3: Program output of k-terminal reliability expression for Figure 5.1(b). 181 Exercises 183 References 185 6 Unified Framework and Capacitated Network Reliability 187 6.1 The Unified Framework 188 6.2 Capacitated Reliability Measure: An Introduction 189 6.2.1 Some Related Definitions 191 6.2.1.1 Minimal Cutset and Subset Cut Group 191 6.2.1.2 External Redundant Subset Cut Group 191 6.2.1.3 Internal Redundant Subset Cut Group 192 6.2.1.4 Invalid Cut Set Cut Group 192 6.2.1.5 Description of the Algorithm 192 6.3 Algorithm Description 192 6.3.1 Equations: The idea 193 6.3.2 Is Cut itself a SCG or does it need its Subsets Enumeration? 194 6.3.3 What Initial Order? 194 6.3.4 Efficient enumeration of particular order SCG of a minimal cut 197 6.3.5 External or Both External/ Internal Redundancy Removal 197 6.3.6 Internal Redundancy Removal 199 6.4 The CRR Evaluation Algorithm 200 6.5 A Complete Example 202 6.6 Experimental Results, Comparison and Discussion 207 References 212 7 A LAN and Water Distribution Network: Case Studies 213 7.1 Case Study-I: IIT Kharagpur LAN Network 213 7.1.1 k-Terminal and global reliability evaluation for hostel area of IIT Kharagpur LAN 215 7.1.2 All terminal reliability evaluation for academic area of LAN 215 7.1.3 All terminal reliability evaluation for IIT Kharagpur LAN network 215 7.2 Case Study-II: Real-Type of Large Size Unsaturated Water Distribution Networks 219 References 222 Epilogue 223 References 225 Bibliography 227 Index 235

Read more less

Book SynopsisEnergy Production Systems Engineering presents IEEE, Electrical Apparatus Service Association (EASA), and International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards of engineering systems and equipment in utility electric generation stations.Table of ContentsLIST OF FIGURES xiii LIST OF TABLES xxi LIST OF ANNEX xxv ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xxvii INTRODUCTION xxix CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL SAFETY 1 Installation Safety Requirements—General Industry (NEC®) 5 Installation Safety Requirements—Special Industry – Utility (NESC) 7 Safe Work Practice Requirements 11 Electrical PPE 15 ARC Flash Analysis Utilizing NFPA 70E Tables 21 Hazardous/Classified Areas 25 Classified Area – “Class” System 26 Classified Area – “Zone” System 32 Boiler Control and Burner Management 34 Glossary of Terms 37 Problems 39 Recommended Reading 41 CHAPTER 2 BASIC THERMAL CYCLES 43 Steam Thermodynamic Analysis Fundamentals 43 Pressure, Temperature, and Volume Relationships 60 Heat Rate 70 Gas Thermodynamic Analysis Fundamentals 72 Glossary of Terms 77 Problems 78 Recommended Reading 81 CHAPTER 3 BOILERS AND STEAM GENERATORS 83 Air Preheater 95 Cooling Towers 98 Glossary of Terms 102 Problems 104 Recommended Reading 105 CHAPTER 4 FOSSIL FUELS AND THE BASIC COMBUSTION PROCESS 107 Combustible Fuel 107 Oxygen 108 Fossil Fuels 115 Natural Gas 118 Fuel Oil 119 Glossary of Terms 120 Problems 122 Recommended Reading 122 CHAPTER 5 HYDRAULIC TURBINES 123 Hydraulic Reaction Turbines 127 Hydraulic Impulse Turbines 128 Kinetic Energy Hydraulic Turbines 128 Glossary of Terms 129 Problems 130 Recommended Reading 130 CHAPTER 6 NUCLEAR POWER 131 Boiling Water Reactor 137 Pressurized Water Reactor 139 Pressurized Heavy Water Reactor 142 Pressure Tube Graphite Reactor 142 High Temperature Gas-Cooled Reactor 143 Liquid Metal Fast Breeder Reactor 143 Nuclear Power Safety 143 Units of Activity 147 Units of Exposure 148 Glossary of Terms 151 Problems 154 Recommended Reading 157 CHAPTER 7 CONVEYORS 159 Belt Conveyor 161 Pneumatic Conveyor Systems 171 Rotary Screw Conveyor System 171 Vibrating Conveyor System 171 Conveyor Safety 172 Glossary of Terms 172 Problems 173 Recommended Reading 174 CHAPTER 8 FANS 175 Centrifugal Fan (Radial Airflow) 176 Axial Fan (Axial Airflow) 183 Centrifugal Fan Fundamental Laws 183 Glossary of Terms 185 Problems 186 Recommended Reading 187 CHAPTER 9 PUMPS 189 System Resistance Curves 189 Centrifugal Pump 195 Axial Flow Pump 204 Positive Displacement Pump 205 Glossary of Terms 206 Problems 207 Recommended Reading 207 CHAPTER 10 CONDENSER COOLING SYSTEM 209 Condenser Cooling 209 Condenser Operation 213 Condenser Safety Precautions 214 Glossary of Terms 215 Problems 216 Recommended Reading 216 CHAPTER 11 STEAM TURBINES 217 Turbine Safety 231 Turbine Vibration 233 Glossary of Terms 239 Problems 241 Recommended Reading 243 CHAPTER 12 GAS TURBINES 245 Glossary of Terms 255 Problems 256 Recommended Reading 257 CHAPTER 13 RECIPROCATING ENGINES 259 Glossary of Terms 269 Problems 271 Recommended Reading 272 CHAPTER 14 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 273 Distribution System Configuration 277 Enclosures 283 Busway Applications 284 Cables 289 Cable Testing 313 Megger Testing 313 High Potential Testing 314 Acceptance 317 Cathodic Protection 317 Glossary of Terms 319 Problems 321 Recommended Reading 324 CHAPTER 15 TRANSFORMERS AND REACTORS 325 Glossary of Terms 345 Problems 346 Recommended Reading 347 CHAPTER 16 GENERATORS 349 Generator Protection 383 Glossary of Terms 386 Problems 388 Recommended Reading 389 CHAPTER 17 MOTORS 391 Reduced Voltage Starting Methods 416 Glossary of Terms 435 Problems 437 Recommended Reading 439 CHAPTER 18 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS 441 Harmonics 458 Glossary of Terms 465 Problems 465 Recommended Reading 466 CHAPTER 19 SWITCHGEAR 467 Glossary of Terms 480 Problems 481 Recommended Reading 482 CHAPTER 20 BATTERY/VITAL BUS SYSTEMS 483 Design of Battery Systems (DC System Load and Battery Capacity) 489 Design of Battery Systems (Battery Charger) 496 Glossary of Terms 497 Problems 498 Recommended Reading 498 CHAPTER 21 GROUND SYSTEM 499 Ungrounded System 500 Resistance Grounded System 503 Reactance Grounded System 504 Solidly Grounded System 506 Glossary of Terms 513 Problems 514 Recommended Reading 515 CHAPTER 22 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTION AND COORDINATION 517 Glossary of Terms 531 Problems 532 Recommended Reading 533 CHAPTER 23 CONTROL SYSTEMS 535 Glossary of Terms 554 Problems 555 Recommended Reading 556 CHAPTER 24 INSTRUMENTS AND METERS 557 Temperature 561 Flow 566 Pressure 568 Level 570 Instrument Identification Standards 584 Glossary of Terms 599 Problems 599 Recommended Reading 602 CHAPTER 25 VALVES AND ACTUATORS 603 Valve Types 607 Ball Valve 607 Check Valve 609 Gate Valve 610 Globe Valve 611 Relief Valve 612 Valve Losses 613 Glossary of Terms 621 Problems 622 Recommended Reading 623 CHAPTER 26 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 625 Particulate Emission Control 626 Nitrogen Oxides Emissions Control 628 Combustion Control of Nox 629 Post-Combustion Control of NOx 630 Sulfur Dioxide Emissions Control (Scrubber) 632 Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS) 635 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and Greenhouse Gas Emission Control 636 Glossary of Terms 644 Problems 645 Recommended Reading 646 CHAPTER 27 WATER TREATMENT 647 Flow 650 Areas and Volumes 652 Volume 652 Detention Time 654 Dosage 654 Process Removal Efficiency 655 Pump Calculations 656 Glossary of Terms 659 Problems 659 Recommended Reading 661 CHAPTER 28 SOLAR AND WIND ENERGY 663 Wind Energy 663 Thermal Solar Energy 666 Parabolic Trough Solar Field Technology 667 Solar Power Towers 669 Dish System 670 Photovoltaic Solar Energy 670 Glossary of Terms 678 Problems 679 Recommended Reading 679 ANNEXES 681 INDEX 783

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn overview on the challenging new topic of phase-aware signal processing Speech communication technology is a key factor in human-machine interaction, digital hearing aids, mobile telephony, and automatic speech/speaker recognition. With the proliferation of these applications, there is a growing requirement for advanced methodologies that can push the limits of the conventional solutions relying on processing the signal magnitude spectrum. Single-Channel Phase-Aware Signal Processing in Speech Communication provides a comprehensive guide to phase signal processing and reviews the history of phase importance in the literature, basic problems in phase processing, fundamentals of phase estimation together with several applications to demonstrate the usefulness of phase processing. Key features: Analysis of recent advances demonstrating the positive impact of phase-based processing in pushing the limits of conventional methods. Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii List of Symbols xvii Part I History, Theory and Concepts 1 1 Introduction: Phase Processing, History 3 Pejman Mowlaee 1.1 Chapter Organization 3 1.2 Conventional Speech Communication 3 1.3 Historical Overview of the Importance or Unimportance of Phase 6 1.4 Importance of Phase in Speech Processing 9 1.4.1 Speech Enhancement 9 1.4.1.1 Unimportance of Phase in Speech Enhancement 10 1.4.1.2 Effects of Phase Modification in Speech Signals 10 1.4.1.3 Phase Spectrum Compensation 10 1.4.1.4 Phase Importance for Improved Signal Reconstruction 11 1.4.2 Speech Watermarking 11 1.4.3 Speech Coding 12 1.4.4 Artificial Bandwidth Extension 13 1.4.5 Speech Synthesis 14 1.4.6 Speech/Speaker Recognition 15 1.5 Structure of the Book 16 1.6 Experiments 18 1.6.1 Experiment 1.1: Phase Unimportance in Speech Enhancement 18 1.6.2 Experiment 1.2: Effects of Phase Modification 20 1.6.3 Experiment 1.3: Mismatched Window 22 1.6.4 Experiment 1.4: Phase Spectrum Compensation 24 1.7 Summary 26 References 26 2 Fundamentals of Phase-Based Signal Processing 33 Pejman Mowlaee 2.1 Chapter Organization 33 2.2 STFT Phase: Background and Some Remarks 33 2.2.1 Short-Time Fourier Transform 33 2.2.2 Fourier Analysis of Speech: STFT Amplitude and Phase 34 2.3 Phase Unwrapping 35 2.3.1 Problem Definition 35 2.3.2 Remarks on Phase Unwrapping 38 2.3.3 Phase Unwrapping Solutions 38 2.3.3.1 Detecting Discontinuities 39 2.3.3.2 Numerical Integration (NI) 40 2.3.3.3 Isolating Sharp Zeros 41 2.3.3.4 Iterative Phase Unwrapping 41 2.3.3.5 Polynomial Factorization (PF) 42 2.3.3.6 Time Series Approach 42 2.3.3.7 Composite Method 43 2.3.3.8 Schur–Cohn and Nyquist Frequency 44 2.4 Useful Phase-Based Representations 44 2.4.1 Group Delay Representations 45 2.4.2 Instantaneous Frequency 48 2.4.3 Baseband Phase Difference 49 2.4.4 Harmonic Phase Decomposition 50 2.4.4.1 Background on the Harmonic Model 50 2.4.4.2 Phase Decomposition using the Harmonic Model 51 2.4.5 Phasegram: Unwrapped Harmonic Phase 52 2.4.5.1 Definitions and Background 52 2.4.5.2 Circular Mean and Variance 52 2.4.6 Relative Phase Shift 53 2.4.7 Phase Distortion 54 2.5 Experiments 57 2.5.1 Experiment 2.1: One-Dimensional Phase Unwrapping 57 2.5.1.1 Clean Signal Scenario 57 2.5.1.2 Noisy Signal Scenario 58 2.5.2 Experiment 2.2: Comparative Study of Phase Unwrapping Methods 58 2.5.3 Experiment 2.3: Comparative Study on Group Delay Spectra 59 2.5.4 Experiment 2.4: Circular Statistics of the Harmonic Phase 60 2.5.5 Experiment 2.5: Circular Statistics of the Spectral Phase 62 2.5.6 Experiment 2.6: Comparative Study of Phase Representations 63 2.6 Summary 65 References 65 3 Phase Estimation Fundamentals 71 Josef Kulmer and Pejman Mowlaee 3.1 Chapter Organization 71 3.2 Phase Estimation Fundamentals 71 3.2.1 Background and Fundamentals 71 3.2.2 Key Examples: Phase Estimation Problem 72 3.2.2.1 Example 1: Discrete-Time Sinusoid 72 3.2.2.2 Example 2: Discrete-Time Sinusoid in Noise 76 3.2.3 Phase Estimation 80 3.2.3.1 Maximum Likelihood Estimation 80 3.2.3.2 Maximum a Posteriori Estimation 83 3.3 Existing Solutions 84 3.3.1 Iterative Signal Reconstruction 84 3.3.1.1 Background 84 3.3.1.2 Griffin–Lim Algorithm (GLA) 85 3.3.1.3 Extensions of the GLA 87 3.3.2 Phase Reconstruction Across Time 89 3.3.3 Phase Reconstruction Across Frequency 90 3.3.4 Phase Randomization 91 3.3.5 Geometry-Based Phase Estimation 93 3.3.6 Least Squares (LS) 95 3.3.7 Spectro-Temporal Smoothing of Unwrapped Phase 97 3.3.7.1 Signal Segmentation 97 3.3.7.2 Linear Phase Removal 98 3.3.7.3 Apply Smoothing Filter 98 3.3.7.4 Reconstruction of the Enhanced-Phase Signal 101 3.4 Experiments 101 3.4.1 Experiment 3.1: Monte Carlo Simulation Comparing ML and MAP 101 3.4.2 Experiment 3.2: Monte Carlo Simulation on Window Impact 103 3.4.3 Experiment 3.3: Phase Recovery Using the Griffin–Lim Algorithm 105 3.4.4 Experiment 3.4: Phase Estimation for Speech Enhancement: A Comparative Study 105 3.5 Summary 107 References 108 Part II Applications 113 4 Phase Processing for Single-Channel Speech Enhancement 115 Johannes Stahl and Pejman Mowlaee 4.1 Introduction and Chapter Organization 115 4.2 Speech Enhancement in the STFT Domain: General Concepts 116 4.2.1 A priori SNR Estimation 116 4.2.1.1 Decision-Directed a priori SNR Estimation 117 4.2.1.2 Cepstro-Temporal Smoothing 118 4.2.2 Noise PSD Estimation 118 4.2.2.1 Minimum Statistics 119 4.3 Conventional Speech Enhancement 119 4.3.1 Statistical Model 119 4.3.2 Short-Time Spectral Amplitude Estimation 121 4.4 Phase-Sensitive Speech Enhancement 123 4.4.1 Phase Estimation for Signal Reconstruction 123 4.4.2 Spectral Amplitude Estimation Given the STFT Phase 124 4.4.3 Iterative Closed-Loop Phase-Aware Single-Channel Speech Enhancement 126 4.4.4 Incorporating Voiced/Unvoiced Uncertainty 128 4.4.5 Uncertainty in Prior Phase Information 130 4.4.6 Stochastic–Deterministic MMSE-STFT Speech Enhancement 131 4.4.6.1 Obtaining the Speech Parameters 134 4.5 Experiments 135 4.5.1 Experiment 4.1: Proof of Concept 135 4.5.2 Experiment 4.2: Consistency 136 4.5.3 Experiment 4.3: Sensitivity Analysis 137 4.6 Summary 139 References 139 5 Phase Processing for Single-Channel Source Separation 143 Pejman Mowlaee and Florian Mayer 5.1 Chapter Organization 143 5.2 Why Single-Channel Source Separation? 143 5.2.1 Background 143 5.2.2 Problem Formulation 144 5.3 Conventional Single-Channel Source Separation 145 5.3.1 Source-Driven SCSS 146 5.3.1.1 Ideal Binary Mask 147 5.3.1.2 Ideal Ratio Mask 147 5.3.2 Model-Based SCSS 147 5.3.2.1 Deep Learning 149 5.3.2.2 Non-NegativeMatrix Factorization 150 5.4 Phase Processing for Single-Channel Source Separation 152 5.4.1 Complex Matrix Factorization Methods 152 5.4.1.1 Complex Matrix Factorization 152 5.4.1.2 Complex Matrix Factorization with Intra-Source Additivity 154 5.4.2 Phase Importance for Signal Reconstruction 155 5.4.2.1 Multiple Input Spectrogram Inversion 155 5.4.2.2 Partial Phase Reconstruction 156 5.4.2.3 Informed Source Separation Using Iterative Reconstruction (ISSIR) 157 5.4.2.4 Sinusoidal-Based PPR 158 5.4.2.5 Spectrogram Consistency 159 5.4.2.6 Geometry-Based Phase Estimation 160 5.4.2.7 Phase Decomposition and Temporal Smoothing 162 5.4.2.8 Phase Reconstruction of Spectrograms with Linear Unwrapping 163 5.4.3 Phase-Aware Time–Frequency Masks 164 5.4.3.1 Phase-Insensitive Masks 164 5.4.3.2 Phase-Sensitive Mask 165 5.4.3.3 Complex Ratio Mask 165 5.4.3.4 Complex Mask 166 5.4.4 Phase Importance in Signal Interaction Models 166 5.5 Experiments 168 5.5.1 Experiment 5.1: Phase Estimation for Proof-of-Concept Signal Reconstruction 168 5.5.2 Experiment 5.2: Comparative Study of GLA-Based Phase Reconstruction Methods 168 5.5.2.1 Convergence Analysis 169 5.5.2.2 Quantized Scenario 169 5.5.3 Experiment 5.3: Phase-Aware Time–Frequency Mask 170 5.5.4 Experiment 5.4: Phase-Sensitive Interaction Functions 172 5.5.5 Experiment 5.5: Complex Matrix Factorization 172 5.6 Summary 174 References 174 6 Phase-Aware Speech Quality Estimation 179 Pejman Mowlaee 6.1 Chapter Organization 179 6.2 Introduction: Speech Quality Estimation 179 6.2.1 General Definition of Speech Quality 180 6.2.2 Speech Quality Estimators: Amplitude, Phase, or Both? 181 6.3 Conventional Instrumental Metrics for Speech Quality Estimation 182 6.3.1 Perceived Quality 182 6.3.2 Speech Intelligibility 184 6.4 Why Phase-Aware Metrics? 188 6.4.1 Phase and Speech Intelligibility 188 6.4.2 Phase and Perceived Quality 188 6.5 New Phase-Aware Metrics 189 6.5.1 Group Delay Deviation 189 6.5.2 Instantaneous Frequency Deviation 190 6.5.3 Unwrapped MSE 190 6.5.4 Phase Deviation 190 6.5.5 UnHPSNR and UnRMSE 191 6.6 Subjective Tests 191 6.6.1 CCR Test 192 6.6.2 MUSHRA Test 192 6.6.3 Statistical Analysis 193 6.6.4 Speech Intelligibility Test 194 6.6.5 Evaluation of Speech Quality Measures 196 6.7 Experiments 198 6.7.1 Experiment 6.1: Impact of Phase Modifications on Speech Quality 199 6.7.2 Experiment 6.2: Phase and Perceived Quality Estimation 201 6.7.3 Experiment 6.3: Phase and Speech Intelligibility Estimation 202 6.7.4 Experiment 6.4: Evaluating the Phase Estimation Accuracy 203 6.8 Summary 205 References 205 7 Conclusion and Future Outlook 210 Pejman Mowlaee 7.1 Chapter Organization 210 7.2 Renaissance of Phase-Aware Signal Processing: Decline and Rise 210 7.3 Directions for Future Research 211 7.3.1 Related Research Disciplines 212 7.3.1.1 Phase-Aware Processing for Speech and Speaker Recognition 212 7.3.1.2 Speech Synthesis and Speech Coding 212 7.3.1.3 Phase-Aware Speech Enhancement for De-Reverberation 213 7.3.1.4 Iterative Signal Estimation 213 7.3.1.5 More Robust Phase Estimators 214 7.3.1.6 Instrumental Measures in Complex Signal Domain 214 7.3.1.7 Multi-Channel Speech Processing 214 7.3.2 Other Research Disciplines 215 7.3.2.1 Processing Non-Speech Signals 215 7.3.2.2 Processing Signals of Higher Dimensionality Than One 215 7.4 Summary 215 References 216 A MATLAB Toolbox 220 A.1 Chapter Organization 220 A.2 Phase Lab Toolbox 220 A.2.1 MATLAB® Code 220 A.2.2 Additional Material 221 References 221 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book highlights the display applications of c-axis aligned crystalline indiumgalliumzinc oxide (CAAC-IGZO), a new class of oxide material that challenges the dominance of silicon in the field of thin film semiconductor devices. It is an enabler for displays with high resolution and low power consumption, as well as high-productivity manufacturing. The applications of CAAC-IGZO focus on liquid crystal displays (LCDs) with extremely low power consumption for mobile applications, and high-resolution and flexible organic light-emitting diode (OLED) displays, and present a large number of prototypes developed at the Semiconductor Energy Laboratory. In particular, the description of LCDs includes how CAAC-IGZO enables LCDs with extremely low refresh rate that provides ultra-low power consumption in a wide range of use cases. Moreover, this book also offers the latest data of IGZO. The IGZO has recently achieved a mobility of 65.5 cm2?}V-s, and it is expected to pTable of ContentsAbout the Editors ix List of Contributors xi Series Editor’s Foreword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xviii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 History of Displays 3 1.2 Requirement for Displays 4 1.3 Transistor Technology for Displays 5 1.3.1 Comparison of Silicon and Oxide Semiconductors 6 1.3.2 FETs in LCDs 8 1.3.3 FETs in OLED Displays 11 1.3.4 Recent FET Technologies 14 1.3.5 Development of OLED Displays 17 References 19 2 Applications of CAAC-IGZO FETs to Displays 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Bottom-Gate Top-Contact FET 24 2.2.1 Manufacturing Process for CAAC-IGZO FETs with C.E.-Type BGTC Structure 27 2.2.2 GI Formation 27 2.2.3 Formation of Buried Channel by Stacked Active Layer 33 2.2.4 Baking Treatment of CAAC-IGZO 42 2.2.5 Damaged Layer (n-Type) Formed by Deposition of S/D Electrodes 45 2.2.6 Cleaning of the Back Channel 47 2.2.7 Copper Wiring for S/D Electrodes 52 2.3 Top-Gate Self-Aligned FET 62 2.3.1 Fabrication Process of TGSA CAAC-IGZO FETs 64 2.3.2 Formation of GE/GI Patterns 65 2.3.3 Formation of S/D Regions 66 2.3.4 GI Thinning and L Reduction 70 2.4 Characteristics of CAAC-IGZO FET 71 2.4.1 Current Drivability 71 2.4.2 Low Off-State Current 94 2.4.3 Normally-Off Id–Vg Characteristics and Small Threshold-Voltage Variation 98 2.4.4 Saturability of Id–Vd Characteristics 103 2.4.5 Summary 109 2.5 Density of States and Device Reliability 109 2.5.1 Introduction 110 2.5.2 Measurement of Defect States in IGZO Film 111 2.5.3 Correlation between Oxygen Vacancies and FET Characteristics 115 2.5.4 Defect States in Silicon-Oxide Film 117 2.5.5 NBITS Mechanism 122 2.5.6 Summary 122 2.6 Oxide Conductor Electrode Process 124 2.6.1 Introduction 124 2.6.2 Method of Fabricating Oxide Conductor Electrode and Measurements of its Resistivity 124 2.6.3 LCD Device with Oxide Conductor Electrode 131 2.6.4 Summary 134 References 135 3 Driver Circuit 138 3.1 Introduction 138 3.2 Gate-Driver Circuit 139 3.2.1 Logic Circuit and Bootstrapping 139 3.2.2 Flip-Flops 141 3.2.3 Reduction in Area of Gate-Driver Circuit 149 3.3 Source-Driver Circuit 154 3.3.1 Introduction 154 3.3.2 Demultiplexer 157 3.3.3 8-Bit Source-Driver IC for 13.3-Inch, 60-Hz, 8-Bit 8 K OLED Panels 161 3.3.4 12-Bit Source-Driver IC for 13.3-Inch, 120-Hz, 12-Bit 8 K OLED Panels 172 3.3.5 Full-Driver IC 179 References 181 4 Application to OLED Displays 183 4.1 Introduction 183 4.2 Device Architecture for High-Performance OLED 185 4.2.1 Fundamentals of OLEDs 185 4.2.2 Organic Material/Metal Oxide Composite 201 4.2.3 Exciplex–Triplet Energy Transfer for High-Performance Phosphorescent OLEDs 221 4.2.4 Enhancement in the Emission Efficiency of Fluorescent OLEDs 240 4.2.5 Increase in Outcoupling Efficiency of OLEDs by Molecular Orientation 253 4.3 OLED Structure for Higher Pixel Density 261 4.3.1 Tandem OLED 262 4.3.2 WTC Structure 269 4.3.3 Measures for Crosstalk 272 4.4 Circuit Design for OLED Displays 274 4.4.1 Driving OLED Displays 274 4.4.2 External Compensation 280 4.4.3 Internal Compensation 282 4.4.4 Arrangement of Pixel Circuit and High Resolution 291 4.5 Characteristics of OLED Displays 293 4.5.1 Application of WTC Structure to Displays 293 4.5.2 Performance of OLED and LCDs 295 References 300 5 Flexible Displays 306 5.1 Introduction 306 5.1.1 OLED and Flexible Displays 306 5.2 Flexible Display Fabrication Technology 309 5.2.1 Separation Layer 309 5.2.2 Separation Process 309 5.2.3 Transfer Process of Flexible Displays 316 5.2.4 Moisture-Blocking Property of the Flexible OLED Display 320 5.2.5 Bending Test 326 5.2.6 System Automation by Transfer Technology Apparatus (TT Apparatus) 328 5.3 Prototypes of Flexible OLED Displays 338 References 347 6 Application to Liquid Crystal Displays 349 6.1 Introduction 349 6.2 Technology for Higher Resolution 351 6.2.1 Introduction 351 6.2.2 The Pixel Circuit 351 6.2.3 Pixel Layout and Aperture Ratio of an LCD 353 6.2.4 Applicability of Large-Sized Displays 355 6.3 Driving Method for Power Saving 358 6.3.1 Introduction 358 6.3.2 Saving Power with Low-Frequency Driving 358 6.3.3 Low-Frequency Driving with CAAC-IGZO 360 6.3.4 Configuration of a Liquid Crystal Cell for Low-Frequency Driving 367 6.3.5 Conclusions 376 6.4 Characteristics of LCDs 376 6.4.1 Introduction 376 6.4.2 High-Resolution Fringe-Field Switching LCDs 376 6.4.3 A 434-PPI Reflective LCD 388 References 395 Appendix 398 Index 400

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe modern microprocessor based electronic equipment most vulnerable to Intentional Destructive Electromagnetic Interferences (IDEI) includes High-Altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP) in all substation equipment. However, power equipment and especially transformers are also subject to the influence of HEMP.Trade Review'This book provides background information on EMP and practical solutions for protecting power networks ... There are a variety of interesting protection circuits discussed and many interesting photos of unusual power distribution equipment and test equipment' IEEE, October 2017Table of ContentsAbout the Author ix Preface xi 1 Technical Progress and Its Consequences 1 1.1 Technical Progress in Relay Protection 12 1.2 Microprocessors – The Basis of the Contemporary Stage of Technical Progress 14 1.3 Smart Grid – A Dangerous Vector of ‘Technical Progress’ in Power Engineering 15 1.4 Dangerous Trends in the Development of Relay Protection Equipment 16 References 22 2 Intentional Destructive Electromagnetic Threats 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 A Brief Historical Background 25 2.3 The First Reliable Information on HEMP as Well as Protection Methods in the Field of Electrical Power Engineering 26 2.4 The Actual Situation with Respect to the Protection of Power Electrical Systems from HEMP and other Types of Intentional Destructive Electromagnetic Threats 27 2.5 Medium and Short-Range Missile Systems – Potential Sources of Intentional Destructive Electromagnetic Threats that Anti-Missile Defence Systems Are Powerless to Defend Against 30 2.6 What is Needed to Actually Defend the Country Against an ‘Electromagnetic Armageddon’? 34 2.7 The Classification and Specifics of High Power Electromagnetic Threats 35 2.8 The Effect of HPEM on Microprocessor-based Relay Protection Systems 53 2.9 The Principle Technical Standards in the HEMP Field 56 References 59 3 Methods and Techniques of Protecting DPR from EMP 65 3.1 The Sensitivity of DPR to Electromagnetic Threats 65 3.2 Methods of Protection from HEMP 68 References 69 4 Passive Methods and Techniques of Protecting DPR from EMP 71 4.1 Cabinets 71 4.2 The Earthing of Sensitive Electronic Apparatus 72 4.3 HEMP Filters 80 4.3.1 Ferrite Filters 80 4.3.2 LC Section-based Filters 87 4.4 Non-linear Overvoltage Limiters 94 4.5 Shielding of the Control Cables 99 4.6 Design Changes to DPR 105 4.6.1 Analogue Input Points 105 4.6.2 Discrete Input Points 106 4.6.3 Output Relays 107 4.6.4 Printed Boards 108 4.7 Construction Materials 109 References 112 5 Active Methods and Techniques of Protecting DPR from EMP 113 5.1 A New Principle in the Active Protection of DPR 113 5.2 Current and Voltage Sensors with Regulated Pickup Threshold based on Reed Switches 122 5.3 Technical and Economic Aspects Affecting the Active Methods of Protecting DPR 128 5.4 Protecting the Circuit Breaker Remote Control System 141 References 146 6 Testing the DPR Immunity to HPEM 149 6.1 An Analysis of Sources of HPEM 149 6.2 The Parameters of Testing DPR on Immunity to HEMP 153 6.3 The Parameters for Testing Immunity to Intentional Electromagnetic Interference (IEMI) 154 6.4 Testing Equipment for Testing Immunity to HPEM 155 6.5 Use of the Performance Criteria During Testing of Electronic Apparatus for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 166 6.6 The Idiosyncrasies of using Performance Criteria during Testing of Microprocessor Based Relay Protection Devices for their Immuinity to HPEM 167 6.7 A critique of the Method of Testing of the DPR Used in [6.16- 168 6.8 An Analysis of the Results of the Second Independent Test of a DPR of the Same Type 170 6.9 Conclusions and Recommendations for Testing Microprocessor Based Protective Relays 173 References 174 7 Administrative and Technical Measures to Protect DPR from EMP 177 7.1 Problems with the Standardization of DPR 177 7.1.1 Who Coordinates the Process of Standardization in the Field of Relay Protection? 177 7.1.2 The Fundamental Principles of the Standardization of DPR 179 7.2 The Fundamental Principles for the Standardization of DPR Testing 189 7.2.1 A New Look at the Problem 190 7.2.2 Modern Testing Systems to Test Protective Relays 192 7.2.3 The Problems with Modern Protective Relay Testing Systems 193 7.2.4 A Proposed Solution to the Problem 194 7.3 Establishment of Reserves of Electronic Equipment Replacement Modules as a Way to Improve the Survivability of the Power System 195 7.3.1 Optimizing the Capacity of Reserves of Replacement Modules 195 7.3.2 The Problem of Storing SPTA Reserves 196 References 202 8 Protecting High-Power Electrical Equipment from EMP 205 8.1 The Magneto-Hydrodynamic Effect of HEMP 205 8.2 The Influence of the E3 HEMP Component on High-Power Electrical Equipment 207 8.3 Protection of High-Power Equipment from the Impact of Geo-Magnetically Induced Currents (GIC) 208 References 216 Appendix: EMP and its Impact on the Power System 217 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn essential guide to the background, design, and application of common-mode filtering structures in modern high-speed differential communication links Written by a team of experts in the field, Electromagnetic Bandgap (EBG) Structures explores the practical electromagnetic bandgap based common mode filters for power integrity applications and covers the theoretical and practical design approaches for common mode filtering in high-speed printed circuit boards, especially for boards in high data-rate systems. The authors describe the classic applications of electromagnetic bandgap (EBG) structures and the phenomena of common mode generation in high speed digital boards. The text also explores the fundamental electromagnetic mechanisms of the functioning of planar EBGs and considers the impact of planar EBGs on the digital signal propagation of single ended and differential interconnects routed on top or between EBGs. The authors examine the concept, design, and modeling of EBG common moTable of ContentsAbout the Authors vii Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Planar EBGs: Fundamentals and Design 21 3 Impact of Planar EBGs on Signal Integrity in High-Speed Digital Boards 61 4 Planar Onboard EBG Filters for Common Mode Current Reduction 77 5 Special Topics for EBG Filters 159 6 Removable EBG Common Mode Filters 165 7 EBG Common Mode Filters: Modeling and Measurements 199 Index 219

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a comprehensive practical review of the new technologies used to obtain hydrogen more efficiently via catalytic, electrochemical, bio- and photohydrogen production. Hydrogen has been gaining more attention in both transportation and stationary power applications. Fuel cell-powered cars are on the roads and the automotive industry is demanding feasible and efficient technologies to produce hydrogen. The principles and methods described herein lead to reasonable mitigation of the great majority of problems associated with hydrogen production technologies. The chapters in this book are written by distinguished authors who have extensive experience in their fields, and readers will have a chance to compare the fundamental production techniques and learn about the pros and cons of these technologies. The book is organized into three parts. Part I shows the catalytic and electrochemical principles involved in hydrogen production technologies. Part II addresses hydrogen prodTable of ContentsPreface xvii Part I Catalytic and Electrochemical Hydrogen Production 1 Hydrogen Production from Oxygenated Hydrocarbons: Review of Catalyst Development, Reaction Mechanism and Reactor Modeling 3 Mohanned Mohamedali, Amr Henni and Hussameldin Ibrahim 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Catalyst Development for the Steam Reforming Process 6 1.3 Kinetics and Reaction Mechanism for Steam Reforming of Oxygenated Hydrocarbons 37 1.4 Reactor Modeling and Simulation in Steam Reforming of Oxygenated Hydrocarbons 48 References 50 2 Ammonia Decomposition for Decentralized Hydrogen Production in Microchannel Reactors: Experiments and CFD Simulations 77 Steven Chiuta, Raymond C. Everson, Hein W.J.P. Neomagus and Dmitri G. Bessarabov 2.1 Introduction 78 2.2 Ammonia Decomposition for Hydrogen Production 80 2.3 Ammonia-Fueled Microchannel Reactors for Hydrogen Production: Experiments 89 2.4 CFD Simulation of Hydrogen Production in Ammonia-Fueled Microchannel Reactors 96 2.5 Summary 104 Acknowledgments 104 References 104 3 Hydrogen Production with Membrane Systems 113 F. Gallucci, A. Arratibel, J.A. Medrano, E. Fernandez, M.v. Sint Annaland and D.A. Pacheco Tanaka 3.1 Introduction 114 3.2 Pd-Based Membranes 115 3.3 Fuel Reforming in Membrane Reactors for Hydrogen Production 125 3.4 Thermodynamic and Economic Analysis of Fluidized Bed Membrane Reactors for Methane Reforming 129 3.5 Conclusions 143 Acknowledgments 144 References 144 4 Catalytic Hydrogen Production from Bioethanol 153 Peng He and Hua Song 4.1 Introduction 154 4.2 Production Technology Overview 155 4.3 Catalyst Overview 166 4.4 Catalyst Optimization Strategies 168 4.5 Reaction Mechanism and Kinetic Studies 174 4.6 Computational Approaches 179 4.7 Economic Considerations 182 4.8 Future Development Directions 185 Acknowledgment 189 References 189 5 Hydrogen Generation from the Hydrolysis of Ammonia Borane Using Transition Metal Nanoparticles as Catalyst 207 Serdar Akbayrak and Saim Özkar 5.1 Introduction 207 5.2 Transition Metal Nanoparticles in Catalysis 209 5.3 Preparation, Stabilization and Characterization of Metal Nanoparticles 209 5.4 Transition Metal Nanoparticles in Hydrogen Generation from the Hydrolysis of Ammonia Borane 212 5.5 Durability of Catalysts in Hydrolysis of Ammonia Borane 218 5.6 Conclusion 221 References 222 6 Hydrogen Production by Water Electrolysis 231 Sergey A. Grigoriev and Vladimir N. Fateev 6.1 Historical Aspects of Water Electrolysis 231 6.2 Fundamentals of Electrolysis 232 6.3 Modern Status of Electrolysis 238 6.4 Perspectives of Hydrogen Production by Electrolysis 266 Acknowledgment 268 References 269 7 Electrochemical Hydrogen Production from SO2 and Water in a SDE Electrolyzer 277 A.J. Krüger, J. Kerres, H.M. Krieg and D. Bessarabov 7.1 Introduction 278 7.2 Membrane Characterization 280 7.3 MEA Characterization 286 7.4 Effect of Anode Impurities 293 7.5 High Temperature SO2 Electrolysis 295 7.6 Conclusion 297 References 298 Part II Bio Hydrogen Production 8 Biomass Fast Pyrolysis for Hydrogen Production from Bio-Oil 307 K. Bizkarra, V.L. Barrio, P.L. Arias and J.F. Cambra 8.1 Introduction 308 8.2 Biomass Pyrolysis to Produce Bio-Oils 310 8.3 Bio–oil Reforming Processes 331 8.4 Future Prospects 346 References 348 9 Production of a Clean Hydrogen-Rich Gas by the Staged Gasification of Biomass and Plastic Waste 363 Joo-Sik Kim and Young-Kon Choi 9.1 Introduction 364 9.2 Chemistry of Gasification 365 9.3 Tar Cracking and H2 Production 367 9.4 Staged Gasification 368 9.5 Experimental Results and Discussion 370 9.6 Conclusions 383 References 383 10 Enhancement of Bio-hydrogen Production Technologies by Sulphate-Reducing Bacteria 385 Hugo Iván Velázquez-Sánchez, Pablo Antonio López-Pérez, María Isabel Neria-González and Ricardo Aguilar-López 10.1 Introduction 386 10.2 Sulphate-Reducing Bacteria for H2 Production 387 10.3 Kinetic Modeling of the SR Fermentation 388 10.4 Bifurcation Analysis 394 10.5 Process Control Strategies 398 10.6 Conclusions 403 Acknowledgment 403 Nomenclature 403 References 404 11 Microbial Electrolysis Cells (MECs) as Innovative Technology for Sustainable Hydrogen Production: Fundamentals and Perspective Applications 407 Abudukeremu Kadier, Mohd Sahaid Kalil, Azah Mohamed, Hassimi Abu Hasan, Peyman Abdeshahian, Tayebeh Fooladi and Aidil Abdul Hamid 11.1 Introduction 408 11.2 Principles of MEC for Hydrogen Production 409 11.3 Thermodynamics of MEC 410 11.4 Factors Influencing the Performance of MECs 412 11.5 Current Application of MECs 432 11.6 Conclusions and Prospective Application of MECs 440 Acknowledgments 441 References 441 12 Algae to Hydrogen: Novel Energy-Efficient Co-Production of Hydrogen and Power 459 Muhammad Aziz and Ilman Nuran Zaini 12.1 Introduction 459 12.2 Algae Potential and Characteristics 461 12.3 Energy-Efficient Energy Harvesting Technologies 464 12.4 Pretreatment (Drying) 467 12.5 Conversion of Algae to Hydrogen-Rich Gases 470 12.6 Conclusions 482 References 483 Part III Photo Hydrogen Production 13 Semiconductor-Based Nanomaterials for Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 489 Zipeng Xing, Zhenzi Li and Wei Zhou 13.1 Introduction 490 13.2 Semiconductor Oxide-Based Nanomaterials for Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 491 13.3 Semiconductor Sulfide-Based Nanomaterials for Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 506 13.4 Metal-Free Semiconductor Nanomaterials for Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 517 13.5 Summary and Prospects 527 Acknowledgments 528 References 528 14 Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation Enabled by Nanostructured TiO2 Materials 545 Mengye Wang, Meidan Ye, James Iocozziaand Zhiqun Lin 14.1 Introduction 546 14.2 Photocatalytic H2 Generation 547 14.3 Main Experimental Parameters in Photocatalytic H2 Generation Reaction 549 14.4 Types of TiO2 Nanostructures 551 14.5 Conclusions and Outlook 568 Acknowledgments 569 References 569 15 Polymeric Carbon Nitride-Based Composites for Visible-Light-Driven Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 579 Pablo Martín-Ramos, Jesús Martín-Gil and Manuela Ramos Silva 15.1 Introduction 580 15.2 General Comments on g-C3N4 and its Basic Properties 581 15.3 Synthesis of Bulk g-C3N4 586 15.4 Functionalization of g-C3N4 588 15.5 Photocatalytic Hydrogen Production Using g-C3N4 598 15.6 Conclusions 614 References 615

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe definite guide to the theory, knowledge, technical expertise, and ethical considerations that define the M&S profession From traffic control to disaster management, supply chain analysis to military logistics, healthcare management to new drug discovery, modeling and simulation (M&S) has become an essential tool for solving countless real-world problems. M&S professionals are now indispensable to how things get done across virtually every aspect of modern life. This makes it all the more surprising that, until now, no effort has been made to systematically codify the core theory, knowledge, and technical expertise needed to succeed as an M&S professional. This book brings together contributions from experts at the leading edge of the modeling and simulation profession, worldwide, who share their priceless insights into issues which are fundamental to professional success and career development in this critically important field. Running as a common thread thTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv List of Contributors xix Notes on Contributors xxiii Part I Foundation 1 1 An Introduction to the Facets of the Profession of Modeling and Simulation 3Andreas Tolk 2 An Index to the Body of Knowledge of Simulation Systems Engineering 11Umut Durak, Tuncer Ören, and Andreas Tolk 3 Code of Ethics 35Andreas Tolk Part II Education 53 4 M&S as a Profession and an Academic Discipline: A Contemporary View 55John A. Sokolowski and Roland R. Mielke 5 Academic Education Supporting the Professional Landscape 87Margaret L. Loper and Charles D. Turnitsa 6 The Certified Modeling and Simulation Professional Certification and Examination 109Mikel D. Petty, Gregory S. Reed, and William V. Tucker Part III Society 129 7 Modeling and Simulation Societies Shaping the Profession 131Robert K. Armstrong and Simon J.E. Taylor 8 The Uniformed Military Modeling and Simulation Professional 151Rudolph P. Darken and Curtis L. Blais 9 M&S as a Profession and Discipline in China 167Lin Zhang, Yingnian Wu, and Gengjiao Yang 10 Modeling and Simulation for the Enterprise: Integrating Application Domains for the M&S Professional 183Steve Swenson, Robert M. Gravitz, and Gary M. Lightner Part IV Application 209 11 A Complexity and Creative Innovation Dynamics Perspective to Sustaining the Growth and Vitality of the M&S Profession 211Levent Yilmaz 12 Theory and Practice of M&S in Cyber Environments 223Saurabh Mittal and Bernard P. Zeigler Part V Economics 265 13 Funding an Academic Simulation Project: The Economics of M&S 267Saikou Y. Diallo, Christopher J. Lynch, and Navonil Mustafee 14 Why Spend One More Dollar for M&S? Observations on the Return of Investment 287Steven Gordon, Ivar Oswalt, and Tim Cooley 15 Does M&S Help? Operationalizing Cost Avoidance and Proficiency Evaluations 325Steven Gordon, Tim Cooley, and Ivar Oswalt Part VI Policy 351 16 Building a National Modeling and Simulation (M&S) Coalition 353Randall B. Garrett, James A. Robb, Richard J. Severinghaus, and Richard Fujimoto Index 373

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical guide for engineers and students that covers a wide range of optical design and optical metrology topics Optical Engineering Science offers a comprehensive and authoritative review of the science of optical engineering. The book bridges the gap between the basic theoretical principles of classical optics and the practical application of optics in the commercial world. Written by a noted expert in the field, the book examines a range of practical topics that are related to optical design, optical metrology and manufacturing. The book fills a void in the literature by coving all three topics in a single volume. Optical engineering science is at the foundation of the design of commercial optical systems, such as mobile phone cameras and digital cameras as well as highly sophisticated instruments for commercial and research applications.It spans the design, manufacture and testing of space or aerospace instrumentation to the optical sensor technology for environmental monitoTable of ContentsPreface xxi Glossary xxv About the Companion Website xxix 1 Geometrical Optics 1 1.1 Geometrical Optics – Ray and Wave Optics 1 1.2 Fermat’s Principle and the Eikonal Equation 2 1.3 Sequential Geometrical Optics – A Generalised Description 3 1.4 Behaviour of Simple Optical Components and Surfaces 10 1.5 Paraxial Approximation and Gaussian Optics 15 1.6 Matrix Ray Tracing 16 Further Reading 21 2 Apertures Stops and Simple Instruments 23 2.1 Function of Apertures and Stops 23 2.2 Aperture Stops, Chief, and Marginal Rays 23 2.3 Entrance Pupil and Exit Pupil 25 2.4 Telecentricity 27 2.5 Vignetting 27 2.6 Field Stops and Other Stops 28 2.7 Tangential and Sagittal Ray Fans 28 2.8 Two Dimensional Ray Fans and Anamorphic Optics 28 2.9 Optical Invariant and Lagrange Invariant 30 2.10 Eccentricity Variable 31 2.11 Image Formation in Simple Optical Systems 31 Further Reading 36 3 Monochromatic Aberrations 37 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 Breakdown of the Paraxial Approximation and Third Order Aberrations 37 3.3 Aberration and Optical Path Difference 41 3.4 General Third Order Aberration Theory 46 3.5 Gauss-Seidel Aberrations 47 3.6 Summary of Third Order Aberrations 55 Further Reading 58 4 Aberration Theory and Chromatic Aberration 59 4.1 General Points 59 4.2 Aberration Due to a Single Refractive Surface 60 4.3 Reflection from a Spherical Mirror 64 4.4 Refraction Due to Optical Components 67 4.5 The Effect of Pupil Position on Element Aberration 78 4.6 Abbe Sine Condition 81 4.7 Chromatic Aberration 83 4.8 Hierarchy of Aberrations 92 Further Reading 94 5 Aspheric Surfaces and Zernike Polynomials 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Aspheric Surfaces 95 5.3 Zernike Polynomials 100 Further Reading 109 6 Diffraction, Physical Optics, and Image Quality 111 6.1 Introduction 111 6.2 The Eikonal Equation 112 6.3 Huygens Wavelets and the Diffraction Formulae 112 6.4 Diffraction in the Fraunhofer Approximation 115 6.5 Diffraction in an Optical System – the Airy Disc 116 6.6 The Impact of Aberration on System Resolution 120 6.7 Laser Beam Propagation 123 6.8 Fresnel Diffraction 130 6.9 Diffraction and Image Quality 132 Further Reading 138 7 Radiometry and Photometry 139 7.1 Introduction 139 7.2 Radiometry 139 7.3 Scattering of Light from Rough Surfaces 146 7.4 Scattering of Light from Smooth Surfaces 147 7.5 Radiometry and Object Field Illumination 151 7.6 Radiometric Measurements 155 7.7 Photometry 158 Further Reading 166 8 Polarisation and Birefringence 169 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 Polarisation 170 8.3 Birefringence 178 8.4 Polarisation Devices 187 8.5 Analysis of Polarisation Components 191 8.6 Stress-induced Birefringence 196 Further Reading 197 9 Optical Materials 199 9.1 Introduction 199 9.2 Refractive Properties of Optical Materials 200 9.3 Transmission Characteristics of Materials 212 9.4 Thermomechanical Properties 215 9.5 Material Quality 219 9.6 Exposure to Environmental Attack 221 9.7 Material Processing 221 Further Reading 222 10 Coatings and Filters 223 10.1 Introduction 223 10.2 Properties of Thin Films 223 10.3 Filters 232 10.4 Design of Thin Film Filters 244 10.5 Thin Film Materials 246 10.6 Thin Film Deposition Processes 247 Further Reading 250 11 Prisms and Dispersion Devices 251 11.1 Introduction 251 11.2 Prisms 251 11.3 Analysis of Diffraction Gratings 257 11.4 Diffractive Optics 273 11.5 Grating Fabrication 274 Further Reading 276 12 Lasers and Laser Applications 277 12.1 Introduction 277 12.2 Stimulated Emission Schemes 279 12.3 Laser Cavities 284 12.4 Taxonomy of Lasers 293 12.5 List of Laser Types 298 12.6 Laser Applications 301 Further Reading 308 13 Optical Fibres and Waveguides 309 13.1 Introduction 309 13.2 Geometrical Description of Fibre Propagation 310 13.3 Waveguides and Modes 317 13.4 Single Mode Optical Fibres 324 13.5 Optical Fibre Materials 329 13.6 Coupling of Light into Fibres 330 13.7 Fibre Splicing and Connection 334 13.8 Fibre Splitters, Combiners, and Couplers 335 13.9 Polarisation and Polarisation Maintaining Fibres 335 13.10 Focal Ratio Degradation 336 13.11 Periodic Structures in Fibres 336 13.12 Fibre Manufacture 338 13.13 Fibre Applications 339 Further Reading 339 14 Detectors 341 14.1 Introduction 341 14.2 Detector Types 341 14.3 Noise in Detectors 354 14.4 Radiometry and Detectors 364 14.5 Array Detectors in Instrumentation 365 Further Reading 368 15 Optical Instrumentation – Imaging Devices 369 15.1 Introduction 369 15.2 The Design of Eyepieces 370 15.3 Microscope Objectives 378 15.4 Telescopes 381 15.5 Camera Systems 392 Further Reading 405 16 Interferometers and Related Instruments 407 16.1 Introduction 407 16.2 Background 407 16.3 Classical Interferometers 409 16.4 Calibration 418 16.5 Interferometry and Null Tests 420 16.6 Interferometry and Phase Shifting 425 16.7 Miscellaneous Characterisation Techniques 426 Further Reading 433 17 Spectrometers and Related Instruments 435 17.1 Introduction 435 17.2 Basic Spectrometer Designs 436 17.3 Time Domain Spectrometry 454 Further Reading 457 18 Optical Design 459 18.1 Introduction 459 18.2 Design Philosophy 461 18.3 Optical Design Tools 467 18.4 Non-Sequential Modelling 487 18.5 Afterword 495 Further Reading 495 19 Mechanical and Thermo-Mechanical Modelling 497 19.1 Introduction 497 19.2 Basic Elastic Theory 498 19.3 Basic Analysis of Mechanical Distortion 501 19.4 Basic Analysis of Thermo-Mechanical Distortion 517 19.5 Finite Element Analysis 525 Further Reading 529 20 Optical Component Manufacture 531 20.1 Introduction 531 20.2 Conventional Figuring of Optical Surfaces 532 20.3 Specialist Shaping and Polishing Techniques 539 20.4 Diamond Machining 541 20.5 Edging and Bonding 547 20.6 Form Error and Surface Roughness 550 20.7 Standards and Drawings 551 Further Reading 557 21 System Integration and Alignment 559 21.1 Introduction 559 21.2 Component Mounting 561 21.3 Optical Bonding 573 21.4 Alignment 577 21.5 Cleanroom Assembly 583 Further Reading 586 22 Optical Test and Verification 587 22.1 Introduction 587 22.2 Facilities 589 22.3 Environmental Testing 591 22.4 Geometrical Testing 595 22.5 Image Quality Testing 603 22.6 Radiometric Tests 604 22.7 Material and Component Testing 609 Further Reading 612 Index 613

Read more less

Book SynopsisA complete and comprehensive reference on modulation and signal processing for visible light communication This informative new book on state-of-the-art visible light communication (VLC) provides, for the first time, a systematical and advanced treatment of modulation and signal processing for VLC. Visible Light Communications: Modulation and Signal Processing offers a practical guide to designing VLC, linking academic research with commercial applications. In recent years, VLC has attracted attention from academia and industry since it has many advantages over the traditional radio frequency, including wide unregulated bandwidth, high security, and low cost. It is a promising complementary technique in 5G and beyond wireless communications, especially in indoor applications. However, lighting constraints have not been fully considered in the open literature when considering VLC system design, and its importance has been underestimated. That's why this boTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction to Visible Light Communications 1 1.1 History 1 1.2 Advantages and applications 4 1.3 Overview of modulation and signal processing 6 1.4 Standards 10 2 Visible Light Communications: Channel and Capacity 17 2.1 LED characteristics 17 2.1.1 Operation principles 19 2.1.2 LED nonlinearity 21 2.2 LED lighting constraints 23 2.2.1 Dimming control 23 2.2.2 Chromaticity control 25 2.2.3 Flicker-free communication 26 2.3 Photodiode characteristics 27 2.4 Propagation links 29 2.4.1 LOS link 31 2.4.2 NLOS link 32 2.5 Noise in VLC systems 33 2.6 Channel capacity 35 2.6.1 Channel models 36 2.6.2 Capacity bounds for free-space optical intensity channel 38 2.6.3 Capacity bounds for discrete-time Poisson channel 47 2.6.4 Capacity bounds for improved free-space intensity channel 50 2.7 Conclusion 53 3 Single Carrier/Carrierless Modulation and Coding 57 3.1 Pulse amplitude modulation 57 3.2 Pulse position modulation 62 3.3 Carrierless amplitude phase modulation 68 3.3.1 Principles of CAP 69 3.3.2 Multidimensional CAP 73 3.4 Modulation and coding schemes for dimmable VLC 77 3.4.1 Modulation schemes for dimmable VLC 78 3.4.2 Coding schemes for dimmable VLC 80 3.5 Conclusion 82 4 Multicarrier Modulation 89 4.1 Optical OFDM for visible light communications 90 4.1.1 DC-biased optical OFDM 90 4.1.2 ACO-OFDM and PAM-DMT 93 4.1.3 Unipolar OFDM 97 4.1.4 Performance comparison 98 4.2 Performance enhancement for optical OFDM 99 4.2.1 DC bias and scaling optimization 100 4.2.2 LED nonlinearity mitigation 103 4.2.3 PAPR reduction 107 4.3 Spectrum- and power-efficient optical OFDM 111 4.3.1 Hybrid optical OFDM 111 4.3.2 Enhanced U-OFDM 118 4.3.3 Layered ACO-OFDM 121 4.4 Optical OFDM under lighting constraints 131 4.4.1 Pulse width modulation 133 4.4.2 Reverse polarity optical OFDM 136 4.4.3 Asymmetrical hybrid optical OFDM 137 4.5 Conclusion 142 5 Multicolor Modulation 147 5.1 Color shift keying 147 5.1.1 Constellation 148 5.1.2 Color calibration 151 5.1.3 Constellation optimization 152 5.1.4 CSK with Quad-LED 155 5.2 CSK with coded modulation 156 5.3 Wavelength division multiplexing with predistorion 159 5.3.1 System model 160 5.3.2 Receiver-side predistortion 161 5.3.3 Performance evaluation 164 5.4 Conclusion 166 6 Optical MIMO 169 6.1 Non-imaging optical MIMO techniques 170 6.1.1 Channel response 170 6.1.2 Optical MIMO techniques 171 6.1.3 Performance comparison 175 6.2 Imaging optical MIMO techniques 178 6.3 Multiuser precoding techniques 180 6.4 Optical MIMO-OFDM 190 6.4.1 DCO-OFDM-based MU-MIMO VLC 193 6.4.2 ACO-OFDM-based MU-MIMO VLC 194 6.4.3 Performance evaluation 195 6.5 Conclusion 197 7 Signal Processing and Optimization 201 7.1 Sum-rate maximization for the multi-chip-based VLC system 201 7.1.1 System model 202 7.1.2 Constraints on illumination and communication 203 7.1.3 Sum-rate maximization 205 7.1.4 Performance evaluation 208 7.2 Heterogeneous VLC-WiFi optimization 212 7.2.1 System model 213 7.2.2 Efficient VHO scheme 214 7.2.3 Performance evaluation 219 7.3 Signal estimation and modulation design for VLC with SDGN 223 7.3.1 Signal estimation for VLC with SDGN 223 7.3.2 Suboptimal estimation for VLC with SDGN 228 7.3.3 Efficient signal design for VLC with SDGN 230 7.4 Conclusion 236 8 Optical Camera Communication: Fundamentals 239 8.1 Why OCC 239 8.1.1 Wide spectrum 240 8.1.2 Image-sensor-based receiver 240 8.1.3 Advantages of image sensor receiver 241 8.1.4 Challenges for OCC implementation 244 8.2 OCC applications: beyond imaging 246 8.2.1 Indoor localization 246 8.2.2 Intelligent transportation 249 8.2.3 Screen–camera communication 250 8.2.4 Privacy protection 251 8.3 Fundamentals of OCC 252 8.3.1 Optical imaging system 252 8.3.2 Image sensor architecture 253 8.3.3 Noise characteristics in the image-sensor-based receiver 261 8.3.4 Channel model for OCC 270 8.4 Capacity bounds for OCC 275 8.4.1 SISO-OCC channel capacity with M-SDGN 275 8.4.2 Capacity-achieving probability measurement with M-SDGN 276 8.4.3 Capacity of imaging optical MIMO systems with bounded inputs 280 8.5 Outage capacity for OCC with misalignment 284 8.6 Conclusion 285 9 Optical Camera Communication: Modulation and System Design 291 9.1 Coding and decoding 292 9.1.1 Multilevel coding and multi-stage decoding 293 9.1.2 Single-level coding and joint decoding 295 9.2 Modulation schemes 297 9.2.1 Undersampling-based modulation 298 9.2.2 Rolling shutter effect-based modulation 301 9.2.3 Spatial OFDM 304 9.2.4 Spatial WPDM 307 9.3 System impairment factors 309 9.3.1 Impairment factors in spatial OFDM 309 9.3.2 Impairment mitigation techniques 322 9.4 Synchronization in OCC 329 9.4.1 Synchronization challenges 329 9.4.2 Per-line tracking and inter-frame coding 331 9.4.3 Rateless coding 333 9.5 OCC system experimental platform 336 9.5.1 Design and implementation of a real-time OCC system 336 9.6 Conclusion 347 10 Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisA reliable and focused treatment of the emergent technology of fifth generation (5G) networks This book provides an understanding of the most recent developments in 5G, from both theoretical and industrial perspectives. It identifies and discusses technical challenges and recent results related to improving capacity and spectral efficiency on the radio interface side, and operations management on the core network side. It covers both existing network technologies and those currently in development in three major areas of 5G: spectrum extension, spatial spectrum utilization, and core network and network topology management. It explores new spectrum opportunities; the capability of radio access technology; and the operation of network infrastructure and heterogeneous QoE provisioning. 5G Networks: Fundamental Requirements, Enabling Technologies, and Operations Management is split into five sections: Physical Layer for 5G Radio Interface Technologies; Radio Table of ContentsForeword xxi Preface xxv Author Bios xxvii List of Contributors xxxi List of Abbreviations xxxvii Introduction 1 Part I Physical Layer for 5G Radio Interface Technologies 13 1 Emerging Technologies in Software, Hardware, and Management Aspects Toward the 5G Era: Trends and Challenges 15 Ioannis-Prodromos Belikaidis, Andreas Georgakopoulos, Evangelos Kosmatos, Stavroula Vassaki, Orestis-Andreas Liakopoulos, Vassilis Foteinos, Panagiotis Vlacheas, and Panagiotis Demestichas 1.1 Introduction 15 1.2 5G Requirements and Technology Trends 17 1.3 Status and Challenges in Hardware and Software Development 20 1.4 5G Network Management Aspects Enhanced with Machine Learning 38 1.5 Conclusion 45 References 45 2 Waveform Design for 5G and Beyond 51Ali Fatih Demir, Mohamed Elkourdi,Mostafa Ibrahim, and Huseyin Arslan 2.1 Introduction 51 2.2 Fundamentals of the 5G Waveform Design 52 2.3 Major Waveform Candidates for 5G and Beyond 58 2.4 Summary 70 2.5 Conclusions 73 References 73 3 Full-Duplex System Design for 5G Access 77Shu-ping Yeh, Jingwen Bai, PingWang, Feng Xue, Yang-seok Choi, Shilpa Talwar, Sung-en Chiu, and Vinod Kristem 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Self-Interference Cancellation 79 3.3 FD System Design: Opportunities and Challenges 82 3.4 Designing the FD System 84 3.5 System-Level Performance Analysis 108 3.6 Conclusions and Future Directions 125 References 130 4 Nonorthogonal Multiple Access for 5G 135Linglong Dai, Bichai Wang, Ruicheng Jiao, Zhiguo Ding, Shuangfeng Han, and Chih-Lin I 4.1 Introduction 135 4.2 Basic Principles and Advantages of NOMA 137 4.3 Power-Domain NOMA 142 4.4 Code-Domain NOMA 155 4.5 Other NOMA Schemes 170 4.6 Comparison and Trade-Off Analysis of NOMA Solutions 178 4.7 Performance Evaluations and Transmission Experiments of NOMA 181 4.8 Opportunities and Future Research Trends 185 4.9 Conclusions 189 References 189 5 Code Design for Multiuser MIMO 205Guanghui Song, Yuhao Chi, Kui Cai, Ying Li, and Jun Cheng 5.1 Introduction 206 5.2 Multiuser Repetition-Aided IRA Coding Scheme 207 5.3 Iterative Decoding and EXIT Analysis 209 5.4 Code Optimization Procedure 217 5.5 Numerical Results and Comparisons 218 5.6 Conclusion 230 References 231 6 Physical Layer Techniques for 5G Wireless Security 237Batu K. Chalise, Himal A. Suraweera, Gan Zheng, and Risto Wichman 6.1 Introduction 237 6.2 5G Physical Layer Architecture 241 6.3 Secure Full-Duplex Receiver Jamming 247 6.4 Secure Full-Duplex Bidirectional Communications 255 6.5 Secure Full-Duplex Relay Communications 259 6.6 Future Directions and Open Issues 266 6.7 Conclusion 268 References 269 7 Codebook-Based Beamforming Protocols for 5G Millimeter Wave Communications 275Anggrit Dewangkara Yudha Pinangkis, Kishor Chandra, and R. Venkatesha Prasad 7.1 Introduction 275 7.2 Beamforming Architecture 278 7.3 Beam Searching Algorithm 280 7.4 Codebook Design 286 7.5 Beamforming Evaluation 290 7.6 Conclusion 291 References 293 Part II Radio Access Technology for 5G Networks 299 8 Universal Access in 5G Networks: Potential Challenges and Opportunities for Urban and Rural Environments 301Syed Ali Hassan, Muhammad Shahmeer Omar,Muhammad Ali Imran, Junaid Qadir, and Dushantha Nalin K. Jayakody 8.1 Introduction 301 8.2 Access for Urban Environments 302 8.3 Providing Access to Rural Areas 312 8.4 Conclusions 320 References 321 9 Network Slicing for 5G Networks 327Xavier Costa-Pérez, Andrés Garcia-Saavedra, Fabio Giust, Vincenzo Sciancalepore, Xi Li, Zarrar Yousaf, and Marco Liebsch 9.1 Introduction 327 9.2 End-to-End Network Slicing 328 9.3 Network Slicing MANO 334 9.4 Network Slicing at the Mobile Edge 343 9.5 Network Slicing at the Mobile Transport 349 9.6 Network Slicing at the Mobile Cloud 358 9.7 Acknowledgment 364 References 365 10 The Evolution Toward Ethernet-Based Converged 5G RAN 371Jouni Korhonen 10.1 Introduction to RAN Transport Network 372 10.2 Evolving RAN Toward 5G Requirements 384 10.3 Ethernet-Based 5G RAN 399 10.4 Summary 418 References 418 11 Energy-Efficient 5G Networks Using Joint Energy Harvesting and Scheduling 427Ahmad Alsharoa, Abdulkadir Celik, and Ahmed E. Kamal 11.1 Introduction 427 11.2 System Model 432 11.3 Problem Formulation and Solution 436 11.4 Low-Complexity Algorithm 439 11.5 Simulation Results 441 11.6 Chapter Summary 445 References 446 Part III 5G Network Interworking and Core Network Advancements 453 12 Characterizing and Learning the Mobile Data Traffic in Cellular Network 455Rongpeng Li, Zhifeng Zhao, Chen Qi, and Honggang Zhang 12.1 Understanding the Traffic Nature: A Revisiting to 𝛼-Stable Models 455 12.2 The Traffic Predictability in Cellular Networks 470 12.3 The Prediction of Application-Level Traffic 476 12.4 Related Works 490 12.5 Conclusion 493 References 493 13 Network Softwarization View of 5G Networks 499Takashi Shimizu, Akihiro Nakao, and Kohei Satoh 13.1 Introduction 499 13.2 Key Concept of 5G 500 13.3 Network Softwarization View of 5G Networks 501 13.4 Brief History of Network Softwarization and Slicing 503 13.5 Issues for Slicing Towards 5G 504 13.6 Information-Centric Network (ICN) Enabled by Network Softwarization 509 13.7 Studies in ITU-T SG13 Focus Group on IMT-2020 515 13.8 Conclusion 515 References 515 14 Machine-Type Communication in the 5G Era: Massive and Ultrareliable Connectivity Forces of Evolution, Revolution, and Complementarity 519Renaud Di Francesco and Peter Karlsson 14.1 Overview 519 14.2 Introduction 520 14.3 Demand Analysis 522 14.4 Reviewing the Standardization Path So Far 532 14.5 Conclusion on Machine-Type 5G 537 References 538 Part IV Vertical 5G Applications 543 15 Social-Aware Content Delivery in Device-to-Device Underlay Networks 545Chen Xu, Caixia Gao, Zhenyu Zhou, ShahidMumtaz, and Jonathan Rodriguez 15.1 Introduction 545 15.2 Related Works 548 15.3 System Model 552 15.4 Problem Formulation 557 15.5 Social Network-Based Content Delivery Matching Algorithm for D2D Underlay Networks 558 15.6 Numerical Results 565 15.7 Conclusions 569 References 570 16 Service-Oriented Architecture for IoT Home Area Networking in 5G 577Mohd Rozaini Abd Rahim, Rozeha A. Rashid, AhmadM. Rateb, Mohd Adib Sarijari, Ahmad Shahidan Abdullah, Abdul Hadi Fikri Abdul Hamid, Hamdan Sayuti, and Norsheila Fisal 16.1 Introduction 577 16.2 Service-Oriented Architecture 579 16.3 Related Work 581 16.4 Service-Oriented Architecture for Home Area Network (SoHAN) 584 16.5 Performance Evaluation 591 16.6 Conclusion 596 References 597 17 Provisioning Unlicensed LAA Interface for Smart Grid Applications 603Saba Al-Rubaye and John Cosmas 17.1 Introduction 603 17.2 Smart Grid Architecture-Based 5G Communications 605 17.3 Bandwidth UtilizationMethod 608 17.4 System Implementation and Simulation Platform 615 17.5 Summary and Conclusions 620 References 621 Part V R&D and 5G Standardization 625 18 5G Communication System: A Network Operator Perspective 627Bruno Jacobfeuerborn and Frank H. P. Fitzek 18.1 Introduction 627 18.2 Softwarization for the 5G Communication System 634 18.3 5G Holistic Testbed 642 18.4 5G as Game Changer in the Value Chain 647 18.5 Conclusion 647 18.6 Acknowledgments 648 References 649 19 Toward All-IT 5G End-to-End Infrastructure 653Alex Jinsung Choi, Jinhyo Park, Sungho Jo, and Sangsoo Jeong 19.1 Introduction 653 19.2 Development Status and Lesson Learned 655 19.3 Infrastructure Evolution of SK Telecom for 5G: ATSCALE 664 19.4 Detailed Architecture and Key Enabling Technology 668 19.5 Value Proposition 683 19.6 Summary and Conclusion 687 References 687 20 Standardization: The Road to 5G 691M. P. Galante and G. Romano 20.1 The Role of Standardization 691 20.2 The Main Standardization Bodies 693 20.3 5G Standardization Process 694 20.4 ITU-R 697 20.5 3GPP 699 References 705 Index 709

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book approaches the topic area of the Internet of Things (IoT) from the perspective of the five types of human communication. Through this perspective on the human communication types, the book aims to specifically address how IoT technologies can support humans and their endeavors. The book explores the fields of sensors, wireless, physiology, biology, wearables, and the Internet. This book is organized with five sections, each covering a central theme; Section 1: The basics of human bond communication Section 2: Relevance IoT, BAN and PAN Section 3: Applications of HBC Section 4: Security, Privacy and Regulatory Challenges Section 5: The Big Picture (Where do we go from here?)Table of ContentsList of Contributors ix About the Editors xi Preface xv Abbreviations xvii 1 Introduction to Human Bond Communication 1Sudhir Dixit and Ramjee Prasad 2 General Concepts Behind Human Bond Communication 11Liljana Gavrilovska, Valentin Rakovic, and Sudhir Dixit 3 Advanced Reconfigurable 5G Architectures for Human Bond Communication 41Enrico Del Re, Simone Morosi, Luca Simone Ronga, Lorenzo Mucchi, Sara Jayousi, and Federica Paganelli 4 Data Mining of the Human Being 59Mauro De Sanctis and Pierpaolo Loreti 5 Human]Centric IoT Networks 71Albena Mihovska, Ramjee Prasad, and Milica Pejanovic 6 Body as a Network Node: Key is the Oral Cavity 87Marina Ruggieri and Gianpaolo Sannino 7 Human Bond Communication Using Cognitive Radio Approach for Efficient Spectrum Utilization 97Sachin Sharma and Seshadri Mohan 8 Technology Advancement and Integration in the Context of Wildlife Conservation 115Pradeep K. Mathur, Bilal Habib, and Prateek Mathur 9 An Investigation of Security and Privacy for Human Bond Communications 131Geir M. Køien 10 The Internet of Everything and Beyond: The Interplay between Things and Humans 173Helga E. Melcherts 11 Human Bond Communications in Health: Ethical and Legal Issues 187Ernestina Cianca and Maurizia De Bellis 12 Human Bond Communication: A New and Unexplored Frontier for Intellectual Property and Information and Communication Technology Law 197Edoardo Di Maggio and Domenico Siciliano 13 Predicting the Future of ICT: A Historical Perspective 209Silvano Pupolin 14 Human Bond Communication Beyond 2050 227Flemming Hynkemejer and Sudhir Dixit Index 243

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroduces a revolutionary, quadratic-programming based approach tosolving long-standing problems in motion planning and control of redundant manipulators This book describes a novel quadratic programming approach to solving redundancy resolutions problems with redundant manipulators. Known as ``QP-unified motion planning and control of redundant manipulators'' theory, it systematically solves difficult optimization problems of inequality-constrained motion planning and control of redundant manipulators that have plagued robotics engineers and systems designers for more than a quarter century. An example of redundancy resolution could involve a robotic limb with six joints, or degrees of freedom (DOFs), with which to position an object.As only five numbers are required to specify the position and orientation of the object, the robot can move with one remaining DOF through practically infinite poses while performing a specified task.In this case redundancy resolution refers to the proTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Tables xxv Preface xxvii Acknowledgments xxxiii Acronyms xxxv Part I Pseudoinverse-Based ZD Approach 1 1 Redundancy Resolution via Pseudoinverse and ZD Models 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Problem Formulation and ZD Models 5 1.2.1 Problem Formulation 5 1.2.2 Continuous-Time ZD Model 6 1.2.3 Discrete-Time ZD Models 7 1.2.3.1 Euler-Type DTZD Model with J̇ (t) Known 7 1.2.3.2 Euler-Type DTZD Model with J̇ (t) Unknown 7 1.2.3.3 Taylor-Type DTZD Models 8 1.3 ZD Applications to Different-Type Robot Manipulators 9 1.3.1 Application to a Five-Link Planar Robot Manipulator 9 1.3.2 Application to a Three-Link Planar Robot Manipulator 12 1.4 Chapter Summary 14 Part II Inverse-Free Simple Approach 15 2 G1 Type Scheme to JVL Inverse Kinematics 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Preliminaries and RelatedWork 18 2.3 Scheme Formulation 18 2.4 Computer Simulations 19 2.4.1 Square-Path Tracking Task 19 2.4.2 “Z”-Shaped Path Tracking Task 22 2.5 Physical Experiments 25 2.6 Chapter Summary 26 3 D1G1 Type Scheme to JAL Inverse Kinematics 27 3.1 Introduction 27 3.2 Preliminaries and RelatedWork 28 3.3 Scheme Formulation 28 3.4 Computer Simulations 29 3.4.1 Rhombus-Path Tracking Task 29 3.4.1.1 Verifications 29 3.4.1.2 Comparisons 30 3.4.2 Triangle-Path Tracking Task 32 3.5 Chapter Summary 36 4 Z1G1 Type Scheme to JAL Inverse Kinematics 37 4.1 Introduction 37 4.2 Problem Formulation and Z1G1 Type Scheme 37 4.3 Computer Simulations 38 4.3.1 Desired Initial Position 38 4.3.1.1 Isosceles-Trapezoid Path Tracking 40 4.3.1.2 Isosceles-Triangle Path Tracking 41 4.3.1.3 Square Path Tracking 42 4.3.2 Nondesired Initial Position 44 4.4 Physical Experiments 45 4.5 Chapter Summary 45 Part III QP Approach and Unification 47 5 Redundancy Resolution via QP Approach and Unification 49 5.1 Introduction 49 5.2 Robotic Formulation 50 5.3 Handling Joint Physical Limits 52 5.3.1 Joint-Velocity Level 52 5.3.2 Joint-Acceleration Level 52 5.4 Avoiding Obstacles 53 5.5 Various Performance Indices 54 5.5.1 Resolved at Joint-Velocity Level 55 5.5.1.1 MVN scheme 55 5.5.1.2 RMP scheme 55 5.5.1.3 MKE scheme 55 5.5.2 Resolved at Joint-Acceleration Level 55 5.5.2.1 MAN scheme 55 5.5.2.2 MTN scheme 56 5.5.2.3 IIWT scheme 56 5.6 Unified QP Formulation 56 5.7 Online QP Solutions 57 5.7.1 Traditional QP Routines 57 5.7.2 Compact QP Method 57 5.7.3 Dual Neural Network 57 5.7.4 LVI-Aided Primal-Dual Neural Network 57 5.7.5 Numerical Algorithms E47 and 94LVI 59 5.7.5.1 Numerical Algorithm E47 59 5.7.5.2 Numerical Algorithm 94LVI 59 5.8 Computer Simulations 61 5.9 Chapter Summary 66 Part IV Illustrative JVL QP Schemes and Performances 67 6 Varying Joint-Velocity Limits Handled by QP 69 6.1 Introduction 69 6.2 Preliminaries and Problem Formulation 70 6.2.1 Six-DOF Planar Robot System 70 6.2.2 Varying Joint-Velocity Limits 73 6.3 9 4LVI Assisted QP Solution 76 6.4 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 77 6.4.1 Line-Segment Path-Tracking Task 77 6.4.2 Elliptical-Path Tracking Task 85 6.4.3 Simulations with Faster Tasks 87 6.4.3.1 Line-Segment-Path-Tracking Task 87 6.4.3.2 Elliptical-Path-Tracking Task 89 6.5 Chapter Summary 92 7 Feedback-AidedMinimum Joint Motion 95 7.1 Introduction 95 7.2 Preliminaries and Problem Formulation 97 7.2.1 Minimum Joint Motion Performance Index 97 7.2.2 Varying Joint-Velocity Limits 100 7.3 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 101 7.3.1 “M”-Shaped Path-Tracking Task 101 7.3.1.1 Simulation Comparisons with Different ;;p 101 7.3.1.2 Simulation Comparisons with Different ;; 103 7.3.1.3 Simulative and Experimental Verifications of FAMJM Scheme 105 7.3.2 “P”-Shaped Path Tracking Task 107 7.3.3 Comparisons with Pseudoinverse-Based Approach 108 7.3.3.1 Comparison with Tracking Task of Larger “M”-Shaped Path 110 7.3.3.2 Comparison with Tracking Task of Larger “P”-Shaped Path 112 7.4 Chapter Summary 119 8 QP Based Manipulator State Adjustment 121 8.1 Introduction 121 8.2 Preliminaries and Scheme Formulation 122 8.3 QP Solution and Control of Robot Manipulator 124 8.4 Computer Simulations and Comparisons 125 8.4.1 State Adjustment without ZIV Constraint 125 8.4.2 State Adjustment with ZIV Constraint 128 8.5 Physical Experiments 132 8.6 Chapter Summary 136 Part V Self-Motion Planning 137 9 QP-Based Self-Motion Planning 139 9.1 Introduction 139 9.2 Preliminaries and QP Formulation 140 9.2.1 Self-Motion Criterion 140 9.2.2 QP Formulation 141 9.3 LVIAPDNN Assisted QP Solution 141 9.4 PUMA560 Based Computer Simulations 142 9.4.1 From Initial Configuration A to Desired Configuration B 144 9.4.2 From Initial Configuration A to Desired Configuration C 146 9.4.3 From Initial Configuration E to Desired Configuration F 147 9.5 PA10 Based Computer Simulations 152 9.6 Chapter Summary 158 10 PseudoinverseMethod and Singularities Discussed 161 10.1 Introduction 161 10.2 Preliminaries and Scheme Formulation 162 10.2.1 Modified Performance Index for SMP 163 10.2.2 QP-Based SMP Scheme Formulation 163 10.3 LVIAPDNN Assisted QP Solution with Discussion 164 10.4 Computer Simulations 167 10.4.1 Three-Link Redundant PlanarManipulator 168 10.4.1.1 Verifications 168 10.4.1.2 Comparisons 171 10.4.2 PUMA560 Robot Manipulator 172 10.4.3 PA10 Robot Manipulator 176 10.5 Chapter Summary 180 Appendix 181 Equivalence Analysis in Limit Situation 181 11 Self-Motion Planning with ZIV Constraint 183 11.1 Introduction 183 11.2 Preliminaries and Scheme Formulation 184 11.2.1 Handling Joint Physical Limits 184 11.2.2 QP Reformulation 187 11.2.3 Design of ZIV Constraint 187 11.3 E47 Assisted QP Solution 188 11.4 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 189 11.5 Chapter Summary 197 Part VI Manipulability Maximization 199 12 Manipulability-Maximizing SMP Scheme 201 12.1 Introduction 201 12.2 Scheme Formulation 202 12.2.1 Derivation of Manipulability Index 202 12.2.2 Handling Physical Limits 203 12.2.3 QP Formulation 203 12.3 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 204 12.3.1 Computer Simulations 204 12.3.2 Physical Experiments 205 12.4 Chapter Summary 209 13 Time-Varying Coefficient AidedMMScheme 211 13.1 Introduction 211 13.2 Manipulability-Maximization with Time-Varying Coefficient 212 13.2.1 Nonzero Initial/Final Joint-Velocity Problem 212 13.2.2 Scheme Formulation 213 13.2.3 94LVI Assisted QP Solution 215 13.3 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 216 13.3.1 Computer Simulations 216 13.3.2 Physical Experiments 224 13.4 Chapter Summary 226 Part VII Encoder Feedback and Joystick Control 227 14 QP Based Encoder Feedback Control 229 14.1 Introduction 229 14.2 Preliminaries and Scheme Formulation 231 14.2.1 Joint Description 231 14.2.2 OMPFC Scheme 231 14.3 Computer Simulations 234 14.3.1 Petal-Shaped Path-Tracking Task 234 14.3.2 Comparative Simulations 238 14.3.2.1 Petal-Shaped Path Tracking Using Another Group of Joint-Angle Limits 238 14.3.2.2 Petal-Shaped Path Tracking via the Method 4 (M4) Algorithm 238 14.3.3 Hexagonal-Path-Tracking Task 239 14.4 Physical Experiments 240 14.5 Chapter Summary 248 15 QP Based Joystick Control 251 15.1 Introduction 251 15.2 Preliminaries and Hardware System 251 15.2.1 Velocity-Specified Inverse Kinematics Problem 252 15.2.2 Joystick-Controlled Manipulator Hardware System 252 15.3 Scheme Formulation 253 15.3.1 Cosine-Aided Position-to-VelocityMapping 253 15.3.2 Real-Time Joystick-Controlled Motion Planning 254 15.4 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 254 15.4.1 Movement Toward Four Directions 255 15.4.2 “MVN” LetterWriting 259 15.5 Chapter Summary 259 References 261 Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a concise and thorough reference for designing electrical and electronic systems that employ adjustable speed drives Electrical and electronic systems that employ adjustable speed drives are being increasingly used in present-day automation applications. They are considered by many application engineers as one of the most interfering components, especially in a contemporarily faced industrial environment. This book fills the gap between the high-level academic knowledge in the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) field and the recommended practical rules for assuring electromagnetic compatibility margin. It focuses on finding and formulating the issues that often occur with the generation and propagation of conducted emission in AC motor drives fed by frequency converters, rather than proposing specific solutions for dealing with them. It also features explanations of selected academic backgrounds of EMC and presents practical case studies. The book starTable of Contents1 Introduction to Conducted Emission in Adjustable Speed Drives 1 2 Conducted Emission Origins in Switch-Mode Power Converters 21 3 Conducted Emission Generation by Frequency Converter in ASD 45 4 Propagation of Motor-Side-Originated Conducted Emission Toward the Power Grid 81 5 Modeling of Conducted Emission in ASD 101 6 Broadband Behavior of Fundamental Components of ASD 137 7 Impact of Motor Feeding Cable on CMCurrents Generated in ASD 203

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book presents highly technical approaches to the probabilistic physics of failure analysis and applications to accelerated life and degradation testing to reliability prediction and assessment. Beside reviewing a select set of important failure mechanisms, the book covers basic and advanced methods of performing accelerated life test and accelerated degradation tests and analyzing the test data. The book includes a large number of very useful examples to help readers understand complicated methods described. Finally, MATLAB, R and OpenBUGS computer scripts are provided and discussed to support complex computational probabilistic analyses introduced.Table of Contents Preface xi 1 Overview of Probabilistic Physics-of-Failure Approach to Reliability 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Overview of Physics-of-Failure Modeling 2 1.3 Important Forms of PoF Models 4 1.4 PPoF Approach to Life Assessment 6 1.5 Accelerated Testing in PPoF Model Development 8 1.6 Organization of the Book 10 References 11 2 Summary of Mechanisms of Failure and Associated PoF Models 13 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Fatigue 15 2.3 Wear 60 2.4 Creep 81 2.5 Corrosion 90 References 97 3 Types of Accelerated Testing and Modeling Concepts 101 3.1 Introduction 101 3.2 Types of Accelerated Testing – Qualitative and Quantitative 101 3.3 Qualitative Accelerated Tests 102 3.4 Quantitative Accelerated Tests 107 References 115 4 Analysis of Accelerated Life Testing Data and Physics-Based Reliability Model Development 117 4.1 Introduction 117 4.2 Accelerated Life Data Analysis Methods 117 4.3 Basics of ALT Data Analysis 117 4.4 Types of Collected Accelerated Life Test Data 118 4.5 Life-stress Models 119 4.6 Probability Plotting Method for ALT Model Estimation 124 4.7 Maximum Likelihood Estimation Approach to ALT Data Analysis 131 4.8 Confidence Intervals for MLE 134 4.9 MLE Approach to Estimating Parameters of Common Distributions 136 4.10 MLE-Based Parameter Estimation for Different Life-stress Models 139 4.11 Proportional Hazards (PH) Model 168 4.12 Bayesian Estimation Approach to ALT Model Parameter Estimation 171 4.13 Determining stress dependencies 175 4.14 Summary of the ALT Steps and Common Problems in Practice 178 4.15 Time Varying Stress Tests 179 4.16 Step-Stress Analysis And Model Development 182 References 201 5 Analysis of Accelerated Degradation Data and Reliability Model Development 203 5.1 Introduction 203 5.2 Degradation Models 205 References 231 6 Accelerated Test Planning 233 6.1 Introduction 233 6.2 Issues to Consider Prior to Accelerated Testing 233 6.3 Planning for Accelerated Life Tests 237 6.4 Planning for Accelerated Degradation Tests 246 References 250 7 Accounting for Uncertainties and Model Validation 251 7.1 Introduction 251 7.2 Uncertainties in Evidence 251 7.3 PPoF Model Uncertainties, Errors, and Validation 259 7.4 Applications of Model Validation in ADT 263 References 268 Index 269

Read more less

Book SynopsisA review of the aerodynamics, design and analysis, and optimization of wind turbines, combined with the author's unique software Aerodynamics of Wind Turbines is a comprehensive introduction to the aerodynamics, scaled design and analysis, and optimization of horizontal-axis wind turbines. The author a noted expert on the topic reviews the fundamentals and basic physics of wind turbines operating in the atmospheric boundary layer. He then explores more complex models that help in the aerodynamic analysis and design of turbine models. The text contains unique chapters on blade element momentum theory, airfoil aerodynamics, rotational augmentation, vortex-wake methods, actuator-line modeling, and designing aerodynamically scaled turbines for model-scale experiments. The author clearly demonstrates how effective analysis and design principles can be used in a wide variety of applications and operating conditions. The book integrates the easy-to-use, hands-on XTurb design and analysis software that is available on a companion website for facilitating individual analyses and future studies. This component enhances the learning experience and helps with a deeper and more complete understanding of the subject matter. This important book: Covers aerodynamics, design and analysis and optimization of wind turbinesOffers the author's XTurb design and analysis software that is available on a companion website for individual analyses and future studiesIncludes unique chapters on blade element momentum theory, airfoil aerodynamics, rotational augmentation, vortex-wake methods, actuator-line modeling, and designing aerodynamically scaled turbines for model-scale experimentsDemonstrates how design principles can be applied to a variety of applications and operating conditions Written for senior undergraduate and graduate students in wind energy as well as practicing engineers and scientists, Aerodynamics of Wind Turbines is an authoritative text that offers a guide to the fundamental principles, design and analysis of wind turbines.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Abbreviations xix List of Symbols xxi About the Companion Website xxix 1 Introduction: Wind Turbines and the Wind Resource 1 1.1 A Brief History of Wind Turbine Development 1 1.1.1 Why “Wind Energy”? 1 1.1.2 Wind Turbines Then and Now 2 1.1.2.1 The Windmill – Hero of Alexandria (First Century CE) 2 1.1.2.2 1200s–1300s – Post Mills and Tower Mills 3 1.1.2.3 1700s – John Smeaton 3 1.1.2.4 1800s –Windmills in the American West 5 1.1.2.5 Late 1800s –Wind in Transition (Mechanical – Electricity, Drag – Aerodynamic Principles) 5 1.1.2.6 1900s–1950s –Wind Turbines across Scales (kW– MW) 6 1.1.2.7 1970s–2000s – Modern Utility-Scale Wind Turbines (>1MW) 7 1.1.3 Influence of Aerodynamics on Wind Turbine Development 8 1.1.4 Design Evolution of Modern Horizontal-Axis Wind Turbines 10 1.2 Wind Resource Characterization 11 1.2.1 Wind Resource – Available Power in the Wind 13 1.2.2 Basic Characteristics of the Atmospheric Boundary Layer 16 1.2.2.1 Steady Wind Speed Variation with Height 17 1.2.2.2 Turbulence and Stability State 19 1.2.2.3 Atmospheric Properties (Troposphere) 23 1.2.3 Statistical Description of Wind Data 24 1.2.3.1 Rayleigh Distribution 25 1.2.3.2 Weibull Distribution 26 1.2.4 Wind Energy Production Estimates 27 References 28 Further Reading 29 2 Momentum Theory 31 2.1 Actuator Disk Model 31 2.1.1 Basic Streamtube Analysis 31 2.1.2 Axial Induction Factor, a 34 2.1.3 Rotor Thrust and Power 35 2.1.4 Optimum Rotor Performance – The Betz Limit 35 2.1.5 Wake Expansion and Wake Shear 37 2.1.6 Validity of the Actuator Disk Model 38 2.1.7 Summary – Actuator Disk Model 39 2.2 Rotor Disk Model 40 2.2.1 Extended Streamtube Analysis 40 2.2.2 Angular Induction Factor, a′ 42 2.2.3 Rotor Torque and Power 43 2.2.4 Optimum Rotor Performance Including Wake Rotation 44 2.2.5 Validity of the Rotor Disk Model 48 2.2.6 Summary – Rotor Disk Model 49 References 49 Further Reading 50 3 Blade Element Momentum Theory (BEMT) 51 3.1 The Blade Element – Incremental Torque and Thrust 51 3.1.1 Airfoil Nomenclature 52 3.1.2 Blade Element Velocity and Force/Torque Triangles 53 3.2 Combining Momentum Theory and Blade Element Theory through a, a′, and Φ 55 3.2.1 Sectional Thrust and Torque in Momentum and Blade Element Theory 56 3.2.2 Rotor Thrust and Power in Blade Element Theory 56 3.3 Aerodynamic Design and Performance of an Ideal Rotor 57 3.3.1 The Ideal Rotor Without Wake Rotation 58 3.3.2 The Ideal Rotor with Wake Rotation 59 3.4 Tip and Root Loss Factors 62 3.4.1 Prandtl Blade Number Correction versus Glauert Tip Correction – Historical Perspective 62 3.4.2 A Total Tip-/Root Loss Correction 64 3.4.3 Limitations of Classical Tip-/Root Corrections 66 3.4.4 Modern Approaches to Tip Modeling 66 3.4.4.1 Correction of Normal-/Tangential Force Coefficients (Shen et al.) 67 3.4.4.2 Helical Model for Tip Loss (Branlard et al.) 67 3.4.4.3 Decambering Effect at Blade Tip (Sørensen et al.) 68 3.4.4.4 Extended Glauert Tip Correction Using a g Function (Schmitz and Maniaci 2016) 69 3.5 BEM Solution Method 71 3.5.1 A System of Two Equations for Two Unknowns, a and a′ 71 3.5.2 Iterative BEM Solution Methodologies – Analyzing a Given Blade Design 72 3.5.2.1 Simultaneous Solution of a and a′ 73 3.5.2.2 Root-Finding Method of Single Equation for Φ 74 3.5.3 Thrust Coefficient in the Turbulent Wake State, a > 0.4 75 3.5.3.1 Glauert Empirical Relation 76 3.5.3.2 1st-Order Approximation (Wilson, Burton) 77 3.5.3.3 2nd-Order Approximation (Buhl) 77 3.6 Simplified BEMT (Wilson and Lissaman 1974) 78 3.7 Effect of Design Parameters on Power Coefficient 80 3.7.1 Effect of Blade Number and Solidity 81 3.7.2 Effect of Profile Drag 82 3.7.3 Combined Effects of Blade Number, Solidity, and Profile Drag 82 3.7.4 Effects of Rotor Speed and Blade Pitch 84 3.7.5 Aerodynamic Considerations – Two Blades versus Three Blades 87 3.7.6 Analysis of a MW-Scale Pitch-/Speed-Controlled Wind Turbine 89 3.8 Validity of BEMT 97 3.8.1 Summary – BEMT 98 References 99 Further Reading 101 4 Wind Turbine Airfoils 103 4.1 Fundamentals of Airfoil Theory 103 4.1.1 Inviscid Flow: Thin-Airfoil Theory 105 4.1.1.1 Kutta–Joukowski Lift Theorem 106 4.1.1.2 Symmetric-/Cambered Thin Airfoil 106 4.1.1.3 Effect of Airfoil Thickness on Lift 110 4.1.1.4 d’Alembert’s Paradox 111 4.1.2 Viscous Flow: Boundary-Layer Theory 111 4.1.2.1 Boundary-Layer Displacement Effect 113 4.1.2.2 Viscous Lift Theorem 115 4.1.2.3 Viscous Decambering Effect 117 4.1.2.4 Flow Separation and Stall 117 4.1.2.5 Understanding Profile Drag: Pressure and Skin Friction 119 4.1.2.6 Laminar-Turbulent Transition 120 4.2 Design Characteristics of Wind Turbine Airfoils 122 4.2.1 Radial Variation of the Reynolds Number 122 4.2.2 Force/Torque and Velocity Triangle Along the Blade Radius 123 4.2.3 Airfoil Design Criteria for Wind Turbine Blades 124 4.3 Development of Wind Turbine Airfoils 126 4.3.1 A Brief Historical Review of Wind Turbine Airfoils 126 4.3.2 Catalog of Wind Turbine Airfoils 129 References 133 Further Reading 136 5 Unsteady Aerodynamics and 3-D Correction Models for Airfoil Characteristics 137 5.1 Unsteady Aerodynamics on Wind Turbine Blades 137 5.1.1 Fundamentals of Unsteady Aerodynamics – Theodorsen’s Theory 138 5.1.1.1 Flow Model – Unsteady Thin-Airfoil Theory 139 5.1.1.2 Special Case: Freestream Angle-of-Attack Oscillation 140 5.1.2 Dynamic Stall Models 141 5.1.3 Relevance of Atmospheric Boundary Layer on Unsteady Aerodynamics 143 5.1.3.1 Effect of Yawed Inflow, Mean Shear, and Tower Interaction 144 5.1.3.2 Effect of Atmospheric Turbulence 146 5.2 Rotational Augmentation and Stall Delay 148 5.2.1 Himmelskamp Effect 148 5.2.2 Coriolis Effect and Centrifugal Pumping 149 5.2.2.1 Coriolis Effect 149 5.2.2.2 Centrifugal Pumping 151 5.2.3 Stall Delay Models 152 5.2.3.1 Snel et al. 153 5.2.3.2 Corrigan and Schillings 153 5.2.3.3 Du and Selig 153 5.2.3.4 Chaviaropoulos and Hansen 154 5.2.3.5 Dumitrescu et al. 154 5.2.3.6 Eggers et al. 155 5.2.3.7 Lindenburg 155 5.2.3.8 Dowler and Schmitz 155 5.2.4 Scaling Rotational Augmentation from Small-Scale to Utility-Scale Turbines 158 5.2.5 Extraction of Rotational Augmentation Data from Computed Flow Fields 161 5.3 Airfoil Characteristics at High Angles of Attack 162 5.3.1 Flat-Plate Correction 163 5.3.2 Viterna–Corrigan Correction 163 5.3.3 Comments on High Angle-of-Attack Corrections 164 References 164 Further Reading 169 6 Vortex Wake Methods 171 6.1 Fundamentals of Prandtl Lifting-Line Theory 171 6.1.1 Vortex Sheet and Horseshoe Vortices 171 6.1.2 Inviscid Flow: Lifting-Line Theory 174 6.1.2.1 Elliptic Loading (Inviscid Airfoil Polar) 176 6.1.2.2 Parked NREL Phase VI Rotor (Viscous Airfoil Polar) 178 6.1.2.3 Parked NREL 5-MW Turbine – Optimum Blade Pitch in Low-/High Winds 182 6.2 Prescribed-Wake Methods 182 6.2.1 Helicoidal Vortex Filaments 183 6.2.2 Vortex-Sheet Geometry 184 6.2.3 Biot–Savart Law 186 6.2.4 Induced Velocities and Influence Coefficients 187 6.2.5 Relationship Between Vortex Theory and Blade-Element Theory 188 6.2.5.1 Sectional Thrust and Torque in Vortex Theory 189 6.2.5.2 Rotor Thrust and Power in Vortex Theory 190 6.2.6 Iterative Prescribed-Wake Solution Methodology 190 6.2.6.1 Krogstad Turbine – Prescribed-Wake versus BEM Solution Method 193 6.2.7 Limitations of Prescribed-Wake Methods 194 6.3 Free-Wake Methods 195 6.3.1 Trailing Vortices versus Shed Vortices 196 6.3.2 Lagrangian Markers and Blade Model 196 6.3.3 Iterative Free-Wake Solution Methodology 199 6.3.4 Handling Singularities – Viscous Core Models 200 6.3.4.1 Vortex Stretching 200 6.3.4.2 Rankine Vortex 201 6.3.4.3 Lamb–Oseen Vortex 201 6.3.4.4 Difficulties of Viscous Core Models 202 6.3.5 Singularity-Free-Wake – Distributed Vorticity Elements (DVEs) 202 6.3.5.1 The Multi-Lifting-Line Method of Horstmann 203 6.3.5.2 The Singularity-Free-Wake Method of Bramesfeld and Maughmer 203 6.3.6 Prediction of Blade Tip Loads – Free-Wake versus Prescribed-Wake/BEM Methods 204 6.3.7 Limitations of Free-Wake Methods 205 References 205 Further Reading 208 7 Advanced Computational Methods 209 7.1 High-Fidelity Blade-Resolved CFD Solutions 209 7.1.1 Unsteady Reynolds-Averaged Navier–Stokes Equations 210 7.1.2 Turbulence Modeling 211 7.1.2.1 k-𝜀 Turbulence Model 211 7.1.2.2 k-𝜔 Turbulence Model 212 7.1.2.3 Shear-Stress Transport (SST) k-𝜔-Based Turbulence Model 212 7.1.3 Effect of Laminar-/Turbulent Transition on CFD Predictions 213 7.1.4 Coupling of Navier–Stokes Solver with Helicoidal Vortex Model 214 7.2 Numerical Modeling of Wind Turbine Wakes 217 7.2.1 Engineering-Type Wake Models 217 7.2.2 Actuator Wake Models 218 7.2.2.1 ALM – Actuator-Line Model (Sørensen and Shen) 220 7.2.2.2 ALM* – Variable-𝜀 Actuator-Line Model 220 7.2.2.3 ACE – Actuator Curve Embedding (Jha and Schmitz) 222 7.2.3 Limitations of Actuator Methods 225 7.3 Wake Modeling – Effect of Atmospheric Stability State 226 7.3.1 Atmospheric Boundary Layer LES Solver in OpenFOAM 227 7.3.2 Example of Turbine–Turbine Interaction for Neutral/Unstable Stability 229 7.3.3 Effect of ALM Approach on Wind Turbine Array Performance Prediction 230 7.3.4 Bridging the Gap – Meso-Microscale Coupling 231 References 233 Further Reading 239 8 Design Principles, Scaled Design, and Optimization 241 8.1 Design Principles for Horizontal-Axis Wind Turbines 241 8.1.1 Wind Turbine Design Standards 242 8.1.1.1 IEC Standards for Wind Turbines 243 8.1.1.2 Wind Turbine Design Loads 243 8.1.2 Rotor Design Procedure 245 8.1.2.1 General Rotor Design Process 245 8.1.2.2 COE versus Levelized Cost of Energy (LCOE) 248 8.1.2.3 Computational Tools for Rotor Analysis and Design 249 8.2 Scaled Design of Wind Turbine Blades 250 8.2.1 Limitations of Scaled Blade Aerodynamics and Dynamics 251 8.2.2 Example of Scaled Aerodynamics from Utility-Scale to MS Turbine 252 8.2.2.1 Scaled Design with Given cl (Lift Coefficient) Distribution (Scaled NREL 5-MW) 256 8.2.2.2 Scaled Design with Given c (Chord) Distribution (PScaled NREL 5-MW) 257 8.2.2.3 Scaled Design with Given 𝛽 (Pitch/Twist) Distribution (TScaled NREL 5-MW) 258 8.2.2.4 Differences in Scaled Designs w.r.t. Airfoil Aerodynamics and Blade Loads 259 8.2.3 Model-Scale Wind Turbine Aerodynamics Experiments 261 8.2.3.1 NREL Phase VI Rotor 262 8.2.3.2 MEXICO Rotor 264 8.2.3.3 Krogstad Turbine 265 8.3 Aerodynamic Optimization of Wind Turbine Blades 267 8.3.1 Principles of Blade Element Momentum (BEM) Aerodynamic Design 268 8.3.1.1 Betz Optimum Rotor (Ideal Rotor Without Wake Rotation) 268 8.3.1.2 Effect of Rotation on BEM Optimum Blade Design 269 8.3.1.3 Effect of Profile Drag on BEM Optimum Blade Design 270 8.3.1.4 Effect of Root-/Tip Loss on BEM Optimum Blade Design 271 8.3.1.5 Limitations of BEM Aerodynamic Optimization 272 8.3.2 Principles of VWM Aerodynamic Design 273 8.3.2.1 Optimum Circulation Distribution Under Thrust Constraint 274 8.3.2.2 Betz Minimum Energy Condition 276 8.3.2.3 Effect of Profile Drag on VWM Optimum Blade Design (DTU 10-MW RWT) 279 8.3.2.4 Design of Large-Scale Offshore “Low Induction Rotor” (LIR) 284 8.3.2.5 Limitations of VWM Aerodynamic Optimization 289 8.4 Summary – Scaled Design and Optimization 290 References 291 Further Reading 294 Index 295

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsChapter 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why this Book? 1 1.2 How to Use this Book 2 1.3 Scope 2 1.4 Roadmap 4 1.5 Other Notes 5 Acknowledgments 7 References 8 Chapter 2 Shannon Theorem and Information Theory 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Reliable Transmission with Noisy Channel 10 2.3 Entropy and Uncertainty 10 2.4 Entropy and Bit Length 14 2.5 Information Measured as Reduction of Uncertainty 18 2.6 Shannon Theorem 21 2.7 Additive White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) Channel 25 2.8 Frequency-Selective Channel and Water Filling 32 2.9 Summary 34 2.10 Appendix: Derivation of Entropy as a Measure of Uncertainty 34 2.11 Appendix: Compression Coding 38 References 43 Homework 43 Chapter 3 Single Carrier Modulation and Nyquist Sampling Theory 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Symbol Mapping 47 3.3 Nyquist–Shannon Sampling Theory 58 3.4 Pulse Shaping and Nyquist Criterion 69 3.5 Implementation of Pulse Shaping Filter: Up-Sampling 74 3.6 Baseband and Passband 76 3.7 Summary 85 3.8 Appendix: Fourier Transform 87 3.9 Appendix: Function Localization in Frequency and Time Domains 91 3.10 Appendix: Proof of the Nyquist Criterion 96 References 98 Homework 99 Chapter 4 Statistical Detection and Error Probability 101 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Wide-Sense Stationary (WSS) Process 102 4.3 AWGN Channel 108 4.4 Detection Problem and Maximum Likelihood Detection 115 4.5 Map and ML Detection with AWGN Channel 119 4.6 Matched Filter (MF) 122 4.7 Error Probability of Uncoded Modulations Under AWGN Model 137 4.8 Summary 146 4.9 Appendix: PSD of Modulated Signals 148 4.10 Appendix: Baseband Noise 151 4.11 Appendix: Representing Signals and Noises with Vectors 154 References 159 Homework 160 Chapter 5 Channel Coding 163 5.1 Introduction 163 5.2 Channel Coding or Forward Error Correction (FEC) 164 5.3 Block Code 169 5.4 Convolutional Code 182 5.5 Coding for Bandwidth-Limited Channels and Trellis-Coded Modulation (TCM) 203 5.6 Combined Codes 211 5.7 Turbo Code 213 5.8 Low-Density Parity-Check (LDPC) Code 225 5.9 Summary 231 5.10 Appendix: Upper Bound of Shaping Gain 233 5.11 Appendix: Probability Update at Parity Node 234 References 235 Homework 238 Chapter 6 Channel Characteristics 241 6.1 Introduction 241 6.2 Channel Gain and Channel Classification 243 6.3 Constant Flat Channels 246 6.4 Flat Fading Channel 252 6.5 Time Dispersion and Frequency-Selective Fading 262 6.6 Channel Formulation in Frequency and Time Domains 265 6.7 Channel Modeling Methods 270 6.8 Link Budget Computation 273 6.9 Summary 282 6.10 Appendix: Channel Gain in Passband and Baseband 284 References 286 Homework 288 Chapter 7 Synchronization 291 7.1 Introduction 291 7.2 Synchronization Overview 293 7.3 Timing Control and Correction 299 7.4 Timing Error Estimate 311 7.5 Initial Acquisition 325 7.6 Summary 328 References 329 Homework 330 Chapter 8 Adaptive Filter 333 8.1 Introduction 333 8.2 Adaptive Filter Overview 335 8.3 Optimal Solution 337 8.4 Iterative Solution: Speediest Descent (SD) 339 8.5 Sample-by-Sample Adaptation: Least Mean Squares (LMS) Algorithm 343 8.6 Block-Based Adaptation: Least Squares (LS) Algorithm 347 8.7 Block-Based Iteration: Recursive Least Squares (RLS) Algorithm 350 8.8 Case Study: Full-Duplex Radio and Self-Interference Cancellation 355 8.9 Summary 359 References 360 Homework 360 Chapter 9 Channel Equalization 363 9.1 Introduction 363 9.2 Channel Dispersion Formulation 365 9.3 Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation (MLSE) 370 9.4 Linear Equalizer (LE) 371 9.5 Decision Feedback Equalizer (DFE) 387 9.6 Tomlinson–Harashima Precoding (THP) 411 9.7 Fractionally Spaced Equalizers 419 9.8 Summary 420 9.9 Appendix: Z-Transform and Related Results 422 9.10 Appendix: Optimization of Functions with Complex Variables 431 9.11 Appendix: Optimal Solution of Zero Forcing Linear Equalizer 434 9.12 Appendix: Gain of an MMSE Equalizer 439 9.13 Appendix: Detailed Derivation of Finite-Length DFE 440 References 449 Homework 451 Chapter 10 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 453 10.1 Introduction 453 10.2 OFDM Formulation 455 10.3 Time Domain Equalization 475 10.4 OFDM Advantages and Enhancements 477 10.5 Receiver Training and Adaptation 480 10.6 Implementation Issues 491 10.7 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) 495 10.8 Filter Bank Multicarrier (FBMC) Modulation 497 10.9 Summary 499 References 500 Homework 504 Chapter 11 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) Technology 505 11.1 Introduction 505 11.2 MIMO Overview 506 11.3 A Simple Case of Mimo: Multibeam Transmission 507 11.4 Spatial Multiplexing: Bell Laboratories Layered Space-Time (BLAST) 518 11.5 Spatial Diversity: Space-Time Coding 525 11.6 Theoretical Treatments of MIMO Techniques 530 11.7 Other Forms of MIMO 543 11.8 Areas of Further Exploration 545 11.9 MIMO Applications 549 11.10 Summary 555 11.11 Appendix: Successive Cancellation (SC) Formulation 556 11.12 Appendix: Derivation of MIMO Channel Capacity for Fixed Channel 564 References 567 Homework 571 Chapter 12 5G Cellular System Radio Interface Technology 573 12.1 Introduction 573 12.2 Cellular Systems 573 12.3 The 5G System 578 12.4 Highlights of 3GPP Proposal 579 12.5 5G Physical Layer Technologies 583 12.6 Summary 606 References 607 Homework 614 Chapter 13 Closing Remarks and Further Exploration 615 13.1 Introduction 615 13.2 Analog Circuitry 615 13.3 Software-Defined Radio (SDR) 616 13.4 Cognitive Radio (CR) and Dynamic Spectrum Access (DSA) 617 13.5 Ultrawide Band (UWB) 620 13.6 Relaying and Cooperative Communications 620 13.7 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 621 13.8 Interference Management 622 13.9 Other Modulation Schemes 623 13.10 Optical Communications 623 13.11 Green Communications 624 13.12 Applications of Artificial Intelligence (AI) 625 13.13 Application of Game Theory 625 13.14 Security 625 13.15 Network Coding 626 13.16 Summary 628 References 628 Index 637

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive study in efficient multi-rate teletraffic loss models used for designing, performance analysis, and optimization of systems and networks Efficient Multirate Teletraffic Loss Models Beyond Erlangis an easy-to-read book filled with numerous efficient teletraffic loss models. Presented in three sectionsTeletraffic Models of Random Input, Teletraffic Models of Quasi-Random Input, and Teletraffic Models of Batched Poisson Inputit covers everything that a professional experienced with optimization and dimensioning of telecom networks could ever need to know. This unique book provides a detailed explanation on how efficient multirate teletraffic loss models are extracted and applied, and guides readers through almost all network technologies and services. Starting from the basics, it steadily increases in difficulty to keep the book self-contained and to provide a better understanding to those who might be new to the subject. It includes detailedTable of ContentsList of Figures xvii List of Tables xxv Preface xxix Acronyms xxxiii Symbols xxxvii About the Companion Website xxxix Introduction xli I.1 Traffic-load Definition xlii I.2 Traffic Congestion and GoS/QoS xliii I.3 System Capacity xliv I.4 Teletraffic Models xlv I.5 Traffic-load Properties xlviii I.6 Call Arrival Process l I.6.1 Superposition and Decomposition of Poisson Processes lv I.6.2 Poisson Arrivals See Time Averages lvi I.7 Call Service Time lvii I.7.1 Markov Property lvii I.8 Service Systems lix I.9 Little’s Law lxi I.10 Other Performance Metrics of Loss Systems lxii I.11 General Examples lxiii I.12 Service-classes – Bandwidth Sharing Policies lxiv I.13 Classification of Teletraffic Loss Models lxx I.14 Teletraffic Models and the Internet lxxi References lxxiv Part I Teletraffic Models of Random Input 1 1 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model 3 1.1 The Erlang Loss Model 3 1.1.1 The Service System 3 1.1.2 Global and Local Balance 5 1.1.3 Call Blocking Probability 8 1.1.4 Other Performance Metrics 11 1.2 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model 13 1.2.1 The Service System 13 1.2.2 The Analytical Model 15 1.3 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the BR policy 28 1.3.1 The Service System 28 1.3.2 The Analytical Model 30 1.4 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the Threshold Policy 38 1.4.1 The Service System 38 1.4.2 The Analytical Model 40 1.5 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model in a Fixed Routing Network 44 1.5.1 The Service System 44 1.5.2 The Analytical Model 45 1.5.3 CBP Calculation by the RLA Method 49 1.6 Applications 54 1.6.1 The Erlang-B Formula 54 1.6.2 The Erlang-C Formula 55 1.6.3 The Kaufman–Roberts Recursion 56 1.7 Further Reading 58 References 60 2 Multirate Retry Threshold Loss Models 65 2.1 The Single-Retry Model 65 2.1.1 The Service System 65 2.1.2 The Analytical Model 69 2.2 The Single-Retry Model under the BR Policy 72 2.2.1 The Service System 72 2.2.2 The Analytical Model 75 2.3 The Multi-Retry Model 77 2.3.1 The Service System 77 2.3.2 The Analytical Model 83 2.4 The Multi-Retry Model under the BR Policy 86 2.4.1 The Service System 86 2.4.2 The Analytical Model 87 2.5 The Single-Threshold Model 92 2.5.1 The Service System 92 2.5.2 The Analytical Model 96 2.6 The Single-Threshold Model under the BR Policy 99 2.6.1 The Service System 99 2.6.2 The Analytical Model 101 2.7 The Multi-Threshold Model 107 2.7.1 The Service System 107 2.7.2 The Analytical Model 107 2.8 The Multi-Threshold Model under the BR Policy 109 2.8.1 The Service System 109 2.8.2 The Analytical Model 109 2.9 The Connection Dependent Threshold Model 112 2.9.1 The Service System 112 2.9.2 The Analytical Model 114 2.10 The Connection Dependent Threshold Model under the BR Policy 119 2.10.1 The Service System 119 2.10.2 The Analytical Model 119 2.11 Applications 121 2.12 Further Reading 129 References 130 3 Multirate Elastic Adaptive Loss Models 133 3.1 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model 133 3.1.1 The Service System 133 3.1.2 The Analytical Model 139 3.2 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 146 3.2.1 The Service System 146 3.2.2 The Analytical Model 149 3.3 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the Threshold Policy 152 3.3.1 The Service System 152 3.3.2 The Analytical Model 156 3.4 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model 163 3.4.1 The Service System 163 3.4.2 The Analytical Model 171 3.5 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 175 3.5.1 The Service System 175 3.5.2 The Analytical Model 177 3.6 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the Threshold Policy 179 3.6.1 The Service System 179 3.6.2 The Analytical Model 182 3.7 Applications 185 3.8 Further Reading 190 References 191 4 Multirate Elastic Adaptive Retry Loss Models 195 4.1 The Elastic Single-Retry Model 195 4.1.1 The Service System 195 4.1.2 The Analytical Model 201 4.2 The Elastic Single-Retry Model under the BR Policy 206 4.2.1 The Service System 206 4.2.2 The Analytical Model 210 4.3 The Elastic Multi-Retry Model 212 4.3.1 The Service System 212 4.3.2 The Analytical Model 218 4.4 The Elastic Multi-Retry Model under the BR Policy 220 4.4.1 The Service System 220 4.4.2 The Analytical Model 223 4.5 The Elastic Adaptive Single-Retry Model 226 4.5.1 The Service System 226 4.5.2 The Analytical Model 233 4.6 The Elastic Adaptive Single-Retry Model under the BR Policy 237 4.6.1 The Service System 237 4.6.2 The Analytical Model 241 4.7 The Elastic Adaptive Multi-Retry Model 243 4.7.1 The Service System 243 4.7.2 The Analytical Model 248 4.8 The Elastic Adaptive Multi-Retry Model under the BR Policy 250 4.8.1 The Service System 250 4.8.2 The Analytical Model 254 4.9 Applications 258 4.10 Further Reading 258 References 260 5 ON–OFF Multirate Loss Models 263 5.1 The ON–OFF Multirate Loss Model 263 5.1.1 The Service System 263 5.1.2 The Analytical Model 265 5.2 The ON–OFF Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 275 5.2.1 The Service System 275 5.2.2 The Analytical Model 276 5.3 The ON–OFF Multirate Loss Model in a Fixed Routing Network 280 5.3.1 The Service System 280 5.3.2 The Analytical Model 280 5.4 Applications 285 5.5 Further Reading 288 References 289 Part II Teletraffic Models of Quasi-Random Input 291 6 The Engset Multirate Loss Model 293 6.1 The Engset Loss Model 293 6.1.1 The Service System 293 6.1.2 The Analytical Model 293 6.2 The Engset Multirate Loss Model 298 6.2.1 The Service System 298 6.2.2 The Analytical Model 300 6.3 The Engset Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 308 6.3.1 The Service System 308 6.3.2 The Analytical Model 310 6.4 The Engset Multirate Loss Model under the TH Policy 312 6.4.1 The Service System 312 6.4.2 The Analytical Model 312 6.5 Applications 318 6.6 Further Reading 324 References 327 7 Finite Multirate Retry Threshold Loss Models 331 7.1 The Finite Single-Retry Model 331 7.1.1 The Service System 331 7.1.2 The Analytical Model 333 7.2 The Finite Single-Retry Model under the BR Policy 338 7.2.1 The Service System 338 7.2.2 The Analytical Model 340 7.3 The Finite Multi-Retry Model 342 7.3.1 The Service System 342 7.3.2 The Analytical Model 344 7.4 The Finite Multi-Retry Model under the BR Policy 348 7.4.1 The Service System 348 7.4.2 The Analytical Model 349 7.5 The Finite Single-Threshold Model 353 7.5.1 The Service System 353 7.5.2 The Analytical Model 355 7.6 The Finite Single-Threshold Model under the BR Policy 360 7.6.1 The Service System 360 7.6.2 The Analytical Model 362 7.7 The Finite Multi-Threshold Model 363 7.7.1 The Service System 363 7.7.2 The Analytical Model 364 7.8 The Finite Multi-Threshold Model under the BR Policy 366 7.8.1 The Service System 366 7.8.2 The Analytical Model 366 7.9 The Finite Connection Dependent Threshold Model 367 7.9.1 The Service System 367 7.9.2 The Analytical Model 368 7.10 The Finite Connection Dependent Threshold Model under the BR Policy 373 7.10.1 The Service System 373 7.10.2 The Analytical Model 373 7.11 Applications 374 7.12 Further Reading 374 References 375 8 Finite Multirate Elastic Adaptive Loss Models 377 8.1 The Elastic Engset Multirate Loss Model 377 8.1.1 The Service System 377 8.1.2 The Analytical Model 380 8.2 The Elastic Engset Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 383 8.2.1 The Service System 383 8.2.2 The Analytical Model 385 8.3 The Elastic Adaptive Engset Multirate Loss Model 387 8.3.1 The Service System 387 8.3.2 The Analytical Model 389 8.4 The Elastic Adaptive Engset Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 392 8.4.1 The Service System 392 8.4.2 The Analytical Model 394 8.5 Applications 402 8.6 Further Reading 405 References 405 9 Finite ON–OFF Multirate Loss Models 407 9.1 The Finite ON–OFF Multirate Loss Model 407 9.1.1 The Service System 407 9.1.2 The AnalyticalModel 408 9.2 Generalization of the f-ON–OFF Model to include Service-classes with a Mixture of a Finite and an Infinite Number of Sources 415 9.3 Applications 416 9.4 Further Reading 422 References 423 Part III Teletraffic Models of Batched Poisson Input 425 10 The Erlang Multirate Loss ModelWith Batched Poisson Arrivals 427 10.1 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals 427 10.1.1 The Service System 427 10.1.2 The AnalyticalModel 428 10.2 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals under the BR Policy 435 10.2.1 The Service System 435 10.2.2 The AnalyticalModel 435 10.3 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals under the Threshold Policy 441 10.3.1 The Service System 441 10.3.2 The Analytical Model 441 10.4 Applications 445 10.5 Further Reading 451 References 451 11 Batched Poisson Multirate Elastic Adaptive Loss Models 455 11.1 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals 455 11.1.1 The Service System 455 11.1.2 The Analytical Model 456 11.2 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals under the BR Policy 461 11.2.1 The Service System 461 11.2.2 The Analytical Model 463 11.3 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals 466 11.3.1 The Service System 466 11.3.2 The Analytical Model 467 11.4 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals under the BR Policy 475 11.4.1 The Service System 475 11.4.2 The Analytical Model 477 11.5 Applications 482 11.6 Further Reading 483 References 485 Appendix A Interdependency of the Teletraffic Models 487 Index 491

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe updated third edition of the classic book that provides an introduction to electric machines and their emerging applications The thoroughly revised and updated third edition of Electromechanical Motion Devices contains an introduction to modern electromechanical devices and offers an understanding of the uses of electric machines in emerging applications such as in hybrid and electric vehicles. The authorsnoted experts on the topicput the focus on modern electric drive applications. The book includes basic theory, illustrative examples, and contains helpful practice problems designed to enhance comprehension. The text offers information on Tesla''s rotating magnetic field, which is the foundation of reference frame theory and explores in detail the reference frame theory. The authors also review permanent-magnet ac, synchronous, and induction machines. In each chapter, the material is arranged so that if steady-state operation is the main concern, theTable of ContentsPreface ix Chapter 1 Magnetic and Magnetically Coupled Circuits 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Phasor Analysis 2 1.3 Magnetic Circuits 8 1.4 Properties of Magnetic Materials 14 1.5 Stationary Magnetically Coupled Circuits 18 1.6 Open- and Short-Circuit Characteristics of Stationary Magnetically Coupled Circuits 25 1.7 Magnetic Systems with Mechanical Motion 28 1.8 Recapping 35 Chapter 2 Electromechanical Energy Conversion 39 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 Energy Balance Relationships 40 2.3 Energy in Coupling Field 45 2.4 Graphical Interpretation of Energy Conversion 52 2.5 Electromagnetic and Electrostatic Forces 55 2.6 Operating Characteristics of an Elementary Electromagnet 60 2.7 Single-Phase Reluctance Machine 65 2.8 Windings in Relative Motion 70 2.9 Recapping 72 Chapter 3 Direct-Current Machines and the Dc Drive 77 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Elementary Direct-Current Machine 78 3.3 Voltage and Torque Equations 85 3.4 Permanent-Magnet DC Machine 88 3.5 Time-Domain Block Diagram and State Equations for the Permanent-Magnet DC Machine 92 3.6 Dynamic Characteristics of Permanent-Magnet DC Motors 94 3.7 DC Drive 97 3.8 Recapping 103 Chapter 4 Winding Distribution and Tesla’s Rotating Magnetic Field 105 4.1 Introduction 105 4.2 Winding Distribution 106 4.3 Air-Gap MMF 109 4.4 Tesla’s Rotating Magnetic Field – Symmetrical Stator Circuits 113 4.5 Tesla’s Rotating Fields and Torque with Unsymmetrical and Symmetrical Rotor Circuits 121 4.6 P-Pole Machines 126 4.7 Recapping 131 Chapter 5 Introduction to Reference Frame Theory 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Background 138 5.3 Change of Variables for Symmetrical Stator Circuits 138 5.4 Transformation of Two-Phase Stator Variables to the Arbitrary Reference Frame 143 5.5 Balanced Steady-State Stator Variables Viewed from any Reference Frame 148 5.6 Stator Variables Observed from Different Reference Frames 152 5.7 Instantaneous Phasor 156 5.8 Transformation of Three-Phase Stator Variables to the Arbitrary Reference Frame 159 5.9 Substitute Variables for Symmetrical Rotating Circuits 162 5.10 Recapping 164 Chapter 6 Permanent-Magnet AC Machine and Field Orientation of a Brushless DC Drive 167 6.1 Introduction 167 6.2 Two-Phase Permanent-Magnet AC Machine 168 6.3 Voltage Equations and Winding Inductances 170 6.4 Torque 172 6.5 Machine Equations in the Rotor Reference Frame 173 6.6 Instantaneous and Steady-State Phasors 177 6.7 Three-Phase Permanent-Magnet AC Machine 181 6.8 Unequal Direct- and Quadrature-Axis Inductances 186 6.9 Field Orientation of a Brushless DC Drive 189 6.10 Inverter-Supplied Brushless DC Drive 208 6.11 Recapping 221 Chapter 7 Synchronous Machines 223 7.1 Introduction 223 7.2 Windings of the Synchronous Machine 224 7.3 Two-Phase Round-Rotor Synchronous Machine 228 7.4 Analysis of Steady-State Operation 234 7.5 Analysis of Steady-State Operation in Power Systems 238 7.6 Two-Phase Reluctance Machine 247 7.7 Dynamic and Steady-State Performance 254 7.8 Three-Phase Round-Rotor Synchronous Machine 260 7.9 Recapping 266 Chapter 8 Symmetrical Induction Machines and Field Orientation 269 8.1 Introduction 269 8.2 Two-Phase Induction Machine 270 8.3 Voltage Equations and Winding Inductances 274 8.4 Torque 280 8.5 Voltage Equations in the Arbitrary Reference Frame 281 8.6 Magnetically Linear Flux-Linkage Equations and Equivalent Circuits 284 8.7 Torque Equations in Arbitrary Reference Frame Variables 286 8.8 Phasors and Steady-State Operating Modes 286 8.9 Dynamic and Steady-State Performance – Machine Variables 299 8.10 Free Acceleration Viewed from Stationary, Rotor, and Synchronously Rotating Reference Frames 307 8.11 Three-Phase Induction Machine 312 8.12 Principles of Field Orientation 319 8.13 Recapping 331 Chapter 9 Stepper Motors 335 9.1 Introduction 335 9.2 Basic Configurations of Multistack Variable-Reluctance Stepper Motors 335 9.3 Equations for Multistack Variable-Reluctance Stepper Motors 342 9.4 Operating Characteristics of Multistack Variable-Reluctance Stepper Motors 345 9.5 Single-Stack Variable-Reluctance Stepper Motors 348 9.6 Basic Configuration of Permanent-Magnet Stepper Motors 352 9.7 Equations for Permanent-Magnet Stepper Motors 356 9.8 Equations of Permanent-Magnet Stepper Motors in Rotor Reference Frame – Reluctance Torques Neglected 359 9.9 Recapping 363 Chapter 10 Power Electronics 365 10.1 Introduction 365 10.2 Switching-Circuit Fundamentals 365 10.3 DC–DC Conversion 376 10.4 AC–DC Conversion 389 10.5 DC–AC Conversion 403 10.6 Recapping 407 Appendix A 411 Appendix B 415 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisTHE ONE-STOP RESOURCE FOR ANY INDIVIDUAL OR ORGANIZATION CONSIDERING FOG COMPUTING Fog and Fogonomics is a comprehensive and technology-centric resource that highlights the system model, architectures, building blocks, and IEEE standards for fog computing platforms and solutions. The fog is defined as the multiple interconnected layers of computing along the continuum from cloud to endpoints such as user devices and things including racks or microcells in server closets, residential gateways, factory control systems, and more. The authors?noted experts on the topic?review business models and metrics that allow for the economic assessment of fog-based information communication technology (ICT) resources, especially mobile resources. The book contains a wide range of templates and formulas for calculating quality-of-service values. Comprehensive in scope, it covers topics including fog computing technologies and reference architecture, fog-related standards Table of ContentsList of Contributors xvii Preface xxi 1 Fog Computing and Fogonomics 1Yang Yang, Jianwei Huang, Tao Zhang, and Joe Weinman 2 Collaborative Mechanism for Hybrid Fog-Cloud Scenarios 7Xavi Masip, Eva Marín, Jordi Garcia, and Sergi Sànchez 2.1 The Collaborative Scenario 7 2.1.1 The F2C Model 11 2.1.1.1 The Layering Architecture 13 2.1.1.2 The Fog Node 14 2.1.1.3 F2C as a Service 16 2.1.2 The F2C Control Architecture 19 2.1.2.1 Hierarchical Architecture 20 2.1.2.2 Main Functional Blocks 24 2.1.2.3 Managing Control Data 25 2.1.2.4 Sharing Resources 26 2.2 Benefits and Applicability 28 2.3 The Challenges 29 2.3.1 Research Challenges 30 2.3.1.1 What a Resource is 30 2.3.1.2 Categorization 30 2.3.1.3 Identification 31 2.3.1.4 Clustering 33 2.3.1.5 Resources Discovery 33 2.3.1.6 Resource Allocation 34 2.3.1.7 Reliability 35 2.3.1.8 QoS 36 2.3.1.9 Security 36 2.3.2 Industry Challenges 37 2.3.2.1 What an F2C Provider Should Be? 38 2.3.2.2 Shall Cloud/Fog Providers Communicate with Each Other 38 2.3.2.3 How Multifog/Cloud Access is Managed 39 2.3.3 Business Challenges 40 2.4 Ongoing Efforts 41 2.4.1 ECC 41 2.4.2 mF2C 42 2.4.3 MEC 42 2.4.4 OEC 44 2.4.5 OFC 44 2.5 Handling Data in Coordinated Scenarios 45 2.5.1 The New Data 46 2.5.2 The Life Cycle of Data 48 2.5.3 F2C Data Management 49 2.5.3.1 Data Collection 49 2.5.3.2 Data Storage 51 2.5.3.3 Data Processing 52 2.6 The Coming Future 52 Acknowledgments 54 References 54 3 Computation Offloading Game for Fog-Cloud Scenario 61Hamed Shah-Mansouri and Vincent W.S. Wong 3.1 Internet of Things 61 3.2 Fog Computing 63 3.2.1 Overview of Fog Computing 63 3.2.2 Computation Offloading 64 3.2.2.1 Evaluation Criteria 65 3.2.2.2 Literature Review 66 3.3 A Computation Task Offloading Game for Hybrid Fog-Cloud Computing 67 3.3.1 System Model 67 3.3.1.1 Hybrid Fog-Cloud Computing 68 3.3.1.2 Computation Task Models 68 3.3.1.3 Quality of Experience 71 3.3.2 Computation Offloading Game 71 3.3.2.1 Game Formulation 71 3.3.2.2 Algorithm Development 74 3.3.2.3 Price of Anarchy 74 3.3.2.4 Performance Evaluation 75 3.4 Conclusion 80 References 80 4 Pricing Tradeoffs for Data Analytics in Fog–Cloud Scenarios 83Yichen Ruan, Liang Zheng, Maria Gorlatova, Mung Chiang, and Carlee Joe-Wong 4.1 Introduction: Economics and Fog Computing 83 4.1.1 Fog Application Pricing 85 4.1.2 Incentivizing Fog Resources 86 4.1.3 A Fogonomics Research Agenda 86 4.2 Fog Pricing Today 87 4.2.1 Pricing Network Resources 87 4.2.2 Pricing Computing Resources 89 4.2.3 Pricing and Architecture Trade-offs 89 4.3 Typical Fog Architectures 90 4.3.1 Fog Applications 90 4.3.2 The Cloud-to-Things Continuum 90 4.4 A Case Study: Distributed Data Processing 92 4.4.1 A Temperature Sensor Testbed 92 4.4.2 Latency, Cost, and Risk 95 4.4.3 System Trade-off: Fog or Cloud 98 4.5 Future Research Directions 101 4.6 Conclusion 102 Acknowledgments 102 References 103 5 Quantitative and Qualitative Economic Benefits of Fog 107Joe Weinman 5.1 Characteristics of Fog Computing Solutions 108 5.2 Strategic Value 109 5.2.1 Information Excellence 110 5.2.2 Solution Leadership 110 5.2.3 Collective Intimacy 110 5.2.4 Accelerated Innovation 111 5.3 Bandwidth, Latency, and Response Time 111 5.3.1 Network Latency 113 5.3.2 Server Latency 114 5.3.3 Balancing Consolidation and Dispersion to Minimize Total Latency 114 5.3.4 Data Traffic Volume 115 5.3.5 Nodes and Interconnections 116 5.4 Capacity, Utilization, Cost, and Resource Allocation 117 5.4.1 Capacity Requirements 117 5.4.2 Capacity Utilization 118 5.4.3 Unit Cost of Delivered Resources 119 5.4.4 Resource Allocation, Sharing, and Scheduling 120 5.5 Information Value and Service Quality 120 5.5.1 Precision and Accuracy 120 5.5.2 Survivability, Availability, and Reliability 122 5.6 Sovereignty, Privacy, Security, Interoperability, and Management 123 5.6.1 Data Sovereignty 123 5.6.2 Privacy and Security 123 5.6.3 Heterogeneity and Interoperability 124 5.6.4 Monitoring, Orchestration, and Management 124 5.7 Trade-Offs 125 5.8 Conclusion 126 References 126 6 Incentive Schemes for User-Provided Fog Infrastructure 129George Iosifidis, Lin Gao, Jianwei Huang, and Leandros Tassiulas 6.1 Introduction 129 6.2 Technology and Economic Issues in UPIs 132 6.2.1 Overview of UPI models for Network Connectivity 132 6.2.2 Technical Challenges of Resource Allocation 134 6.2.3 Incentive Issues 135 6.3 Incentive Mechanisms for Autonomous Mobile UPIs 137 6.4 Incentive Mechanisms for Provider-assisted Mobile UPIs 140 6.5 Incentive Mechanisms for Large-Scale Systems 143 6.6 Open Challenges in Mobile UPI Incentive Mechanisms 145 6.6.1 Autonomous Mobile UPIs 145 6.6.1.1 Consensus of the Service Provider 145 6.6.1.2 Dynamic Setting 146 6.6.2 Provider-assisted Mobile UPIs 146 6.6.2.1 Modeling the Users 146 6.6.2.2 Incomplete Market Information 147 6.7 Conclusions 147 References 148 7 Fog-Based Service Enablement Architecture 151Nanxi Chen, Siobhán Clarke, and Shu Chen 7.1 Introduction 151 7.1.1 Objectives and Challenges 152 7.2 Ongoing Effort on FogSEA 153 7.2.1 FogSEA Service Description 156 7.2.2 Semantic Data Dependency Overlay Network 158 7.2.2.1 Creation and Maintenance 159 7.2.2.2 Semantic-Based Service Matchmarking 161 7.3 Early Results 164 7.3.1 Service Composition 165 7.3.1.1 SeDDON Creation in FogSEA 167 7.3.2 Related Work 168 7.3.2.1 Semantic-Based Service Overlays 169 7.3.2.2 Goal-Driven Planning 170 7.3.2.3 Service Discovery 171 7.3.3 Open Issue and Future Work 172 References 174 8 Software-Defined Fog Orchestration for IoT Services 179Renyu Yang, Zhenyu Wen, David McKee, Tao Lin, Jie Xu, and Peter Garraghan 8.1 Introduction 179 8.2 Scenario and Application 182 8.2.1 Concept Definition 182 8.2.2 Fog-enabled IoT Application 184 8.2.3 Characteristics and Open Challenges 185 8.2.4 Orchestration Requirements 187 8.3 Architecture: A Software-Defined Perspective 188 8.3.1 Solution Overview 188 8.3.2 Software-Defined Architecture 189 8.4 Orchestration 191 8.4.1 Resource Filtering and Assignment 192 8.4.2 Component Selection and Placement 194 8.4.3 Dynamic Orchestration with Runtime QoS 195 8.4.4 Systematic Data-Driven Optimization 196 8.4.5 Machine-Learning for Orchestration 197 8.5 Fog Simulation 198 8.5.1 Overview 198 8.5.2 Simulation for IoT Application in Fog 199 8.5.3 Simulation for Fog Orchestration 201 8.6 Early Experience 202 8.6.1 Simulation-Based Orchestration 202 8.6.2 Orchestration in Container-Based Systems 206 8.7 Discussion 207 8.8 Conclusion 208 Acknowledgment 208 References 208 9 A Decentralized Adaptation System for QoS Optimization 213Nanxi Chen, Fan Li, Gary White, Siobhán Clarke, and Yang Yang 9.1 Introduction 213 9.2 State of the Art 217 9.2.1 QoS-aware Service Composition 217 9.2.2 SLA (Re-)negotiation 219 9.2.3 Service Monitoring 221 9.3 Fog Service Delivery Model and AdaptFog 224 9.3.1 AdaptFog Architecture 224 9.3.2 Service Performance Validation 227 9.3.3 Runtime QoS Monitoring 232 9.3.4 Fog-to-Fog Service Level Renegotiation 235 9.4 Conclusion and Open Issues 240 References 240 10 Efficient Task Scheduling for Performance Optimization 249Yang Yang, Shuang Zhao, Kunlun Wang, and Zening Liu 10.1 Introduction 249 10.2 Individual Delay-minimization Task Scheduling 251 10.2.1 System Model 251 10.2.2 Problem Formulation 251 10.2.3 POMT Algorithm 253 10.3 Energy-efficient Task Scheduling 255 10.3.1 Fog Computing Network 255 10.3.2 Medium Access Protocol 257 10.3.3 Energy Efficiency 257 10.3.4 Problem Properties 258 10.3.5 Optimal Task Scheduling Strategy 259 10.4 Delay Energy Balanced Task Scheduling 260 10.4.1 Overview of Homogeneous Fog Network Model 260 10.4.2 Problem Formulation and Analytical Framework 261 10.4.3 Delay Energy Balanced Task Offloading 262 10.4.4 Performance Analysis 262 10.5 Open Challenges in Task Scheduling 265 10.5.1 Heterogeneity of Mobile Nodes 265 10.5.2 Mobility of Mobile Nodes 265 10.5.3 Joint Task and Traffic Scheduling 265 10.6 Conclusion 266 References 266 11 Noncooperative and Cooperative Computation Offloading 269Xu Chen and Zhi Zhou 11.1 Introduction 269 11.2 Related Works 271 11.3 Noncooperative Computation Offloading 272 11.3.1 System Model 272 11.3.1.1 Communication Model 272 11.3.1.2 Computation Model 273 11.3.2 Decentralized Computation Offloading Game 275 11.3.2.1 Game Formulation 275 11.3.2.2 Game Property 276 11.3.3 Decentralized Computation Offloading Mechanism 280 11.3.3.1 Mechanism Design 280 11.3.3.2 Performance Analysis 282 11.4 Cooperative Computation Offloading 283 11.4.1 HyFog Framework Model 283 11.4.1.1 Resource Model 283 11.4.1.2 Task Execution Model 284 11.4.2 Inadequacy of Bipartite Matching–Based Task Offloading 285 11.4.3 Three-Layer Graph Matching Based Task Offloading 287 11.5 Discussions 289 11.5.1 Incentive Mechanisms for Collaboration 290 11.5.2 Coping with System Dynamics 290 11.5.3 Hybrid Centralized–Decentralized Implementation 291 11.6 Conclusion 291 References 292 12 A Highly Available Storage System for Elastic Fog 295Jaeyoon Chung, Carlee Joe-Wong, and Sangtae Ha 12.1 Introduction 295 12.1.1 Fog Versus Cloud Services 296 12.1.2 A Fog Storage Service 297 12.2 Design 299 12.2.1 Design Considerations 299 12.2.2 Architecture 300 12.2.3 File Operations 301 12.3 Fault Tolerant Data Access and Share Placement 303 12.3.1 Data Encoding and Placement Scheme 303 12.3.2 Robust and Exact Share Requests 304 12.3.3 Clustering Storage Nodes 305 12.3.4 Storage Selection 306 12.3.4.1 File Download Times 307 12.3.4.2 Optimizing Share Locations 307 12.4 Implementation 309 12.4.1 Metadata 310 12.4.2 Access Counting 311 12.4.3 NAT Traversal 312 12.5 Evaluation 312 12.6 Discussion and Open Questions 318 12.7 Related Work 319 12.8 Conclusion 320 Acknowledgments 320 References 320 13 Development of Wearable Services with Edge Devices 325Yuan-Yao Shih, Ai-Chun Pang, and Yuan-Yao Lou 13.1 Introduction 325 13.2 Related Works 328 13.2.1 Without Developer’s Effort 329 13.2.2 Require Developer’s Effort 330 13.3 Problem Description 331 13.4 System Architecture 332 13.4.1 End Device 332 13.4.2 Fog Node 333 13.4.3 Controller 333 13.5 Methodology 333 13.5.1 End Device 334 13.5.1.1 Localization 334 13.5.1.2 Speech Recognition 335 13.5.1.3 Retrieving Google Calendar Information 336 13.5.2 Fog Node 337 13.5.3 Controller 338 13.6 Performance Evaluation 339 13.6.1 Experiment Setup 339 13.6.2 Different Computation Loads 340 13.6.3 Different Types of Applications 342 13.6.4 Remote Wearable Services Provision 344 13.6.5 Estimation of Power Consumption 346 13.7 Discussion 348 13.8 Conclusion 349 References 350 14 Security and Privacy Issues and Solutions for Fog 353Mithun Mukherjee, Mohamed Amine Ferrag, Leandros Maglaras, Abdelouahid Derhab, and Mohammad Aazam 14.1 Introduction 353 14.1.1 Major Limitations in Traditional Cloud Computing 353 14.1.2 Fog Computing: An Edge Computing Paradigm 354 14.1.3 A Three-Tier Fog Computing Architecture 357 14.2 Security and Privacy Challenges Posed by Fog Computing 360 14.3 Existing Research on Security and Privacy Issues in Fog Computing 361 14.3.1 Privacy-preserving 361 14.3.2 Authentication 363 14.3.3 Access Control 363 14.3.4 Malicious attacks 364 14.4 Open Questions and Research Challenges 366 14.4.1 Trust 367 14.4.2 Privacy preservation 367 14.4.3 Authentication 367 14.4.4 Malicious Attacks and Intrusion Detection 368 14.4.5 Cross-border Issues and Fog Forensic 369 14.5 Summary 369 Exercises 370 References 370 Index 375

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Basic Concepts 1 1.1 System of Units 1 1.2 Basic Quantities 2 1.3 Circuit Elements 8 Summary 18 2 Resistive Circuits 19 2.1 Ohm’s Law 19 2.2 Kirchhoff’s Laws 24 2.3 Single-Loop Circuits 33 2.4 Single-Node-Pair Circuits 40 2.5 Series and Parallel Resistor Combinations 45 2.6 Circuits with Series-Parallel Combinations of Resistors 51 2.7 Wye Delta Transformations 57 2.8 Circuits with Dependent Sources 61 2.9 Resistor Technologies for Electronic Manufacturing 67 2.10 Application Examples 70 2.11 Design Examples 72 Summary 78 3 Nodal and Loop Analysis Techniques 79 3.1 Nodal Analysis 79 3.2 Loop Analysis 100 3.3 Application Example 117 3.4 Design Example 118 Summary 119 4 Operational Amplifiers 120 4.1 Introduction 120 4.2 Op-Amp Models 121 4.3 Fundamental Op-Amp Circuits 127 4.4 Comparators 135 4.5 Application Examples 136 4.6 Design Examples 140 Summary 144 5 Additional Analysis Techniques 145 5.1 Introduction 145 5.2 Superposition 148 5.3 Thévenin’s and Norton’s Theorems 153 5.4 Maximum Power Transfer 171 5.5 Application Example 175 5.6 Design Examples 176 Summary 181 6 Capacitance and Inductance 182 6.1 Capacitors 182 6.2 Inductors 189 6.3 Capacitor and Inductor Combinations 198 6.4 RC Operational Amplifier Circuits 206 6.5 Application Examples 208 6.6 Design Examples 213 Summary 214 7 First- and Second-Order Transient Circuits 215 7.1 Introduction 215 7.2 First-Order Circuits 217 7.3 Second-Order Circuits 237 7.4 Application Examples 250 7.5 Design Examples 259 Summary 266 8 AC Steady-State Analysis 268 8.1 Sinusoids 268 8.2 Sinusoidal and Complex Forcing Functions 271 8.3 Phasors 275 8.4 Phasor Relationships for Circuit Elements 277 8.5 Impedance and Admittance 281 8.6 Phasor Diagrams 287 8.7 Basic Analysis Using Kirchhoff’s Laws 290 8.8 Analysis Techniques 293 8.9 Application Examples 305 8.10 Design Examples 307 Summary 310 9 Steady-State Power Analysis 311 9.1 Instantaneous Power 311 9.2 Average Power 312 9.3 Maximum Average Power Transfer 318 9.4 Effective or RMS Values 322 9.5 The Power Factor 325 9.6 Complex Power 327 9.7 Power Factor Correction 333 9.8 Single-Phase Three-Wire Circuits 337 9.9 Safety Considerations 340 9.10 Application Examples 348 9.11 Design Examples 352 Summary 355 10 Magnetically Coupled Networks 356 10.1 Mutual Inductance 356 10.2 Energy Analysis 367 10.3 The Ideal Transformer 370 10.4 Safety Considerations 379 10.5 Application Examples 380 10.6 Design Examples 385 Summary 388 11 Polyphase Circuits 389 11.1 Three-Phase Circuits 389 11.2 Three-Phase Connections 394 11.3 Source/Load Connections 396 11.4 Power Relationships 404 11.5 Power Factor Correction 408 11.6 Application Examples 410 11.7 Design Examples 413 Summary 417 12 Variable-Frequency Network Performance 418 12.1 Variable Frequency-Response Analysis 418 12.2 Sinusoidal Frequency Analysis 426 12.3 Resonant Circuits 438 12.4 Scaling 458 12.5 Filter Networks 460 12.6 Application Examples 484 12.7 Design Examples 488 Summary 494 13 The Laplace Transform 496 13.1 Definition 496 13.2 Two Important Singularity Functions 497 13.3 Transform Pairs 499 13.4 Properties of the Transform 501 13.5 Performing the Inverse Transform 503 13.6 Convolution Integral 509 13.7 Initial-Value and Final-Value Theorems 512 13.8 Solving Differential Equations with Laplace Transforms 514 Summary 516 14 Application of the Laplace Transform to Circuit Analysis 517 14.1 Laplace Circuit Solutions 517 14.2 Circuit Element Models 519 14.3 Analysis Techniques 521 14.4 Transfer Function 532 14.5 Pole-Zero Plot/Bode Plot Connection 552 14.6 Steady-State Response 554 Summary 558 15 Fourier Analysis Techniques 559 15.1 Fourier Series 559 15.2 Fourier Transform 583 15.3 Application Example 594 15.4 Design Examples 595 Summary 601 16 Two-Port Networks 602 16.1 Admittance Parameters 602 16.2 Impedance Parameters 605 16.3 Hybrid Parameters 607 16.4 Transmission Parameters 609 16.5 Parameter Conversions 611 16.6 Interconnection of Two-Ports 611 Summary 617 Appendix Complex Numbers 618 Problems 626 Index I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn up-to-date guide to an overview of authentication in the Internet of Things (IoT) The Internet of things (IoT) is the network of the countless physical devices that have the possibility to connect and exchange data. Among the various security requirements, authentication to the IoT is the first step to prevent the impact of attackers. IoT Security offers an important guide into the development of the many authentication mechanisms that provide IoT authentication at various levels such as user level, device level and network level. The book covers a wide range of topics including an overview of IoT and addresses in detail the security challenges at every layer by considering both the technologies and the architecture used. The authorsnoted experts on the topicprovide solutions for remediation of compromised security, as well as methods for risk mitigation, and offer suggestions for prevention and improvement. In addition, IoT Security offers a variety of illustrative use cases. This Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xiii List of Contributors xvii Preface xxiii Acknowledgments xxix Part I IoT Overview 1 1 Introduction to IoT 3Anshuman Kalla, Pawani Prombage, and Madhusanka Liyanage 1.1 Introduction 4 1.1.1 Evolution of IoT 4 1.2 IoT Architecture and Taxonomy 5 1.3 Standardization Efforts 7 1.4 IoT Applications 10 1.4.1 Smart Home 11 1.4.2 Smart City 13 1.4.3 Smart Energy 14 1.4.4 Healthcare 15 1.4.5 IoT Automotive 16 1.4.6 Gaming, AR and VR 16 1.4.7 Retail 17 1.4.8 Wearable 18 1.4.9 Smart Agriculture 18 1.4.10 Industrial Internet 19 1.4.11 Tactile Internet 19 1.4.12 Conclusion 20 Acknowledgement 20 References 20 2 Introduction to IoT Security 27Anca D. Jurcut, Pasika Ranaweera, and Lina Xu 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Attacks and Countermeasures 29 2.2.1 Perception Layer 30 2.2.2 Network Layer 33 2.2.3 Application Layer 34 2.3 Authentication and Authorization 41 2.3.1 Authentication 42 2.3.2 Authorization 42 2.3.3 Authentication at IoT Layers 43 2.4 Other Security Features and Related Issues 48 2.4.1 The Simplified Layer Structure 48 2.4.2 The Idea of Middleware 49 2.4.3 Cross-Layer Security Problem 50 2.4.4 Privacy 50 2.4.5 Risk Mitigation 51 2.5 Discussion 52 2.6 Future Research Directions 54 2.6.1 Blockchain 54 2.6.2 5G 55 2.6.3 Fog and Edge Computing 56 2.6.4 Quantum Security, AI, and Predictive Data Analytics 57 2.6.5 Network Slicing 57 2.7 Conclusions 58 References 59 Part II IoT Network and Communication Authentication 65 3 Symmetric Key-Based Authentication with an Application to Wireless Sensor Networks 67An Braeken 3.1 Introduction 67 3.2 Related Work 69 3.3 System Model and Assumptions 70 3.3.1 Design Goals 70 3.3.2 Setting 70 3.3.3 Notations 71 3.3.4 Attack Model 71 3.4 Scheme in Normal Mode 72 3.4.1 Installation Phase 72 3.4.2 Group Node Key 73 3.4.3 Individual Cluster Key 73 3.4.4 Pairwise Key Derivation 74 3.4.5 Multicast Key 76 3.4.6 Group Cluster Key 76 3.5 Authentication 77 3.5.1 Authentication by CN 77 3.5.2 Authenticated Broadcast by the CH 77 3.5.3 Authenticated Broadcast by the BS 78 3.6 Scheme in Change Mode 78 3.6.1 Capture of CN 78 3.6.2 Capture of CH 79 3.6.3 Changes for Honest Nodes 79 3.7 Security Analysis 80 3.7.1 Resistance Against Impersonation Attack 80 3.7.2 Resistance Against Node Capture 81 3.7.3 Resistance Against Replay Attacks 81 3.8 Efficiency 81 3.8.1 Number of Communication Phases 81 3.8.2 Storage Requirements 82 3.8.3 Packet Fragmentation 82 3.9 Conclusions 83 Acknowledgement 83 References 83 4 Public Key Based Protocols – EC Crypto 85Pawani Porambage, An Braeken, and Corinna Schmitt 4.1 Introduction to ECC 85 4.1.1 Notations 86 4.1.2 ECC for Authentication and Key Management 87 4.2 ECC Based Implicit Certificates 88 4.2.1 Authentication and Key Management Using ECC Implicit Certificates 88 4.3 ECC-Based Signcryption 91 4.3.1 Security Features 93 4.3.2 Scheme 93 4.4 ECC-Based Group Communication 95 4.4.1 Background and Assumptions 95 4.4.2 Scheme 96 4.5 Implementation Aspects 97 4.6 Discussion 98 References 98 5 Lattice-Based Cryptography and Internet of Things 101Veronika Kuchta and Gaurav Sharma 5.1 Introduction 101 5.1.1 Organization 102 5.2 Lattice-Based Cryptography 102 5.2.1 Notations 102 5.2.2 Preliminaries 103 5.2.3 Computational Problems 104 5.2.4 State-of-the-Art 105 5.3 Lattice-Based Primitives 106 5.3.1 One-Way and Collision-Resistant Hash Functions 106 5.3.2 Passively Secure Encryption 106 5.3.3 Actively Secure Encryption 107 5.3.4 Trapdoor Functions 107 5.3.5 Gadget Trapdoor 108 5.3.6 Digital Signatures without Trapdoors 108 5.3.7 Pseudorandom Functions (PRF) 109 5.3.8 Homomorphic Encryption 110 5.3.9 Identity-Based Encryption (IBE) 111 5.3.10 Attribute-Based Encryption 112 5.4 Lattice-Based Cryptography for IoT 113 5.5 Conclusion 115 References 115 Part III IoT User Level Authentication 119 6 Efficient and Anonymous Mutual Authentication Protocol in Multi-Access Edge Computing (MEC) Environments 121Pardeep Kumar and Madhusanka Liyanage 6.1 Introduction 121 6.2 Related Work 123 6.3 Network Model and Adversary Model 124 6.3.1 Network Model 124 6.3.2 Adversary Model 125 6.4 Proposed Scheme 125 6.4.1 System Setup for the Edge Nodes Registration at the Registration Center 125 6.4.2 User Registration Phase 126 6.4.3 Login and User Authentication Phase 126 6.4.4 Password Update Phase 127 6.5 Security and Performance Evaluation 127 6.5.1 Informal Security Analysis 127 6.5.2 Performance Analysis 129 6.6 Conclusion 130 References 130 7 Biometric-Based Robust Access Control Model for Industrial Internet of Things Applications 133Pardeep Kumar and Gurjot Singh Gaba 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Related Work 134 7.3 Network Model, Threat Model and Security Requirements 136 7.3.1 Network Model 136 7.3.2 Threat Model 136 7.3.3 Security Goals 136 7.4 Proposed Access Control Model in IIoT 136 7.4.1 System Setup 137 7.4.2 Authentication and Key Establishment 138 7.5 Security and Performance Evaluations 139 7.5.1 Informal Security Analysis 139 7.5.2 Performance Analysis 140 7.6 Conclusions 141 References 142 8 Gadget Free Authentication 143Madhusanka Liyanage, An Braeken, and Mika Ylianttila 8.1 Introduction to Gadget-Free World 143 8.2 Introduction to Biometrics 146 8.3 Gadget-Free Authentication 148 8.4 Preliminary Aspects 149 8.4.1 Security Requirements 149 8.4.2 Setting 149 8.4.3 Notations 150 8.5 The System 150 8.5.1 Registration Phase 151 8.5.2 Installation Phase 151 8.5.3 Request Phase 151 8.5.4 Answer Phase 152 8.5.5 Update Phase 153 8.6 Security Analysis 153 8.6.1 Accountability 153 8.6.2 Replay Attacks 153 8.6.3 Insider Attacks 153 8.6.4 HW/SW Attacks 154 8.6.5 Identity Privacy 154 8.7 Performance Analysis 154 8.7.1 Timing for Cryptographic/Computational Operation 155 8.7.2 Communication Cost 155 8.8 Conclusions 156 Acknowledgement 156 References 156 9 WebMaDa 2.1 – A Web-Based Framework for Handling User Requests Automatically and Addressing Data Control in Parallel 159Corinna Schmitt, Dominik Bünzli, and Burkhard Stiller 9.1 Introduction 159 9.2 IoT-Related Concerns 160 9.3 Design Decisions 162 9.4 WebMaDa’s History 163 9.5 WebMaDa 2.1 166 9.5.1 Email Notifications 166 9.5.2 Data Control Support 171 9.6 Implementation 173 9.6.1 Mailing Functionality 173 9.6.2 Logging Functionality 175 9.6.3 Filtering Functionality 176 9.7 Proof of Operability 176 9.7.1 Automated Request Handling 177 9.7.2 Filtering Functionality Using Logging Solution 182 9.8 Summary and Conclusions 182 References 183 Part IV IoT Device Level Authentication 185 10 PUF-Based Authentication and Key Exchange for Internet of Things 187An Braeken 10.1 Introduction 187 10.2 Related Work 189 10.2.1 Key Agreement from IoT Device to Server 189 10.2.2 Key Agreement between Two IoT Devices 190 10.3 Preliminaries 191 10.3.1 System Architecture 191 10.3.2 Assumptions 192 10.3.3 Attack Model 192 10.3.4 Cryptographic Operations 193 10.4 Proposed System 194 10.4.1 Registration Phase 195 10.4.2 Security Association Phase 195 10.4.3 Authentication and Key Agreement Phase 195 10.5 Security Evaluation 197 10.6 Performance 199 10.6.1 Computational Cost 199 10.6.2 Communication Cost 200 10.7 Conclusions 201 References 202 11 Hardware-Based Encryption via Generalized Synchronization of Complex Networks 205Lars Keuninckx and Guy Van der Sande 11.1 Introduction 205 11.2 System Scheme: Synchronization without Correlation 208 11.2.1 The Delay-Filter-Permute Block 211 11.2.2 Steady-State Dynamics of the DFP 214 11.2.3 DFP-Bitstream Generation 214 11.2.4 Sensitivity to Changes in the Permutation Table 215 11.3 The Chaotic Followers 217 11.3.1 The Permute-Filter Block 217 11.3.2 Brute Force Attack 219 11.3.3 PF-Bitstream Generation 219 11.4 The Complete System 220 11.4.1 Image Encryption Example 220 11.4.2 Usage for Authentication 221 11.5 Conclusions and Outlook 222 Acknowledgements 223 Author Contributions Statement 223 Additional Information 223 References 223 Part V IoT Use Cases and Implementations 225 12 IoT Use Cases and Implementations: Healthcare 227Mehrnoosh Monshizadeh, Vikramajeet Khatri, Oskari Koskimies, and Mauri Honkanen 12.1 Introduction 227 12.2 Remote Patient Monitoring Architecture 228 12.3 Security Related to eHealth 229 12.3.1 IoT Authentication 231 12.4 Remote Patient Monitoring Security 234 12.4.1 Mobile Application Security 234 12.4.2 Communication Security 235 12.4.3 Data Integrity 235 12.4.4 Cloud Security 235 12.4.5 Audit Logs 236 12.4.6 Intrusion Detection Module 236 12.4.7 Authentication Architecture 240 12.4.8 Attacks on Remote Patient Monitoring Platform 242 12.5 Conclusion 242 References 244 13 Secure and Efficient Privacy-preserving Scheme in Connected Smart Grid Networks 247An Braeken and Pardeep Kumar 13.1 Introduction 247 13.1.1 Related Work 249 13.1.2 Our Contributions 250 13.1.3 Structure of Chapter 251 13.2 Preliminaries 251 13.2.1 System Model 251 13.2.2 Security Requirements 251 13.2.3 Cryptographic Operations and Notations 252 13.3 Proposed Scheme 253 13.3.1 Initialisation Phase 253 13.3.2 Smart Meter Registration Phase 253 13.3.3 Secure Communication Between Smart Meter and Aggregator 254 13.4 Security Analysis 255 13.4.1 Formal Proof 255 13.4.2 Informal Discussion 258 13.5 Performance Analysis 260 13.5.1 Computation Costs 260 13.5.2 Communication Costs 261 13.6 Conclusions 262 References 262 14 Blockchain-Based Cyber Physical Trust Systems 265Arnold Beckmann, Alex Milne, Jean-Jose Razafindrakoto, Pardeep Kumar, Michael Breach, and Norbert Preining 14.1 Introduction 265 14.2 Related Work 268 14.3 Overview of Use-Cases and Security Goals 269 14.3.1 Use-Cases 269 14.3.2 Security Goals 270 14.4 Proposed Approach 270 14.5 Evaluation Results 272 14.5.1 Security Features 272 14.5.2 Testbed Results 273 14.6 Conclusion 276 References 276 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a strong foundation in electrochemical principles and best practices Written for undergraduate majors in chemistry and chemical engineering, this book teaches the basic principles of electroanalytical chemistry and illustrates best practices through the use of case studies of organic reactions and catalysis using voltammetric methods and of the measurement of clinical and environmental analytes by potentiometric techniques. It provides insight beyond the field of analysis as students address problems arising in many areas of science and technology. The book also emphasizes electrochemical phenomena and conceptual models to help readers understand the influence of experimental conditions and the interpretation of results for common potentiometric and voltammetric methods. Electroanalytical Chemistry: Principles, Best Practices, and Case Studies begins by introducing some basic concepts in electrical phenomena. It then moves on to a chapter that exTable of ContentsPreface ix 1. Basic Electrical Principles 1 1.1 Overview 2 1.2 Basic Concepts 4 1.2.1 Volt Defined 7 1.2.2 Current Defined 7 1.2.3 Oxidation and Reduction 8 1.2.4 Current and Faraday’s Law 8 1.2.5 Potential, Work, and Gibbs’ Free Energy Change 9 1.2.6 Methods Based on Voltage Measurement Versus Current Measurement 10 1.3 Electrochemical Cells 10 1.3.1 Electrodes 10 1.3.2 Cell Resistance 12 1.3.3 Supporting Electrolyte 13 1.4 The Electrified Interface or Electrical Double Layer 14 1.4.1 Structure of the Double Layer 14 1.4.2 The Relationship Between Double Layer Charge and the Potential at the Electrode Interface 20 1.5 Conductance 22 1.6 Mass Transport by Convection and Diffusion 24 1.7 Liquid Junction Potentials 26 Problems 29 References 29 2. Potentiometry of Oxidation–Reduction Processes 31 2.1 Overview 31 2.2 Measuring “Open Circuit” Potentials 33 2.3 Solution Redox Potential 34 2.3.1 The Development of a Charge Separation 35 2.3.2 The Nernst Equation 36 2.3.3 Formal Potential 38 2.3.4 Active Metal Indicator Electrodes 41 2.3.5 Redox Titrations 52 2.3.6 Oxidation–Reduction Potential (ORP) or EH 55 2.3.7 Environmental Applications of Redox Measurements 57 Problems 64 References 66 3. Potentiometry of Ion Selective Electrodes 69 3.1 Overview 69 3.2 Liquid Membrane Devices 73 3.2.1 Selective Accumulation of Ions Inside an Organic Liquid 73 3.2.2 Theory of Membrane Potentials 77 3.2.3 Liquid Membrane Ionophores 80 3.3 Glass Membrane Sensors 82 3.3.1 History of the Development of a Glass Sensor of pH 82 3.3.2 Glass Structure and Sensor Properties 83 3.3.3 Selective Ion Exchange Model 87 3.3.4 The Combination pH Electrode 88 3.3.5 Gas-Sensing Electrodes 89 3.4 Crystalline Membrane Electrodes 93 3.5 Calibration Curves and Detection Limits 96 3.6 A Revolutionary Improvement in Detection Limits 100 3.7 More Recent Ion Selective Electrode Innovations 102 3.7.1 The Function of the Inner Reference Electrode 103 3.7.2 All Solid-State Reference Electrodes 104 3.7.3 Eliminating the Inner Reference Electrode 105 3.7.4 Super-Hydrophobic Membranes 107 3.8 Ion Selective Field Effect Transistors (ISFETs) 108 3.9 Practical Considerations 111 3.9.1 Ionic Strength Buffers 111 3.9.2 Potential Drift 112 Problems 112 References 114 4. Applications of Ion Selective Electrodes 117 4.1 Overview 117 4.2 Case I. An Industrial Application 118 4.2.1 Will the Sample Concentrations Be Measurable? 118 4.2.2 Ionic Strength Adjustment Buffer 118 4.2.3 Sample Pretreatment 119 4.2.4 Salt Bridges 120 4.2.5 Calibration 122 4.2.6 Temperature Control 123 4.2.7 Signal Drift 124 4.2.8 Validating the Method 124 4.2.9 Standard Additions for Potentiometric Analysis 127 4.3 Case II. A Clinical Application 130 4.4 Case III. Environmental Applications 135 4.4.1 US EPA Method for Nitrate Determination by ISE 136 4.4.2 Field Measurements 139 4.5 Good Lab Practice for pH Electrode Use 142 4.5.1 Electrode Maintenance 142 4.5.2 Standard Buffers 143 4.5.3 Influence of Temperature on Cell Potentials 143 4.5.4 Calibration and Direct Sample Measurement 145 4.5.5 Evaluating the Response of a pH Electrode 145 4.5.6 Calibrating a Combination Electrode and pH Meter 147 4.5.7 Low Ionic Strength Samples 148 4.5.8 Samples Containing Soil, Food, Protein or Tris Buffer 148 4.5.9 pH Titrations 149 4.5.10 Gran Plots 149 Problems 151 References 153 5. Controlled Potential Methods 157 5.1 Overview 157 5.2 Similarities between Spectroscopy and Voltammetry 161 5.3 Current is a Measure of the Rate of the Overall Electrode Process 163 5.3.1 Rate of Electron Transfer 163 5.3.2 The Shape of the Current/Voltage Curve 167 5.3.3 Rate of Mass Transport 168 5.3.4 Electrochemical Reversibility 173 5.3.5 Voltammetry at Stationary Electrodes in Quiet Solutions 175 5.4 Methods for Avoiding Background Current 186 5.5 Working Electrodes 190 5.5.1 Mercury Electrodes 190 5.5.2 Solid Working Electrodes 191 5.5.3 Ultramicroelectrodes 199 5.5.4 Fast Scan CV 204 5.6 Pulse Amperometric Detection 207 5.7 Stripping Voltammetry 209 5.8 Special Applications of Amperometry 212 5.8.1 Flow-Through Detectors 212 5.8.2 Dissolved Oxygen Sensors 213 5.8.3 Enzyme Electrodes 215 5.8.4 Karl Fisher Method for Moisture Determination 218 5.9 Ion Transfer Voltammetry 222 Problems 230 References 235 6. Case Studies in Controlled Potential Methods 237 6.1 Overview 237 6.2 Case I. Evaluating the Formal Potential and Related Parameters 238 6.3 Case II. Evaluating Catalysts – Thermodynamic Considerations 242 6.4 Case III. Studying the Oxidation of Organic Molecules 246 6.5 Case IV. Evaluating Catalysts – Kinetic Studies 260 References 268 7. Instrumentation 269 7.1 Overview 269 7.2 A Brief Review of Passive Circuits 270 7.3 Operational Amplifiers 273 7.3.1 Properties of an Ideal Operational Amplifier 275 7.3.2 The Voltage Follower 275 7.3.3 Current Follower or Current-to-Voltage Converter 276 7.3.4 Inverter or Simple Gain Amplifier 277 7.3.5 A Potentiostat for a Three-Electrode Experiment 279 7.4 Noise and Shielding 280 7.5 Making Electrodes and Reference Bridges 283 7.5.1 Voltammetric Working Electrodes 283 7.5.2 Reference Electrodes 284 Problems 286 References 288 Appendix A Ionic Strength, Activity, and Activity Coefficients 289 Appendix B The Nicolsky–Eisenman Equation 293 Appendix C The Henderson Equation for Liquid Junction Potentials 297 Appendix D Standard Electrode Potentials for Some Selected Reduction Reactions 303 Appendix E The Nernst Equation from the Concept of Electrochemical Potential 307 Solutions to Problems 311 Index 333

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xi Preface to the Fourth Edition xiii Preface to the Third Edition xv Preface to the Second Edition xvii Preface to the First Edition xix Part I Fundamentals 1 1 Solar Radiation 3 1.1 The Sun 3 1.2 The Solar Constant 5 1.3 Spectral Distribution of Extraterrestrial Radiation 6 1.4 Variation of Extraterrestrial Radiation 8 1.5 Definitions 9 1.6 Direction of Beam Radiation 12 1.7 Angles for Tracking Surfaces 20 1.8 Ratio of Beam Radiation on Tilted Surface to That on Horizontal Surface 24 1.9 Shading 30 1.10 Extraterrestrial Radiation on a Horizontal Surface 37 1.11 Summary 41 References 43 2 Available Solar Radiation 45 2.1 Definitions 45 2.2 Pyrheliometers and Pyrheliometric Scales 46 2.3 Pyranometers 50 2.4 Measurement of Duration of Sunshine 55 2.5 Solar Radiation Data 56 2.6 Atmospheric Attenuation of Solar Radiation 61 2.7 Estimation of Average Solar Radiation 66 2.8 Estimation of Clear-Sky Radiation 70 2.9 Distribution of Clear and Cloudy Days and Hours 73 2.10 Beam and Diffuse Components of Hourly Radiation 76 2.11 Beam and Diffuse Components of Daily Radiation 79 2.12 Beam and Diffuse Components of Monthly Radiation 81 2.13 Estimation of Hourly Radiation from Daily Data 83 2.14 Radiation on Sloped Surfaces 86 2.15 Radiation on Sloped Surfaces: Isotropic Sky 91 2.16 Radiation on Sloped Surfaces: Anisotropic Sky 92 2.17 Radiation Augmentation 98 2.18 Beam Radiation on Moving Surfaces 103 2.19 Average Radiation on Sloped Surfaces: Isotropic Sky 104 2.20 Average Radiation on Sloped Surfaces: KT Method 108 2.21 Effects of Receiving Surface Orientation on HT 114 2.22 Utilizability 116 2.23 Generalized Utilizability 120 2.24 Daily Utilizability 128 2.25 Summary 134 References 136 3 Selected Heat Transfer Topics 141 3.1 The Electromagnetic Spectrum 141 3.2 Photon Radiation 142 3.3 The Blackbody: Perfect Absorber and Emitter 142 3.4 Planck’s Law and Wien’s Displacement Law 143 3.5 Stefan-Boltzmann Equation 144 3.6 Radiation Tables 145 3.7 Radiation Intensity and Flux 147 3.8 Infrared Radiation Exchange Between Gray Surfaces 149 3.9 Sky Radiation 150 3.10 Radiation Heat Transfer Coefficient 151 3.11 Natural Convection Between Flat Parallel Plates and Between Concentric Cylinders 152 3.12 Convection Suppression 157 3.13 Vee-Corrugated Enclosures 161 3.14 Heat Transfer Relations for Internal Flow 162 3.15 Wind Convection Coefficients 166 3.16 Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop in Packed Beds and Perforated Plates 168 3.17 Effectiveness-NTU Calculations for Heat Exchangers 171 3.18 Summary 173 References 174 4 Radiation Characteristics of Opaque Materials 177 4.1 Absorptance and Emittance 178 4.2 Kirchhoff’s Law 180 4.3 Reflectance of Surfaces 181 4.4 Relationships Among Absorptance, Emittance, and Reflectance 185 4.5 Broadband Emittance and Absorptance 186 4.6 Calculation of Emittance and Absorptance 187 4.7 Measurement of Surface Radiation Properties 190 4.8 Selective Surfaces 192 4.9 Mechanisms of Selectivity 196 4.10 Optimum Properties 199 4.11 Angular Dependence of Solar Absorptance 200 4.12 Absorptance of Cavity Receivers 201 4.13 Specularly Reflecting Surfaces 202 4.14 Advanced Radiation Heat Transfer Analysis 203 4.15 Summary 205 References 206 5 Radiation Transmission through Glazing: Absorbed Radiation 209 5.1 Reflection of Radiation 209 5.2 Absorption by Glazing 213 5.3 Optical Properties of Cover Systems 213 5.4 Transmittance for Diffuse Radiation 218 5.5 Transmittance-Absorptance Product 220 5.6 Angular Dependence of (𝜏𝛼) 221 5.7 Spectral Dependence of Transmittance 222 5.8 Effects of Surface Layers on Transmittance 225 5.9 Absorbed Solar Radiation 226 5.10 Monthly Average Absorbed Radiation 230 5.11 Absorptance of Rooms 236 5.12 Absorptance of Photovoltaic Cells 238 5.13 Summary 241 References 243 6 Flat-Plate Collectors 244 6.1 Description of Flat-Plate Collectors 244 6.2 Basic Flat-Plate Energy Balance Equation 245 6.3 Temperature Distributions in Flat-Plate Collectors 246 6.4 Collector Overall Heat Loss Coefficient 248 6.5 Temperature Distribution Between Tubes and the Collector Efficiency Factor 262 6.6 Temperature Distribution in Flow Direction 269 6.7 Collector Heat Removal Factor and Flow Factor 270 6.8 Critical Radiation Level 274 6.9 Mean Fluid and Plate Temperatures 275 6.10 Effective Transmittance-Absorptance Product 276 6.11 Effects of Dust and Shading 279 6.12 Heat Capacity Effects in Flat-Plate Collectors 280 6.13 Liquid Heater Plate Geometries 283 6.14 Air Heaters 288 6.15 Measurements of Collector Performance 295 6.16 Collector Characterizations 296 6.17 Collector Tests: Efficiency, Incidence Angle Modifier, and Time Constant 297 6.18 Test Data 307 6.19 Thermal Test Data Conversion 310 6.20 Flow Rate Corrections to FR (𝜏𝛼)n and FRUL 313 6.21 Flow Distribution in Collectors 316 6.22 In Situ Collector Performance 317 6.23 Practical Considerations for Flat-Plate Collectors 318 6.24 Putting It All Together 321 6.25 Summary 326 References 327 7 Concentrating Collectors 331 7.1 Collector Configurations 332 7.2 Concentration Ratio 334 7.3 Thermal Performance of Concentrating Collectors 336 7.4 Optical Performance of Concentrating Collectors 343 7.5 Cylindrical Absorber Arrays 344 7.6 Optical Characteristics of Nonimaging Concentrators 346 7.7 Orientation and Absorbed Energy for CPC Collectors 354 7.8 Performance of CPC Collectors 358 7.9 Linear Imaging Concentrators: Geometry 360 7.10 Images Formed by Perfect Linear Concentrators 363 7.11 Images from Imperfect Linear Concentrators 368 7.12 Ray-Trace Methods for Evaluating Concentrators 370 7.13 Incidence Angle Modifiers and Energy Balances 370 7.14 Paraboloidal Concentrators 376 7.15 Central-Receiver Collectors 377 7.16 Practical Considerations 378 7.17 Summary 379 References 380 8 Energy Storage 382 8.1 Process Loads and Solar Collector Outputs 382 8.2 Energy Storage in Solar Thermal Systems 384 8.3 Water Storage 385 8.4 Stratification in Storage Tanks 388 8.5 Packed-Bed Storage 393 8.6 Storage Walls 401 8.7 Seasonal Storage 403 8.8 Phase Change Energy Storage 405 8.9 Chemical Energy Storage 410 8.10 Battery Storage 411 8.11 Hydroelectric and Compressed Air Storage 415 8.12 Summary 418 References 419 9 Solar Process Loads 422 9.1 Examples of Time-Dependent Loads 423 9.2 Hot-Water Loads 424 9.3 Space Heating Loads, Degree-Days, and Balance Temperature 425 9.4 Building Loss Coefficients 428 9.5 Building Energy Storage Capacity 430 9.6 Cooling Loads 430 9.7 Swimming Pool Heating Loads 431 9.8 Summary 433 References 434 10 System Thermal Calculations 436 10.1 Component Models 437 10.2 Collector Heat Exchanger Factor 438 10.3 Duct and Pipe Loss Factors 440 10.4 Controls 443 10.5 Collector Arrays: Series Connections 445 10.6 Performance of Partially Shaded Collectors 447 10.7 Series Arrays with Sections Having Different Orientations 449 10.8 Use of Modified Collector Equations 451 10.9 System Models 455 10.10 Solar Fraction and Solar Savings Fraction 458 10.11 Summary 459 References 461 11 Solar Process Economics 462 11.1 Costs of Solar Process Systems 462 11.2 Design Variables 465 11.3 Economic Figures of Merit 467 11.4 Discounting and Inflation 469 11.5 Present-Worth Factor 471 11.6 Life-Cycle Savings Method 474 11.7 Evaluation of Other Economic Indicators 479 11.8 The P1, P2 Method 482 11.9 Uncertainties in Economic Analyses 487 11.10 Economic Analysis Using Solar Savings Fraction 490 11.11 Summary 491 References 491 Part II Applications 493 12 Solar Water Heating: Active and Passive 495 12.1 Water Heating Systems 495 12.2 Freezing, Boiling, and Scaling 499 12.3 Auxiliary Energy 502 12.4 Forced-Circulation Systems 504 12.5 Low-Flow Pumped Systems 505 12.6 Natural-Circulation Systems 507 12.7 Integral Collector Storage Systems 510 12.8 Retrofit Water Heaters 512 12.9 Water Heating in Space Heating and Cooling Systems 512 12.10 Testing and Rating of Solar Water Heaters 513 12.11 Economics of Solar Water Heating 514 12.12 Swimming Pool Heating 517 12.13 Summary 518 References 519 13 Building Heating: Active 521 13.1 Historical Notes 522 13.2 Solar Heating Systems 523 13.3 CSU House III Flat-Plate Liquid System 528 13.4 CSU House II Air System 531 13.5 Heating System Parametric Study 533 13.6 Solar Energy–Heat Pump Systems 537 13.7 Phase Change Storage Systems 542 13.8 Seasonal Energy Storage Systems 545 13.9 Solar and Off-Peak Electric Systems 549 13.10 Solar System Overheating 550 13.11 Solar Heating Economics 551 13.12 Architectural Considerations 554 References 556 14 Building Heating: Passive and Hybrid Methods 559 14.1 Concepts of Passive Heating 560 14.2 Comfort Criteria and Heating Loads 561 14.3 Movable Insulation and Controls 561 14.4 Shading: Overhangs and Wingwalls 562 14.5 Direct-Gain Systems 566 14.6 Collector-Storage Walls and Roofs 571 14.7 Sunspaces 575 14.8 Active Collection–Passive Storage Hybrid Systems 577 14.9 Other Hybrid Systems 578 14.10 Passive Applications 579 14.11 Heat Distribution in Passive Buildings 584 14.12 Costs and Economics of Passive Heating 585 14.13 Summary 587 References 588 15 Solar Cooling 590 15.1 Solar Absorption Cooling 591 15.2 Theory of Absorption Cooling 593 15.3 Combined Solar Heating and Cooling 599 15.4 Simulation Study of Solar Air Conditioning 600 15.5 Operating Experience with Solar Cooling 603 15.6 Applications of Solar Absorption Air Conditioning 606 15.7 Solar Desiccant Cooling 606 15.8 Ventilation and Recirculation Desiccant Cycles 609 15.9 Solar-Mechanical Cooling 611 15.10 Solar-Related Air Conditioning 614 15.11 Passive Cooling 615 References 616 16 Solar Industrial Process Heat 619 16.1 Integration with Industrial Processes 619 16.2 Mechanical Design Considerations 620 16.3 Economics of Industrial Process Heat 621 16.4 Open-Circuit Air Heating Applications 622 16.5 Recirculating Air System Applications 626 16.6 Once-Through Industrial Water Heating 628 16.7 Recirculating Industrial Water Heating 630 16.8 Shallow-Pond Water Heaters 632 16.9 Summary 634 References 634 17 Solar Thermal Power Systems 636 17.1 Thermal Conversion Systems 636 17.2 Gila Bend Pumping System 637 17.3 Luz Systems 639 17.4 Central-Receiver Systems 643 17.5 Solar One and Solar Two Power Plants 645 17.6 Summary 648 References 648 18 Solar Ponds: Evaporative Processes 650 18.1 Salt-Gradient Solar Ponds 650 18.2 Pond Theory 652 18.3 Applications of Ponds 654 18.4 Solar Distillation 655 18.5 Evaporation 661 18.6 Direct Solar Drying 662 18.7 Summary 662 References 663 Part III Design Methods 665 19 Simulations in Solar Process Design 667 19.1 Simulation Programs 668 19.2 Utility of Simulations 668 19.3 Information from Simulations 669 19.4 TRNSYS: Thermal Process Simulation Program 671 19.5 Simulations and Experiments 677 19.6 Meteorological Data 678 19.7 Limitations of Simulations 681 References 681 20 Design of Active Systems: f-Chart 683 20.1 Review of Design Methods 683 20.2 The f-Chart Method 684 20.3 The f-Chart for Liquid Systems 688 20.4 The f-Chart for Air Systems 694 20.5 Service Water Heating Systems 698 20.6 The f-Chart Results 700 20.7 Parallel Solar Energy-Heat Pump Systems 701 20.8 Summary 705 References 705 21 Design of Active Systems by Utilizability Methods 707 21.1 Hourly Utilizability 708 21.2 Daily Utilizability 711 21.3 The 𝜙, f-Chart Method 714 21.4 Summary 724 References 725 22 Design of Passive and Hybrid Heating Systems 726 22.1 Approaches to Passive Design 726 22.2 Solar-Load Ratio Method 727 22.3 Unutilizability Design Method: Direct Gain 736 22.4 Unutilizability Design Method: Collector-Storage Walls 742 22.5 Hybrid Systems: Active Collection with Passive Storage 750 22.6 Other Hybrid Systems 757 22.7 Summary 758 References 758 23 Design of Photovoltaic Systems 760 23.1 Photovoltaic Converters 761 23.2 PV Generator Characteristics and Models 762 23.3 Cell Temperature 773 23.4 Load Characteristics and Direct-Coupled Systems 775 23.5 Controls and Maximum Power Point Trackers 778 23.6 Applications 779 23.7 Design Procedures 780 23.8 High-Flux PV Generators 786 23.9 Summary 786 References 787 24 Wind Energy 789 24.1 Introduction 789 24.2 Wind Resource 793 24.3 One-Dimensional Wind Turbine Model 801 24.4 Estimating Wind Turbine Average Power and Energy Production 806 24.5 Summary 810 References 810 Appendixes 811 A Problems 811 B Nomenclature 870 C International System of Units 875 D Meteorological Data 877 Index 885

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides an extensive, up-to-date treatment of techniques used for machine condition monitoring Clear and concise throughout, this accessible book is the first to be wholly devoted to the field of condition monitoring for rotating machines using vibration signals. It covers various feature extraction, feature selection, and classification methods as well as their applications to machine vibration datasets. It also presents new methods including machine learning and compressive sampling, which help to improve safety, reliability, and performance. Condition Monitoring with Vibration Signals: Compressive Sampling and Learning Algorithms for Rotating Machines starts by introducing readers to Vibration Analysis Techniques and Machine Condition Monitoring (MCM). It then offers readers sections covering: Rotating Machine Condition Monitoring using Learning Algorithms; Classification Algorithms; and New Fault Diagnosis Frameworks designed for MCM. Readers will leTable of ContentsPreface xvii About the Authors xxi List of Abbreviations xxiii Part I Introduction 1 1 Introduction to Machine Condition Monitoring 3 1.1 Background 3 1.2 Maintenance Approaches for Rotating Machines Failures 4 1.2.1 Corrective Maintenance 4 1.2.2 Preventive Maintenance 5 1.2.2.1 Time-Based Maintenance (TBM) 5 1.2.2.2 Condition-Based Maintenance (CBM) 5 1.3 Applications of MCM 5 1.3.1 Wind Turbines 5 1.3.2 Oil and Gas 6 1.3.3 Aerospace and Defence Industry 6 1.3.4 Automotive 7 1.3.5 Marine Engines 7 1.3.6 Locomotives 7 1.4 Condition Monitoring Techniques 7 1.4.1 Vibration Monitoring 7 1.4.2 Acoustic Emission 8 1.4.3 Fusion of Vibration and Acoustic 8 1.4.4 Motor Current Monitoring 8 1.4.5 Oil Analysis and Lubrication Monitoring 8 1.4.6 Thermography 9 1.4.7 Visual Inspection 9 1.4.8 Performance Monitoring 9 1.4.9 Trend Monitoring 10 1.5 Topic Overview and Scope of the Book 10 1.6 Summary 11 References 11 2 Principles of Rotating Machine Vibration Signals 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Machine Vibration Principles 17 2.3 Sources of Rotating Machines Vibration Signals 20 2.3.1 Rotor Mass Unbalance 21 2.3.2 Misalignment 21 2.3.3 Cracked Shafts 21 2.3.4 Rolling Element Bearings 23 2.3.5 Gears 25 2.4 Types of Vibration Signals 25 2.4.1 Stationary 26 2.4.2 Nonstationary 26 2.5 Vibration Signal Acquisition 26 2.5.1 Displacement Transducers 26 2.5.2 Velocity Transducers 26 2.5.3 Accelerometers 27 2.6 Advantages and Limitations of Vibration Signal Monitoring 27 2.7 Summary 28 References 28 Part II Vibration Signal Analysis Techniques 31 3 Time Domain Analysis 33 3.1 Introduction 33 3.1.1 Visual Inspection 33 3.1.2 Features-Based Inspection 35 3.2 Statistical Functions 35 3.2.1 Peak Amplitude 36 3.2.2 Mean Amplitude 36 3.2.3 Root Mean Square Amplitude 36 3.2.4 Peak-to-Peak Amplitude 36 3.2.5 Crest Factor (CF) 36 3.2.6 Variance and Standard Deviation 37 3.2.7 Standard Error 37 3.2.8 Zero Crossing 38 3.2.9 Wavelength 39 3.2.10 Willison Amplitude 39 3.2.11 Slope Sign Change 39 3.2.12 Impulse Factor 39 3.2.13 Margin Factor 40 3.2.14 Shape Factor 40 3.2.15 Clearance Factor 40 3.2.16 Skewness 40 3.2.17 Kurtosis 40 3.2.18 Higher-Order Cumulants (HOCs) 41 3.2.19 Histograms 42 3.2.20 Normal/Weibull Negative Log-Likelihood Value 42 3.2.21 Entropy 42 3.3 Time Synchronous Averaging 44 3.3.1 TSA Signals 44 3.3.2 Residual Signal (RES) 44 3.3.2.1 NA4 44 3.3.2.2 NA4* 45 3.3.3 Difference Signal (DIFS) 45 3.3.3.1 FM4 46 3.3.3.2 M6A 46 3.3.3.3 M8A 46 3.4 Time Series Regressive Models 46 3.4.1 AR Model 47 3.4.2 MA Model 48 3.4.3 ARMA Model 48 3.4.4 ARIMA Model 48 3.5 Filter-Based Methods 49 3.5.1 Demodulation 49 3.5.2 Prony Model 52 3.5.3 Adaptive Noise Cancellation (ANC) 53 3.6 Stochastic Parameter Techniques 54 3.7 Blind Source Separation (BSS) 54 3.8 Summary 55 References 56 4 Frequency Domain Analysis 63 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Fourier Analysis 64 4.2.1 Fourier Series 64 4.2.2 Discrete Fourier Transform 66 4.2.3 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 67 4.3 Envelope Analysis 71 4.4 Frequency Spectrum Statistical Features 73 4.4.1 Arithmetic Mean 73 4.4.2 Geometric Mean 73 4.4.3 Matched Filter RMS 73 4.4.4 The RMS of Spectral Difference 74 4.4.5 The Sum of Squares Spectral Difference 74 4.4.6 High-Order Spectra Techniques 74 4.5 Summary 75 References 76 5 Time-Frequency Domain Analysis 79 5.1 Introduction 79 5.2 Short-Time Fourier Transform (STFT) 79 5.3 Wavelet Analysis 82 5.3.1 Wavelet Transform (WT) 82 5.3.1.1 Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT) 83 5.3.1.2 Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT) 85 5.3.2 Wavelet Packet Transform (WPT) 89 5.4 Empirical Mode Decomposition (EMD) 91 5.5 Hilbert-Huang Transform (HHT) 94 5.6 Wigner-Ville Distribution 96 5.7 Local Mean Decomposition (LMD) 98 5.8 Kurtosis and Kurtograms 100 5.9 Summary 105 References 106 Part III Rotating Machine Condition Monitoring Using Machine Learning 115 6 Vibration-Based Condition Monitoring Using Machine Learning 117 6.1 Introduction 117 6.2 Overview of the Vibration-Based MCM Process 118 6.2.1 Fault-Detection and -Diagnosis Problem Framework 118 6.3 Learning from Vibration Data 122 6.3.1 Types of Learning 123 6.3.1.1 Batch vs. Online Learning 123 6.3.1.2 Instance-Based vs. Model-Based Learning 123 6.3.1.3 Supervised Learning vs. Unsupervised Learning 123 6.3.1.4 Semi-Supervised Learning 123 6.3.1.5 Reinforcement Learning 124 6.3.1.6 Transfer Learning 124 6.3.2 Main Challenges of Learning from Vibration Data 125 6.3.2.1 The Curse of Dimensionality 125 6.3.2.2 Irrelevant Features 126 6.3.2.3 Environment and Operating Conditions of a Rotating Machine 126 6.3.3 Preparing Vibration Data for Analysis 126 6.3.3.1 Normalisation 126 6.3.3.2 Dimensionality Reduction 127 6.4 Summary 128 References 128 7 Linear Subspace Learning 131 7.1 Introduction 131 7.2 Principal Component Analysis (PCA) 132 7.2.1 PCA Using Eigenvector Decomposition 132 7.2.2 PCA Using SVD 133 7.2.3 Application of PCA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 134 7.3 Independent Component Analysis (ICA) 137 7.3.1 Minimisation of Mutual Information 138 7.3.2 Maximisation of the Likelihood 138 7.3.3 Application of ICA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 139 7.4 Linear Discriminant Analysis (LDA) 141 7.4.1 Application of LDA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 142 7.5 Canonical Correlation Analysis (CCA) 143 7.6 Partial Least Squares (PLS) 145 7.7 Summary 146 References 147 8 Nonlinear Subspace Learning 153 8.1 Introduction 153 8.2 Kernel Principal Component Analysis (KPCA) 153 8.2.1 Application of KPCA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 156 8.3 Isometric Feature Mapping (ISOMAP) 156 8.3.1 Application of ISOMAP in Machine Fault Diagnosis 158 8.4 Diffusion Maps (DMs) and Diffusion Distances 159 8.4.1 Application of DMs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 160 8.5 Laplacian Eigenmap (LE) 161 8.5.1 Application of the LE in Machine Fault Diagnosis 161 8.6 Local Linear Embedding (LLE) 162 8.6.1 Application of LLE in Machine Fault Diagnosis 163 8.7 Hessian-Based LLE 163 8.7.1 Application of HLLE in Machine Fault Diagnosis 164 8.8 Local Tangent Space Alignment Analysis (LTSA) 165 8.8.1 Application of LTSA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 165 8.9 Maximum Variance Unfolding (MVU) 166 8.9.1 Application of MVU in Machine Fault Diagnosis 167 8.10 Stochastic Proximity Embedding (SPE) 168 8.10.1 Application of SPE in Machine Fault Diagnosis 168 8.11 Summary 169 References 170 9 Feature Selection 173 9.1 Introduction 173 9.2 Filter Model-Based Feature Selection 175 9.2.1 Fisher Score (FS) 176 9.2.2 Laplacian Score (LS) 177 9.2.3 Relief and Relief-F Algorithms 178 9.2.3.1 Relief Algorithm 178 9.2.3.2 Relief-F Algorithm 179 9.2.4 Pearson Correlation Coefficient (PCC) 180 9.2.5 Information Gain (IG) and Gain Ratio (GR) 180 9.2.6 Mutual Information (MI) 181 9.2.7 Chi-Squared (Chi-2) 181 9.2.8 Wilcoxon Ranking 181 9.2.9 Application of Feature Ranking in Machine Fault Diagnosis 182 9.3 Wrapper Model–Based Feature Subset Selection 185 9.3.1 Sequential Selection Algorithms 185 9.3.2 Heuristic-Based Selection Algorithms 185 9.3.2.1 Ant Colony Optimisation (ACO) 185 9.3.2.2 Genetic Algorithms (GAs) and Genetic Programming 187 9.3.2.3 Particle Swarm Optimisation (PSO) 188 9.3.3 Application of Wrapper Model–Based Feature Subset Selection in Machine Fault Diagnosis 189 9.4 Embedded Model–Based Feature Selection 192 9.5 Summary 193 References 194 Part IV Classification Algorithms 199 10 Decision Trees and Random Forests 201 10.1 Introduction 201 10.2 Decision Trees 202 10.2.1 Univariate Splitting Criteria 204 10.2.1.1 Gini Index 205 10.2.1.2 Information Gain 206 10.2.1.3 Distance Measure 207 10.2.1.4 Orthogonal Criterion (ORT) 207 10.2.2 Multivariate Splitting Criteria 207 10.2.3 Tree-Pruning Methods 208 10.2.3.1 Error-Complexity Pruning 208 10.2.3.2 Minimum-Error Pruning 209 10.2.3.3 Reduced-Error Pruning 209 10.2.3.4 Critical-Value Pruning 210 10.2.3.5 Pessimistic Pruning 210 10.2.3.6 Minimum Description Length (MDL) Pruning 210 10.2.4 Decision Tree Inducers 211 10.2.4.1 CART 211 10.2.4.2 ID3 211 10.2.4.3 C4.5 211 10.2.4.4 CHAID 212 10.3 Decision Forests 212 10.4 Application of Decision Trees/Forests in Machine Fault Diagnosis 213 10.5 Summary 217 References 217 11 Probabilistic Classification Methods 225 11.1 Introduction 225 11.2 Hidden Markov Model 225 11.2.1 Application of Hidden Markov Models in Machine Fault Diagnosis 228 11.3 Logistic Regression Model 230 11.3.1 Logistic Regression Regularisation 232 11.3.2 Multinomial Logistic Regression Model (MLR) 232 11.3.3 Application of Logistic Regression in Machine Fault Diagnosis 233 11.4 Summary 234 References 235 12 Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs) 239 12.1 Introduction 239 12.2 Neural Network Basic Principles 240 12.2.1 The Multilayer Perceptron 241 12.2.2 The Radial Basis Function Network 243 12.2.3 The Kohonen Network 244 12.3 Application of Artificial Neural Networks in Machine Fault Diagnosis 245 12.4 Summary 253 References 254 13 Support Vector Machines (SVMs) 259 13.1 Introduction 259 13.2 Multiclass SVMs 262 13.3 Selection of Kernel Parameters 263 13.4 Application of SVMs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 263 13.5 Summary 274 References 274 14 Deep Learning 279 14.1 Introduction 279 14.2 Autoencoders 280 14.3 Convolutional Neural Networks (CNNs) 283 14.4 Deep Belief Networks (DBNs) 284 14.5 Recurrent Neural Networks (RNNs) 285 14.6 Overview of Deep Learning in MCM 286 14.6.1 Application of AE-based DNNs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 286 14.6.2 Application of CNNs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 292 14.6.3 Application of DBNs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 296 14.6.4 Application of RNNs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 298 14.7 Summary 299 References 301 15 Classification Algorithm Validation 307 15.1 Introduction 307 15.2 The Hold-Out Technique 308 15.2.1 Three-Way Data Split 309 15.3 Random Subsampling 309 15.4 K-Fold Cross-Validation 310 15.5 Leave-One-Out Cross-Validation 311 15.6 Bootstrapping 311 15.7 Overall Classification Accuracy 312 15.8 Confusion Matrix 313 15.9 Recall and Precision 314 15.10 ROC Graphs 315 15.11 Summary 317 References 318 Part V New Fault Diagnosis Frameworks Designed for MCM 321 16 Compressive Sampling and Subspace Learning (CS-SL) 323 16.1 Introduction 323 16.2 Compressive Sampling for Vibration-Based MCM 325 16.2.1 Compressive Sampling Basics 325 16.2.2 CS for Sparse Frequency Representation 328 16.2.3 CS for Sparse Time-Frequency Representation 329 16.3 Overview of CS in Machine Condition Monitoring 330 16.3.1 Compressed Sensed Data Followed by Complete Data Construction 330 16.3.2 Compressed Sensed Data Followed by Incomplete Data Construction 331 16.3.3 Compressed Sensed Data as the Input of a Classifier 332 16.3.4 Compressed Sensed Data Followed by Feature Learning 333 16.4 Compressive Sampling and Feature Ranking (CS-FR) 333 16.4.1 Implementations 334 16.4.1.1 CS-LS 336 16.4.1.2 CS-FS 336 16.4.1.3 CS-Relief-F 337 16.4.1.4 CS-PCC 338 16.4.1.5 CS-Chi-2 338 16.5 CS and Linear Subspace Learning-Based Framework for Fault Diagnosis 339 16.5.1 Implementations 339 16.5.1.1 CS-PCA 339 16.5.1.2 CS-LDA 340 16.5.1.3 CS-CPDC 341 16.6 CS and Nonlinear Subspace Learning-Based Framework for Fault Diagnosis 343 16.6.1 Implementations 344 16.6.1.1 CS-KPCA 344 16.6.1.2 CS-KLDA 345 16.6.1.3 CS-CMDS 346 16.6.1.4 CS-SPE 346 16.7 Applications 348 16.7.1 Case Study 1 348 16.7.1.1 The Combination of MMV-CS and Several Feature-Ranking Techniques 350 16.7.1.2 The Combination of MMV-CS and Several Linear and Nonlinear Subspace Learning Techniques 352 16.7.2 Case Study 2 354 16.7.2.1 The Combination of MMV-CS and Several Feature-Ranking Techniques 354 16.7.2.2 The Combination of MMV-CS and Several Linear and Nonlinear Subspace Learning Techniques 355 16.8 Discussion 355 References 357 17 Compressive Sampling and Deep Neural Network (CS-DNN) 361 17.1 Introduction 361 17.2 Related Work 361 17.3 CS-SAE-DNN 362 17.3.1 Compressed Measurements Generation 362 17.3.2 CS Model Testing Using the Flip Test 363 17.3.3 DNN-Based Unsupervised Sparse Overcomplete Feature Learning 363 17.3.4 Supervised Fine Tuning 367 17.4 Applications 367 17.4.1 Case Study 1 367 17.4.2 Case Study 2 372 17.5 Discussion 375 References 375 18 Conclusion 379 18.1 Introduction 379 18.2 Summary and Conclusion 380 Appendix Machinery Vibration Data Resources and Analysis Algorithms 389 References 394 Index 395

Read more less

Book SynopsisA text to the advances and development of novel technologies in the production of high-value products from economically viable raw materials Lignocellulosic Biorefining Technologiesis an essential guide to the most recent advances and developments of novel technologies in the production of various high-value products from economically viable raw materials. Written by a team of experts on the topic, the book covers important topics specifically on production of economical and sustainable products such as various biofuels, organic acids, enzymes, biopigments, biosurfactants, etc. The book highlights the important aspects of lignocellulosic biorefining including structure, function, and chemical composition of the plant cell wall and reviews the details about the various components present in the lignocellulosic biomass and their characterizations. The authors explore the various approaches available for processing lignocellulosic biomass into second generation sugars and focus on the Table of ContentsList of Contributors vii 1 Biorefining of Lignocellulose into Valuable Products 1Avinash P. Ingle, Anuj Kumar Chandel, and Silvio Silvério da Silva 2 Bulk and Specialty Chemicals from Plant Cell Wall Chemistry 7Luciana Ferrand, Florencia Vasco, and Juliana Gamboa‐Santos 3 Characterization of Lignocellulosic Biomass and Processing for Second-Generation Sugars Production 29Guadalupe Bustos Vázquez, Adrián Gonzalez Leos, Luis V. Rodríguez-Duran, and Rodolfo Torres de Los Santos 4 Production of Biohydrogen from Lignocellulosic Feedstocks 47Sheetal Radhakrishnan, Shiv Prasad, Sandeep Kumar, and Dhanya Subramanian 5 Recent Advances in the Production of Biodiesel Using Lignocellulosic Biomass 69Rahul Bhagat, Harris Panakkal, Indarchand Gupta, and Avinash P. Ingle 6 Bioelectricity Production from Lignocellulosic Biomass 87Samar Das, Shayaram Basumatary, Pankaj Kalita, Vinayak Kulkarni, Pranab Goswami, Akhil Garg, and Xiongbin Peng 7 Biopolymers from Lignocellulosic Biomass: Feedstocks, Production Processes, and Applications 125Grazielle Machado, Fernando Santos, Rogério Lourega, Jaqueline Mattia, Douglas Faria, Paulo Eichler, and Angenor Auler 8 Sustainable Production of Biosurfactants and Their Applications 159Paulo Ricardo Franco Marcelino, Fernanda Gonçalves, Itzcóatl Muñoz Jimenez, Bruna Curry Carneiro, Bruno Bosquiroli Santos, and Silvio Silvério da Silva 9 Lignocellulose as a Renewable Carbon Source for Microbial Synthesis of Different Enzymes 185Peyman Abdeshahian, Abudukeremu Kadier , Pankaj Kumar Rai, and Silvio Silvério da Silva 10 Production of Organic Acids Via Fermentation of Sugars Generated from Lignocellulosic Biomass 203Lourdes Zumalacárregui de Cárdenas and Beatriz Zumalacárregui de Cárdenas 11 Valorization of Lignin Into Value-Added Chemicals and Materials 247Ruly Teran Hilares, Lucas Ramos, Muhammad Ajaz Ahmed, Avinash P. Ingle, Anuj Kumar Chandel, Silvio Silvério da Silva, Jeon Woon Choi, and Julio Cesar dos Santos 12 Conversion of Lignocellulosic Biomass Through Pyrolysis to Promote a Sustainable Value Chain for Brazilian Agribusiness 265Genyr Kappler, Débora Machado de Souza, Carlos Alberto Mendes Moraes, Regina Célia Espinosa Modolo, Feliciane Andrade Brehm, Paulo Roberto Wander, and Luís António da Cruz Tarelho 13 Integrated Process of Biomass Thermochemical Conversion to Obtain Pyrolytic Sugars for Biofuels and Bioproducts 285Victor Haber Perez, Nathalia Ribeiro Ferreira da Silva, Euripedes Garcia Silveira Junior, Diego Cunha Rocha, Oselys Rodriguez Justo, Geraldo Ferreira David, Diana Catalina Cubides Roman, Valdemar Lacerda, Jr, and Manuel Garcia-Perez 14 Life Cycle Analysis of Lignocellulosic Conversion into Fuels, Energy, and Chemicals 313Mahdi Mazuchi 15 Technoeconomic Analysis of Biorefinery Processes for Biofuel and Other Important Products 333Harikishan R. Ellamla and Srinivas Appari Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a collection of works produced by COST Action IC1301 with the goal of achieving significant advances in the field of wireless power transmission This bookconstitutes together information from COST Action IC1301, a group of academic and industry experts seeking to align research efforts in the field of wireless power transmission (WPT). It begins with a discussion of backscatter as a solution for Internet of Things (IoT) devices and goes on to describe ambient backscattering sensors that use FM broadcasting for low cost and low power wireless applications. The book also explores localization of passive RFID tags and augmented tags using nonlinearities of RFID chips. It concludes with a review of methods of electromagnetic characterization of textile materials for the development of wearable antennas. Wireless Power Transmission for Sustainable Electronics: COST WiPE - IC1301covers textile-supported wireless energy transfer, and reviews methods forTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Contributors xxxiii Preface xxxvii Acknowledgments xxxix 1 Textile-Supported Wireless Energy Transfer 1Miroslav Cupal, Jaroslav Láčík, Zbynĕk Raida, Jan Špůrek, and Jan Vélim 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Textile-Coated Single-Wire Transmission Line 3 1.3 Textile-Integrated Components 6 1.3.1 Fabrication of the Top Conductive Layer and the Bottom One 8 1.3.2 Fabrication of Conductive Vias of Side Walls 8 1.4 In-Vehicle Wireless Energy Transfer 15 1.5 Summary 24 References 25 2 A Review of Methods for the Electromagnetic Characterization of Textile Materials for the Development of Wearable Antennas 27Caroline Loss, Ricardo Gonçalves, Pedro Pinho, and Rita Salvado 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Electromagnetic Properties of Materials 29 2.2.1 Conductive Fabrics 29 2.2.2 Dielectric Fabrics 31 2.3 Dielectric Characterization Methods Applied to Textile Materials and Leather: A Survey 32 2.3.1 Resonant Methods 33 2.3.1.1 Cavity Perturbation Methods 33 2.3.1.2 Microstrip Resonator Patch Method 35 2.3.1.3 Microstrip Resonator Ring Method 35 2.3.1.4 Microstrip Patch Sensor 35 2.3.1.5 Agilent 85070E Dielectric Measurement Probe Kit 39 2.3.1.6 Summary of the Characterization of Textile Materials by Resonant Methods 40 2.3.2 Nonresonant Methods 40 2.3.2.1 Parallel Plate Method 40 2.3.2.2 Free Space Methods 41 2.3.2.3 Planar Transmission Lines Methods 44 2.3.2.4 Summary of the Characterization of Textile Materials by Nonresonant Methods 46 2.4 Some Factors that Affect the Measurement of Dielectric Properties of Textiles 46 2.4.1 Influence of the Moisture Content 46 2.4.2 Influence of the Material Anisotropy 47 2.4.3 Influence of the Bulk Porosity 47 2.4.4 Influence of the Surface Features 48 2.5 Conclusions 48 Acknowledgments 50 References 50 3 Smart Beamforming Techniques for “On Demand” WPT 57Diego Masotti, Mazen Shanawani, and Alessandra Costanzo 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Basics of Time-modulated Arrays 61 3.3 Nonlinear/Full-Wave Co-simulation of TMAS 63 3.4 Two-Step Agile WPT Strategy 64 3.4.1 Localization Step 65 3.4.2 Power Transfer Step 66 3.5 Simulation Results 68 3.5.1 Localization Step 68 3.5.2 Power Transfer Step 69 3.6 Measured Results 73 3.7 TMA Architecture for Fundamental Pattern Steering 76 3.8 Conclusion 81 References 82 4 Backscatter a Solution for IoT Devices 85Daniel Belo, Ricardo Correia, Marina Jordao, Pedro Pinho, and Nuno B. Carvalho 4.1 Backscatter Basics 85 4.1.1 Different Backscatter Sensors Development 87 4.1.2 Backscatter with WPT Capabilities 87 4.1.3 High-Order Backscatter Modulation 88 4.1.4 Modulated High-Bandwidth Backscatter with WPT Capabilities 89 4.2 An IoT-Complete Sensor with Backscatter Capabilities 90 4.2.1 System Description 91 4.2.2 Digital Component 92 4.2.3 Measurements 94 4.3 The Power Availability for These Sensors 97 4.3.1 Electronically Steerable Phased Array for Wireless Power Transfer Applications 98 4.3.2 Wireless Energy Receiving Device 101 4.3.3 Experimental Results 104 4.4 Characterization of High-Order Modulation Backscatter Systems 107 4.4.1 Characterization System 107 4.4.2 Measurements 110 References 114 5 Ambient FM Backscattering Low-Cost and Low-Power Wireless RFID Applications 117Spyridon N. Daskalakis, Ricardo Correia, John Kimionis, George Goussetis, Manos M. Tentzeris, Nuno B. Carvalho, and Apostolos Georgiadis 5.1 Introduction 117 5.2 Ambient Backscattering 120 5.2.1 Ambient FM Backscattering 122 5.2.2 Binary Modulation Tag 124 5.2.3 4-PAM Tag 125 5.2.4 Binary Telecommunication Protocol 127 5.2.5 4-PAM Telecommunication Protocol 129 5.2.6 Receiver 129 5.2.7 Software Binary Receiver 130 5.2.8 Software 4-PAM Receiver 132 5.2.9 Experimental and Measurement Results 132 5.3 Conclusions 138 Acknowledgments 139 References 139 6 Backscatter RFID Sensor System for Remote Health Monitoring 145Jasmin Grosinger 6.1 Introduction 145 6.2 On-Body System 146 6.2.1 Body Model 146 6.2.2 Antennas 149 6.2.2.1 Monopole Antennas 149 6.2.2.2 Patch Antennas 151 6.3 Radio Channel 152 6.3.1 Measurement Setup 153 6.3.2 Comparison of Simulations and Measurements 154 6.3.3 Measurement Results 156 6.3.3.1 Antenna Matching 156 6.3.3.2 Channel Gain 157 6.4 System Performance 159 6.4.1 Forward Link 162 6.4.1.1 System Example 165 6.4.2 Backward Link 166 6.4.2.1 System Example 166 6.5 Conclusions 168 Acknowledgments 169 References 170 7 Robotics Meets RFID for Simultaneous Localization (of Robots and Objects) and Mapping (SLAM) – A Joined Problem 175Antonis G. Dimitriou, Stavroula Siachalou, Emmanouil Tsardoulias, and Loukas Petrou 7.1 Scope 175 7.2 Introduction 176 7.3 Localization of RFID Tags – Prior Art 182 7.3.1 Multipath in Passive RFID Systems 184 7.3.2 Representative Localization Techniques 185 7.3.2.1 Angle of Arrival 185 7.3.2.2 Received Signal Strength – Bayes’ Theorem and Conditional Probability 187 7.3.2.3 Fingerprinting – “Landmarc” 189 7.3.2.4 Holographic Localization 190 7.3.2.5 Other Methods 192 7.3.3 Analysis of Prior Art 194 7.4 A Brief Introduction in SLAM/Localization Techniques 195 7.4.1 Introduction to Localization, Mapping, and SLAM 196 7.4.2 Mathematical Formulation of SLAM 197 7.4.3 Probabilistically Solving SLAM 198 7.4.4 Space Representation in SLAM 201 7.4.5 SLAM Algorithm Selection 202 7.4.5.1 What are the Robot’s Sensors? 202 7.4.5.2 Which is the Environmental Morphology? 203 7.4.5.3 How Will the Generated Map Be Utilized? 203 7.4.6 SLAM/Localization and RFID Localization Issues 204 7.5 Prototype – Experimental Results 206 7.5.1 Equipment 206 7.5.2 Methodology 208 7.5.2.1 Phase 1 208 7.5.2.2 Phase 2 209 7.5.3 Results 212 7.6 Discussion 216 Acknowledgments 218 References 218 8 From Identification to Sensing: Augmented RFID Tags 223Konstantinos Zannas, Hatem El Matbouly, Yvan Duroc, and Smail Tedjini 8.1 Introduction 223 8.2 Generic RFID Communication Chain 226 8.2.1 RFID Sensor Tag 226 8.2.2 RFID Data Capture Level 228 8.2.3 RFID Tag Process Level 229 8.2.4 RFID Communication Channel 231 8.2.5 RFID Reader Process Level and RFID Reader 232 8.3 RFID Sensor Tags: Examples from Literature or Commercially Available 233 8.3.1 Examples from Literature 234 8.3.2 Examples Commercially Available 239 8.4 Comparison of Different Types of RFID Temperature Sensors 240 8.5 Conclusion 242 References 243 9 Autonomous System of Wireless Power Distribution for Static and Moving Nodes of Wireless Sensor Networks 247Przemyslaw Kant, Karol Dobrzyniewicz, and Jerzy Julian Michalski 9.1 Introduction 247 9.2 Data Routing in WSN Based on Multiple Spanning Trees Concept 248 9.2.1 Multiple Spanning Trees Routing Protocol 249 9.2.2 Software WSN Simulator 252 9.2.3 Experimental Verification 253 9.3 WPT System for 2D Distributed WSN 256 9.3.1 System Concept 257 9.3.2 Physical Realization of 2D WPT System 260 9.3.3 Experimental Verification of the 2DWPT System 264 9.3.4 Tests of 2D WPT System with Implemented Switching Algorithm 266 9.4 WPT System for 3D Distributed WSN 269 9.4.1 Design of Components of the 3D WPT System 272 9.5 Locating System and Electromagnetic Power Supply for WSN in 3D Space 275 9.5.1 Tracking Subsystem 276 9.5.2 Data Exchange System 278 9.5.3 Angular Position Estimation of Moving WSN Node 279 9.5.4 Experimental Verification 281 9.5.5 Adaptation of the System to WPT for WSN 282 9.5.5.1 Tracking System 282 9.5.5.2 WSN Node 282 9.6 Summary 283 References 284 10 Smartphone Reception of Microwatt, Meter to Kilometer Range Backscatter Resistive/Capacitive Sensors with Ambient FM Remodulation and Selection Diversity 287Georgios Vougioukas and Aggelos Bletsas 10.1 Introduction 287 10.2 Operating Principle 291 10.2.1 Backscatter Communication 291 10.2.2 FM Remodulation 292 10.3 Impact of Noise 293 10.3.1 High SNR Case 294 10.3.2 Low SNR Case 301 10.4 Occupied Bandwidth 302 10.5 Ambient Selection Diversity 303 10.6 Analog Tag Implementation 304 10.6.1 Sensing Capacitor and Control Circuit 305 10.6.1.1 Generating 𝜇(t) – First Modulation Level 305 10.6.1.2 Generating xFM(t) – Second Modulation Level 306 10.6.2 RF-Switch 306 10.6.3 Power Consumption and Supply 306 10.6.3.1 Batteryless Tag with Photodiode 307 10.6.3.2 Batteryless Tag with Solar Panel 307 10.6.3.3 Batteryless Tag with Lemons 307 10.6.4 Receiver 308 10.6.4.1 Smartphone 308 10.6.4.2 Computer 309 10.7 Performance Characterization 309 10.7.1 Simulation Results 309 10.7.2 Tag Indoor and Outdoor Performance 312 10.8 Conclusions 313 10.9 Bandwidth of J0 (2𝜌 sin (𝜔sens/2 t)) 314 10.10 Expectation of the Absolute Value of a Gaussian R.V 316 10.11 Probability of Outage Under Ambient Selection Diversity 316 Acknowledgment 318 References 318 11 Design of an ULP-ULV RF-Powered CMOS Front-End for Low-Rate Autonomous Sensors 323Hugo García-Vázquez, Alexandre Quenon, Grigory Popov, and Fortunato Carlos Dualibe 11.1 Introduction 323 11.2 Characterization of the Technology 326 11.2.1 gm/ID Curves 326 11.2.2 COX and μCOX 329 11.2.3 Early Voltage (VA) 331 11.3 Ultra-Low Power and Ultra-Low Voltage RF-Powered Transceiver for Autonomous Sensors 332 11.3.1 Power Management (PM) and Receiver (RX) 332 11.3.1.1 Rectifier 333 11.3.1.2 Voltage Reference (VREF) Circuit 335 11.3.1.3 Comparator for Power Management (COMP1) 335 11.3.1.4 Current Reference Circuit (IREF) 336 11.3.1.5 Comparator for the Demodulation (COMP2) 336 11.3.2 Control Unit (CU) 336 11.3.3 Transmitter (TX) 337 11.3.3.1 Voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) 337 11.3.3.2 Power amplifier (PA) with built-in driver 340 11.4 Experimental Results 341 11.5 Conclusion 343 Acknowledgments 343 References 344 12 Rectenna Optimization Guidelines for Ambient Electromagnetic Energy Harvesting 347Erika Vandelle, Simon Hemour, Tan-Phu Vuong, Gustavo Ardila, and Ke Wu 12.1 Introduction 347 12.2 Rectennas Under Low Input Powers 348 12.2.1 Rectifier Optimization 350 12.2.2 Low Power Matching Network Optimization 353 12.2.2.1 The Bode-Fano Criterion 353 12.2.2.2 Matching Network Efficiency 354 12.2.3 Low-Power Antenna Optimization 356 12.2.3.1 Enhancement of the Output DC Power 357 12.2.3.2 Rectenna Array 358 12.2.3.3 Antenna Array with BFN 358 12.2.3.4 Optimization of the Antenna Efficiency 361 12.3 The Chance of Collecting Ambient Electromagnetic Energy with a Specific Antenna 361 12.3.1 Frequency Spectrum 362 12.3.2 Polarization 362 12.3.3 Spatial Coverage 365 12.3.4 Harvesting Capability 366 12.4 Conclusion 367 References 368 Index 375

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis timely book provides an overview of technologies for Public Safety Networks (PSNs). Including real-life examples of network application and services, it introduces readers to the many public safety network technologies and covers the historical developments as well as emerging trends in PSNs such as today's 4G and tomorrow's 5G cellular network related solutions. Public Safety Networks from LTE to 5G explores the gradual changes and transformation in the PSNs from the traditional approaches in communications, and examines the new technologies that have permeated this realm, as well as their advantages. It gives readers a look at the challenges public safety networks face by developing solutions for data rates such as introducing broadband data services into safer communication. Topics covered include: TETRA and TETRAPOL; Digital Mobile Radio (DMR), Next-Generation Digital Narrowband (NXDN), Digital Private Mobile Radio (dPMR); and Professional Digital Trunking (PDT). The book alTable of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgment xix 1 Public Safety Networks from TETRA to Commercial Cellular Networks 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Evaluation of TETRA and TETRAPOL 3 1.3 Understanding TETRA Modes of Operation 4 1.3.1 TETRA Security 4 1.3.2 Evaluating the Challenge of Data Transmission and Possible Solutions on TETRA Networks 5 1.3.3 Comparing Public Safety Networks to the Commercial Cellular Networks 6 1.3.3.1 Services 6 1.3.3.2 Networks 6 1.3.4 How to Overcome These Differences 7 1.3.4.1 Limitations of TETRA 7 1.3.4.2 Need for Broadband 8 1.4 Unifying the Two Worlds of Public Safety Networks and Commercial Networks 8 1.4.1 User Requirements 8 1.4.2 Public Safety Network Migration 9 1.4.3 Deployment Models 9 1.5 The Transition from TETRA to LTE and the Current Initiatives 10 1.5.1 Network Softwarization 10 1.5.2 LTE Technology for Public Safety Communications 10 1.5.3 LTE as a Public Safety Mobile Broadband Standard 11 1.5.4 Security Enhancements for Public Safety LTE Features 11 1.6 Conclusion 12 References 12 2 Public Safety Networks Evolution Toward Broadband and Interoperability 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.1.1 Communication Technology 15 2.1.2 Wireless Communication Systems 16 2.1.3 Government Involvement 17 2.2 Evolution to Broadband Systems 18 2.2.1 Determining Factors 19 2.2.2 Evolution Process 21 2.2.3 Broadband System Architecture 22 2.2.4 Advantages of Broadband Systems 25 2.3 Interoperability 28 2.3.1 Developing an Interoperability Public Safety System 28 2.3.2 Platform and Technology 29 2.3.3 Benefits of Evolution 32 2.4 Conclusion 33 2.5 Recommendations 34 References 35 3 Public Safety Communication Evolution 37 3.1 Introduction 37 3.1.1 Public Safety Network and Emergency Communication Networks 37 3.2 Public Safety Standardization 39 3.3 Evolution of Public Safety Communication 39 3.3.1 Mission-Critical Voice 40 3.3.2 Mission-Critical Data 41 3.3.3 Requirements for Evolution in Communications 42 3.4 Public Safety Networks 43 3.4.1 Land Mobile Radio Systems (LMRS) 44 3.4.1.1 SAFECOM Interoperability Continuum 46 3.4.1.2 Wireless Broadband 46 3.4.1.3 Wi-Fi in Ambulances 47 3.4.1.4 Satellite Communications in EMS and Public Protection and Disaster Relief PPDR 47 3.4.1.5 Technology in Patrol Communications 48 3.4.1.6 Video Cameras 48 3.4.2 Drivers of the Broadband Evolution 49 3.5 4G and 4G LTE 50 3.5.1 Benefits of 4G LTE in Public Safety Communication 51 3.6 Fifth Generation (5G) 52 3.6.1 Performance Targets and Benefits of 5G 55 3.6.1.1 Security and Reliability 55 3.6.1.2 Traffic Prioritization and Network Slicing 55 3.6.1.3 Facial Recognition and License Plate Scanning in 5G 55 3.6.1.4 Support for Sensor Proliferation and IoT 56 3.6.1.5 Reduction of Trips Back to the Station 56 3.7 Applying 4G and 5G Networks in Public Safety 57 3.7.1 The Right Time to Implement 3GPP in Public Safety 59 3.7.1.1 3GPP 59 3.7.2 4G LTE as a Basis for Public Safety Communication Implementation 61 3.7.3 Implementation of 5G in Public Safety 61 3.8 Conclusion 61 References 62 4 Keys to Building a Reliable Public Safety Communications Network 67 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Supporting the Law Enforcement Elements of Communication 67 4.3 Components of Efficient Public Safety Communication Networks 68 4.4 Networks Go Commercial 68 4.5 Viable Business Prospects 69 4.5.1 The Core Network 69 4.5.2 The Radio Network 69 4.6 The Industry Supports the Involvement of the Mobile Network Operators 70 4.7 Policies for Public Safety Use of Commercial Wireless Networks 71 4.8 Public Safety Networks Coverage: Availability and Reliability Even During Outages 72 4.9 FirstNet Interoperability 72 4.10 Solutions for Enhancing Availability and Reliability Even During Outages 73 4.11 National Public Safety Broadband Network (NPSBN) 73 4.12 Important Objectives of NPSBN 74 4.13 The Future of FirstNet: Connecting Networks Together 75 4.14 High Capacity Information Delivery 76 4.15 Qualities that Facilitate Efficient High Capacity Information Handling 77 4.15.1 FirstNet Has a Trustworthy Security System 77 4.15.2 Concentrated Network Performance 77 4.15.3 Simple and Scalable 77 4.15.4 High Level of Vulnerability Safeguards 77 4.16 FirstNet User Equipment 77 4.17 Core Network 78 4.18 Illustration: Layers of the LTE Network 78 4.18.1 Transport Backhaul 79 4.18.2 The Radio Access Networks 79 4.18.3 Public Safety Devices 79 References 80 5 Higher Generation of Mobile Communications and Public Safety 81 5.1 Introduction 81 5.2 Review of Existing Public Safety Networks 81 5.2.1 What are LMR Systems? 82 5.2.2 Services Offered by LMR Systems 83 5.2.3 Adoption of Advanced Technologies to Supplement LMR 83 5.2.4 Trunked Digital Network 84 5.2.4.1 TETRAPOL Communication System 84 5.2.4.2 The TETRA Communication System 85 5.3 Is 4G LTE Forming a Good Enough Basis for Public Safety Implementations? 85 5.3.1 Multi-Path Approach and the Convergence of Mission-Critical Communication 85 5.3.2 Technical Aspects of LTE 86 5.4 Is It Better to Wait for 5G Before Starting Public Safety Implementations? 87 5.5 Will 5G Offer a Better Service than 4G for Public Safety? 88 5.5.1 The Internet of Things and 5G 88 5.5.2 5G Technical Aspects 89 5.5.3 5G Network Costs 90 5.5.4 Key Corner Cases for 5G 90 5.5.5 Localization in 5G Networks 91 5.6 What is the Linkage Between 4G–5G Evolution and the Spectrum for Public Safety? 91 5.6.1 The Linkage Between 4G-5G Evolutions 91 5.6.2 Spectrum for Public Safety 92 5.7 Conclusion 94 References 95 6 Roadmap Toward a Network Infrastructure for Public Safety and Security 97 6.1 Introduction 97 6.2 Evolution Toward Broadband 97 6.2.1 Existing Situation 98 6.3 Requirements for Public Safety Networks 99 6.3.1 Network Requirements 100 6.3.2 Priority Control 100 6.4 Public Safety Standardization 100 6.5 Flawless Mobile Broadband for Public Safety and Security 101 6.6 Applications in Different Scenarios 102 6.7 Public Safety Systems and Architectures 103 6.7.1 Airwave 103 6.7.2 LMR 104 6.7.3 TETRA Security Analysis 105 6.7.4 TETRA Services System 106 6.7.5 The Architecture of TETRA 106 6.7.5.1 The Interfaces of TETRA Network 106 6.7.6 TETRA Network Components 106 6.7.6.1 The Mobile Station 108 6.7.6.2 TETRA Line Station 108 6.7.6.3 The Switching Management Infrastructure 108 6.7.6.4 Network Management Unit 108 6.7.6.5 The Gateways 108 6.7.6.6 How the TETRA System Operates 108 6.7.7 TETRA Mobility Management 109 6.7.8 The Security of TETRA Networks 109 6.7.8.1 Confidentiality 109 6.7.8.2 Integrity 109 6.7.8.3 Reliability 109 6.7.8.4 Non-repudiation 109 6.7.8.5 Authentication 110 6.7.9 The Process of Authentication in TETRA 110 6.7.10 The Authentication Key 110 6.7.11 Symmetric Key Algorithms 110 6.7.12 The Process of Authentication Key Generation 111 6.7.12.1 ESN (In United Kingdom) 111 6.8 Emergency Services Network (ESN) in the United Kingdom 112 6.8.1 Overview of the ESN 112 6.8.2 The Deliverables of ESN 112 6.8.3 The Main Deliverables of ESN 112 6.9 SafeNet in South Korea 113 6.10 FirstNet (in USA) 115 6.10.1 The Benefits of FirstNet 117 6.10.2 Public Safety Core of SafetyNet 117 6.10.2.1 End-to-End Encryption 117 6.10.3 Round the Clock Security Surveillance 118 6.10.4 User Authentication 118 6.10.5 Mission Critical Functionalities 118 6.10.5.1 Tactical LTE Coverage 118 6.11 Canadian Interoperability Technology Interest Group (CITIG) 118 6.12 Centre for Disaster Management and Public Safety (CDMPS) at the University of Melbourne 119 6.13 European Emergency Number Association (EENA) 120 6.13.1 European Standardization Organization (ESO) 121 6.13.2 Public Safety Communications – Europe (PSCE) 121 6.13.3 The Critical Communications Association (TCCA) 121 6.14 Public Safety Network from LTE to 5G 122 6.15 Convergence Solution for LTE and TETRA for Angola’s National Communications Network 124 6.15.1 The Objectives of the Project 124 6.15.2 Advantages of the LTE-TETRA Solutions 124 6.15.3 Illustration: Before Integration and After Integration 125 6.15.4 Overview of LTE Technology 125 6.16 5GWireless Network and Public Safety Perspective 126 6.16.1 Waiting for 5G for Public Safety Implementation 127 6.17 The Linkage Between 4G and 5G Evolution 128 6.17.1 Connecting 4G and 5G Solutions for Public Safety 128 6.17.2 Deploying LTE Public Safety Networks 129 6.18 Conclusion 129 References 130 7 Bringing Public Safety Communications into the 21st Century 133 7.1 Emerging Technologies with Life-Saving Potential 133 7.1.1 Artificial Intelligence 134 7.1.2 The Internet of Things (IoT) 136 7.1.3 Blockchain 138 References 139 8 4G LTE: The Future of Mobile Wireless Telecommunication Systems for Public Safety Networks 141 8.1 Introduction 141 8.2 Network Architecture 145 8.3 User Equipment 145 8.4 eNodeB 145 8.5 Radio Access Network 146 8.5.1 Gateways and Mobility Management Entities 146 8.6 Evolved Packet Core (EPC) 147 8.7 The Innovative Technologies 148 8.8 PS-LTE and Public Safety 151 8.9 PS-LTE 152 8.10 Nationwide Public Safety Communication Systems 152 8.11 Advantages of LTE Technology 152 8.12 Driving Trends in Public Safety Communications 153 8.13 Benefits of PS-LTE 155 8.14 Benefits of Converged Networking in Public Safety 157 8.15 Mobilizing Law Enforcement 157 References 159 9 4G and 5G for PS: Technology Options, Issues, and Challenges 161 9.1 Introduction 161 9.2 4G LTE and Public Safety Implementation 162 9.2.1 Reliability 162 9.2.2 Cost Effectiveness 163 9.2.3 Real-Time Communication 164 9.2.4 Remote Deployment and Configuration 164 9.2.5 Flexibility 164 9.3 Starting Public Safety Implementation Versus Waiting for 5G 165 9.4 5GVersus 4G Public Safety Services 166 9.4.1 Video Surveillance 167 9.4.2 Computer-Driven Augmented Reality (AR) Helmet 167 9.5 How 5GWill Shape Emergency Services 167 9.6 4G LTE Defined Public Safety Content in 5G 168 9.7 The Linkage Between 4G–5G Evolution and the Spectrum for Public Safety 168 9.8 Conclusion 168 References 168 10 Fifth Generation (5G) Cellular Technology 171 10.1 Introduction 171 10.2 Background Information on Cellular Network Generations 172 10.2.1 Evolution of Mobile Technologies 172 10.2.1.1 First Generation (1G) 172 10.2.1.2 Second Generation (2G) Mobile Network 172 10.2.1.3 Third Generation (3G) Mobile Network 172 10.2.1.4 Fourth Generation (4G) Mobile Network 173 10.2.1.5 Fifth Generation (5G) 173 10.3 Fifth Generation (5G) and the Network of Tomorrow 174 10.3.1 5G Network Architecture 176 10.3.2 Wireless Communication Technologies for 5G 177 10.3.2.1 Massive MIMO 177 10.3.2.2 Spatial Modulation 179 10.3.2.3 Machine to Machine Communication (M2M) 179 10.3.2.4 Visible Light Communication (VLC) 180 10.3.2.5 Green Communications 180 10.3.3 5G System Environment 180 10.3.4 Devices Used in 5G Technology 181 10.3.5 Market Standardization and Adoption of 5G Technology 181 10.3.6 Security Standardization of Cloud Applications 183 10.3.7 The Global ICT Standardization Forum for India (GISFI) 184 10.3.8 Energy Efficiency Enhancements 184 10.3.9 Virtualization in the 5G Cellular Network 185 10.3.10 Key Issues in the Development Process 185 10.3.10.1 Challenges of Heterogeneous Networks 186 10.3.10.2 Challenges Caused by Massive MIMO Technology 186 10.3.10.3 Big Data Problem 186 10.3.10.4 Shared Spectrum 186 10.4 Conclusion 187 References 187 11 Issues and Challenges of 4G and 5G for PS 189 11.1 Introduction 189 11.2 4G and 5GWireless Connections 190 11.3 Public Safety for 5G and 4G Networks 191 11.4 Issues and Challenges Regarding 5G and 4G Cellular Connections 192 11.5 Threats Against Privacy 192 11.6 Threats Against Integrity 192 11.7 Threats Against Availability 193 11.8 Attacks Against Authentication 193 11.9 Various Countermeasures to 4G and 5G Public Safety Threats 194 References 194 12 Wireless Mesh Networking: A Key Solution for Rural and Public Safety Applications 195 12.1 Introduction 195 12.2 Wireless Mesh Networks 196 12.3 WMN Challenges 197 12.4 WMNs for Disaster Recovery and Emergency Services 198 12.5 Reliability of Wireless Mesh Networks 199 12.5.1 Self-configuration of Wireless Mesh Networks 199 12.5.2 Fast Deployment and Low Installation Costs of Wireless Mesh Networks 199 12.5.3 Voice Support of Wireless Mesh Networks 200 12.6 Video/Image Support of Wireless Mesh Networks for Emergency Situations and Public Safety 200 12.6.1 Video/Image Support of WMNs for Large Disasters 200 12.6.2 WMNs Supporting Video Monitoring for Public Safety 201 12.6.3 WMNs for Mobile Video Applications of Public Safety and Law Enforcement 202 12.7 Interoperability of WMNs for Emergency Response and Public Safety Applications 202 12.8 Security in Wireless Mesh Networks 203 12.9 Conclusion 204 References 204 13 Satellite for Public Safety and Emergency Communications 207 13.1 Introduction 207 13.2 Contextualizing Public Safety 208 13.3 Public Safety Communications Today 208 13.4 Satellite Communications in Public Safety 209 13.4.1 Topology and Frequency Allocation 210 13.4.2 Satellite Communications 210 13.4.3 Applications of LEO and GEO Satellites in Public Safety Communication 211 13.4.4 Mobile Satellite Systems 213 13.4.4.1 Vehicle-Mounted Mobile Satellite Communications Systems 213 13.4.4.2 Emergency Communications Trailers 216 13.4.4.3 Flyaway Satellite Internet Systems 217 13.4.5 VoIP Phone Service Over Satellite 218 13.4.6 Fixed Satellite 219 13.4.7 Frequency Allocations in FSS and MSS Systems 221 13.5 Limitations of Satellite for Public Safety 222 13.6 Conclusion 223 References 224 14 Public Safety Communications Evolution: The Long Term Transition Toward a Desired Converged Future 227 14.1 Introduction 227 14.1.1 Toward Moving Public Safety Networks 227 14.1.2 The Communication Needs of Public Safety Authorities 227 14.1.3 The Nationwide Public Safety Broadband Networks 228 14.1.4 Global Public Safety Community Aligning Behind LTE 230 14.1.5 Understanding the Concept of E-Comm in Relation to Public Safety 231 14.2 Transmission Trunking and Message Trunking 232 14.2.1 Push-to-Talk Mechanisms 233 14.2.2 Talk Groups and Group Calls 233 14.2.3 Mobility of Radio Devices and Call Handover 233 14.2.4 WarnSim: Learning About a Simulator for PSWN 233 14.2.5 The Use Cases and Topologies of Public Safety Networks 235 14.2.6 Standard Developments in Public Safety Networks 238 14.2.7 The Future Challenges in Public Safety 240 14.2.7.1 Moving Cells and Network Mobility 240 14.2.7.2 Device-to-Device (D2D) Discovery and Communications 240 14.2.7.3 Programmability and Flexibility 240 14.2.7.4 Traffic Steering and Scheduling 241 14.2.7.5 Optimization of Performance Metrics to Support Sufficient QoS 241 14.2.8 Toward a Convergence Future of Public Safety Networks 241 14.3 Conclusion 242 References 243 Index 245

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe new edition of the leading resource on designing digital frequency synthesizers from microwave and wireless applications, fully updated to reflect the most modern integrated circuits and semiconductors Microwave and Wireless Synthesizers: Theory and Design, Second Edition, remains the standard text on the subject by providing complete and up-to-date coverage of both practical and theoretical aspects of modern frequency synthesizers and their components. Featuring contributions from leading experts in the field, this classic volume describes loop fundamentals, noise and spurious responses, special loops, loop components, multiloop synthesizers, and more. Practical synthesizer examples illustrate the design of a high-performance hybrid synthesizer and performance measurement techniquesoffering readers clear instruction onthe various design steps and design rules. The second edition includes extensively revised content throughout, including a modern apprTable of ContentsAuthor Biography xii Preface xvi Important Notations xx 1 Loop Fundamentals 1 1-1 Introduction to Linear Loops 1 1-2 Characteristics of a Loop 3 1-3 Digital Loops 7 1-4 Type 1 First-Order Loop 10 1-5 Type 1 Second-Order Loop 12 1-6 Type 2 Second-Order Loop 20 1-6-1 Transient Behavior of Digital Loops Using Tri-state Phase Detectors 22 1-7 Type 2 Third-Order Loop 27 1-7-1 Transfer Function of Type 2 Third-Order Loop 28 1-7-2 FM Noise Suppression 35 1-8 Higher-Order Loops 36 1-8-1 Fifth-Order Loop Transient Response 36 1-9 Digital Loops with Mixers 40 1-10 Acquisition 44 Example 1 48 1-10-1 Pull-in Performance of the Digital Loop 49 1-10-2 Coarse Steering of the VCO as an Acquisition Aid 52 1-10-3 Loop Stability 54 References 62 Suggested Reading 62 2 Almost all About Phase Noise 65 2-1 Introduction to Phase Noise 65 2-1-1 The Clock Signal 65 2-1-2 The Power Spectral Density (PSD) 68 2-1-3 Basics of Noise 71 2-1-4 Phase and Frequency Noise 78 2-2 The Allan Variance and Other Two-Sample Variances 88 2-2-1 Frequency Counters 89 2-2-2 The Two-Sample Variances AVAR, MVAR, and PVAR 94 2-2-3 Conversion from Spectra to Two-Sample Variances 96 2-3 Phase Noise in Components 100 2-3-1 Amplifiers 100 2-3-2 Frequency Dividers 104 2-3-3 Frequency Multipliers 112 2-3-4 Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS) 117 2-3-5 Phase Detectors 128 2-3-6 Noise Contribution from Power Supplies 132 2-4 Phase Noise in Oscillators 133 2-4-1 Modern View of the Leeson Model 134 2-4-2 Circumventing the Resonator’s Thermal Noise 144 2-4-3 Oscillator Hacking 146 2-5 The Measurement of Phase Noise 153 2-5-1 Double-Balanced Mixer Instruments 154 2-5-2 The Cross-Spectrum Method 166 2-5-3 Digital Instruments 171 2-5-4 Pitfalls and Limitations of the Cross-Spectrum Measurements 180 2-5-5 The Bridge (Interferometric) Method 187 2-5-6 Artifacts and Oddities Often Found in the Real World 190 References 193 Suggested Readings 197 3 Special Loops 201 3-1 Introduction 201 3-2 Direct Digital Synthesis Techniques 201 3-2-1 A First Look at Fractional N 202 3-2-2 Digital Waveform Synthesizers 203 3-2-3 Signal Quality 220 3-2-4 Future Prospects 235 3-3 Loops with Delay Line as Phase Comparators 236 3-4 Fractional Division N Synthesizers 237 3-4-1 Example Implementation 240 3-4-2 Some Special Past Patents for Fractional Division N Synthesizers 253 References 255 Bibliography 256 Fractional Division N Readings 256 4 Loop Components 259 4-1 Introduction to Oscillators and Their Mathematical Treatment 259 4-2 The Colpitts Oscillator 259 4-2-1 Linear Approach 260 4-2-2 Design Example for a 350MHz Fixed-Frequency Colpitts Oscillator 269 4-2-3 Validation Circuits 282 4-2-4 Series Feedback Oscillator 314 4-2-5 2400 MHz MOSFET-Based Push–Pull Oscillator 319 4-2-6 Oscillators for IC Applications 336 4-2-7 Noise in Semiconductors and Circuits 337 4-2-8 Summary 339 4-3 Use of Tuning Diodes 339 4-3-1 Diode Tuned Resonant Circuits 340 4-3-2 Practical Circuits 344 4-4 Use of Diode Switches 345 4-4-1 Diode Switches for Electronic Band Selection 346 4-4-2 Use of Diodes for Frequency Multiplication 347 4-5 Reference Frequency Standards 351 4-5-1 Specifying Oscillators 351 4-5-2 Typical Examples of Crystal Oscillator Specifications 352 4-6 Mixer Applications 354 4-7 Phase/Frequency Comparators 357 4-7-1 Diode Rings 357 4-7-2 Exclusive ORs 358 4-7-3 Sample/Hold Detectors 362 4-7-4 Edge-Triggered JK Master/Slave Flip-Flops 368 4-7-5 Digital Tri-State Comparators 369 4-8 Wideband High-Gain Amplifiers 378 4-8-1 Summation Amplifiers 378 4-8-2 Differential Limiters 382 4-8-3 Isolation Amplifiers 382 4-8-4 Example Implementations 387 4-9 Programmable Dividers 393 4-9-1 Asynchronous Counters 393 4-9-2 Programmable Synchronous Up-/Down-Counters 394 4-9-3 Advanced Implementation Example 405 4-9-4 Swallow Counters/Dual-Modulus Counters 407 4-9-5 Look-Ahead and Delay Compensation 411 4-10 Loop Filters 421 4-10-1 Passive RC Filters 421 4-10-2 Active RC Filters 422 4-10-3 Active Second-Order Low-Pass Filters 423 4-10-4 Passive LC Filters 426 4-10-5 Spur-Suppression Techniques 427 4-11 Microwave Oscillator Design 430 4-11-1 The Compressed Smith Chart 432 4-11-2 Series or Parallel Resonance 434 4-11-3 Two-Port Oscillator Design 435 4-12 Microwave Resonators 444 4-12-1 SAW Oscillators 445 4-12-2 Dielectric Resonators 445 4-12-3 YIG Oscillators 448 4-12-4 Varactor Resonators 452 4-12-5 Ceramic Resonators 455 References 461 Suggested Readings 464 5 Digital PLL Synthesizers 471 5-1 Multiloop Synthesizers Using Different Techniques 471 5-1-1 Direct Frequency Synthesis 471 5-1-2 Multiple Loops 473 5-2 System Analysis 477 5-3 Low-Noise Microwave Synthesizers 484 5-3-1 Building Blocks 485 5-3-2 Output Loop Response 489 5-3-3 Low Phase Noise References: Frequency Standards 490 5-3-4 Critical Stage 493 5-3-5 Time Domain Analysis 503 5-3-6 Summary 508 5-3-7 Two Commercial Synthesizer Examples 512 5-4 Microprocessor Applications in Synthesizers 518 5-5 Transceiver Applications 523 5-6 About Bits, Symbols, and Waveforms 526 5-6-1 Representation of a Modulated RF Carrier 527 5-6-2 Generation of the Modulated Carrier 529 5-6-3 Putting It all Together 533 5-6-4 Combination of Techniques 535 Acknowledgments 537 References 540 Bibliography and Suggested Reading 540 6 A High-Performance Hybrid Synthesizer 543 6-1 Introduction 543 6-2 Basic Synthesizer Approach 544 6-3 Loop Filter Design 548 6-4 Summary 556 Bibliography 557 A Mathematical Review 559 A-1 Functions of a Complex Variable 559 A-2 Complex Planes 561 A-2-1 Functions in the Complex Frequency Plane 565 A-3 Bode Diagram 568 A-4 Laplace Transform 582 A-4-1 The Step Function 583 A-4-2 The Ramp 584 A-4-3 Linearity Theorem 584 A-4-4 Differentiation and Integration 585 A-4-5 Initial Value Theorem 585 A-4-6 Final Value Theorem 585 A-4-7 The Active Integrator 585 A-4-8 Locking Behavior of the PLL 587 A-5 Low-Noise Oscillator Design 590 A-5-1 Example Implementation 590 A-6 Oscillator Amplitude Stabilization 594 A-7 Very Low Phase Noise VCO for 800 MHZ 602 References 605 B A General-Purpose Nonlinear Approach to the Computation of Sideband Phase Noise in Free-Running Microwave and RF Oscillators 607 B-1 Introduction 607 B-2 Noise Generation in Oscillators 608 B-3 Bias-Dependent Noise Model 609 B-3-1 Bias-Dependent Model 617 B-3-2 Derivation of the Model 617 B-4 General Concept of Noisy Circuits 619 B-4-1 Noise from Linear Elements 620 B-5 Noise Figure of Mixer Circuits 622 B-6 Oscillator Noise Analysis 624 B-7 Limitations of the Frequency-Conversion Approach 625 B-7-1 Assumptions 626 B-7-2 Conversion and Modulation Noise 626 B-7-3 Properties of Modulation Noise 626 B-7-4 Noise Analysis of Autonomous Circuits 627 B-7-5 Conversion Noise Analysis Results 627 B-7-6 Modulation Noise Analysis Results 627 B-8 Summary of the Phase Noise Spectrum of the Oscillator 628 B-9 Verification Examples for the Calculation of Phase Noise in Oscillators Using Nonlinear Techniques 628 B-9-1 Example 1: High-Q Case Microstrip DRO 628 B-9-2 Example 2: 10 MHz Crystal Oscillator 629 B-9-3 Example 3: The 1-GHz Ceramic Resonator VCO 630 B-9-4 Example 4: Low Phase Noise FET Oscillator 632 B-9-5 Example 5: Millimeter-Wave Applications 636 B-9-6 Example 6: Discriminator Stabilized DRO 639 B-10 Summary 641 References 643 C Example of Wireless Synthesizers Using Commercial ICs 645 D MMIC-Based Synthesizers 665 D-1 Introduction 665 Bibliography 668 E Articles on Design of Dielectric Resonator Oscillator 671 E-1 The Design of an Ultra-Low Phase Noise DRO 671 E-1-1 Basic Considerations and Component Selection 671 E-1-2 Component Selection 672 E-1-3 DRO Topologies 675 E-1-4 Small Signal Design Approach for the Parallel Feedback Type DRO 677 E-1-5 Simulated Versus Measured Results 683 E-1-6 Physical Embodiment 685 E-1-7 Acknowledgments 685 E-1-8 Final Remarks 688 References 692 Bibliography 692 E-2 A Novel Oscillator Design with Metamaterial-MöBius Coupling to a Dielectric Resonator 692 E-2-1 Abstract 692 E-2-2 Introduction 693 References 699 F Opto-Electronically Stabilized RF Oscillators 701 F-1 Introduction 701 F-1-1 Oscillator Basics 701 F-1-2 Resonator Technologies 701 F-1-3 Motivation for OEO 704 F-1-4 Operation Principle of the OEO 704 F-2 Experimental Evaluation and Thermal Stability of OEO 705 F-2-1 Experimental Setup 705 F-2-2 Phase Noise Measurements 708 F-2-3 Thermal Sensitivity Analysis of Standard Fibers 709 F-2-4 Temperature Sensitivity Measurements 710 F-2-5 Temperature Sensitivity Improvement with HC-PCF 712 F-2-6 Improve Thermal Stability Versus Phase Noise Degradation 712 F-2-7 Passive Temperature Compensation 713 F-2-8 Improving Effective Q with Raman Amplification 714 F-3 Forced Oscillation Techniques of OEO 718 F-3-1 Analysis of Standard Injection-Locked (IL) Oscillators 718 F-3-2 Analysis of Self-Injection Locked (SIL) Oscillators 720 F-3-3 Experimental Verification of Self-Injection Locked (SIL) Oscillators 721 F-3-4 Analysis of Standard Phase Locked Loop (PLL) Oscillators 723 F-3-5 Analysis of Self Phase Locked Loop (SPLL) Oscillators 725 F-3-6 Experimental Verification of Self-Phase Locked Loop (SPLL) Oscillators 726 F-3-7 Analysis of Self-Injection Locked Phase Locked Loop (SILPLL) Oscillators 728 F-4 SILPLL Based X- and K-Band Frequency Synthesizers 731 F-4-1 X-Band Frequency Synthesizer 732 F-4-2 19′′Rack-Mountable K-Band Frequency Synthesizer 737 F-5 Integrated OEO Realization Using Si-Photonics 742 F-6 Compact OEO Using InP Multi-Mode Semiconductor Laser 744 F-6-1 Structure of Multi-mode InP Laser 744 F-6-2 Multi-mode Laser and Inter-Modal RF Oscillation 745 F-6-3 Self-Forced Frequency Stabilizations 747 F-7 Discussions 752 Acknowledgments 753 References 754 G Phase Noise Analysis, then and Today 761 G-1 Introduction 761 G-2 Large-Signal Noise Analysis 762 References 769 H A Novel Approach to Frequency and Phase Settling Time Measurements on PLL Circuits 771 H-1 Introduction 771 H-2 Settling Time Measurement Overview 771 H-2-1 Theoretical Background of Frequency Settling Time 771 H-2-2 Frequency Settling Measurement in the Past 772 H-3 R&S FSWP Phase Noise Analyzer 774 H-3-1 Phase Noise Analyzer Architecture 774 H-3-2 Typical Test Setup for Settling Time Measurements 776 H-4 Frequency Hopping and Settling Time Measurements in Practice 776 H-4-1 Trigger on Wideband Frequency Hopping Signals 776 H-4-2 Frequency and Phase Settling Time Measurement 777 H-5 Conclusion 780 Index 783

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface to the Third Edition xvii Preface to the Second Edition xix Preface to the First Edition xxi About the Companion Website xxv 1 Introduction: Propulsion in Sustainable Aviation 1 1.1 History of the Airbreathing Jet Engine, a Twentieth-Century Invention—The Beginning 1 1.2 Innovations in Aircraft Gas Turbine Engines 4 1.2.1 Multispool Configuration 4 1.2.2 Variable Stator 5 1.2.3 Transonic Compressor 5 1.2.4 Low-Emission Combustor 6 1.2.5 Turbine Cooling 7 1.2.6 Exhaust Nozzles 8 1.2.7 Modern Materials and Manufacturing Techniques 8 1.3 Twenty-first Century Aviation Goal: Sustainability 10 1.3.1 Combustion Emissions 10 1.3.2 Greenhouse Gases 11 1.3.3 Fuels for Sustainable Aviation 14 1.4 New Engine Concepts in Sustainable Aviation 15 1.4.1 Advanced GT Concepts: ATP/CROR and GTF 15 1.4.2 Adaptive Cycle Engine 16 1.4.3 Advanced Airbreathing Rocket Technology 18 1.4.4 Wave Rotor Topping Cycle 18 1.4.4.1 Humphrey Cycle versus Brayton Cycle 18 1.4.5 Pulse Detonation Engine (PDE) 20 1.4.6 Millimeter-Scale Gas Turbine Engines: Triumph of MEMS and Digital Fabrication 20 1.4.7 Combined Cycle Propulsion: Engines from Takeoff to Space 21 1.4.8 Hybrid-Electric and Distributed Electric Propulsion 22 1.5 New Vehicle Technologies 30 1.6 Summary 34 1.7 Roadmap for the Third Edition 34 References 36 Problems 38 2 Compressible Flow with Friction and Heat: A Review 41 2.1 Introduction 41 2.2 A Brief Review of Thermodynamics 42 2.3 Isentropic Process and Isentropic Flow 46 2.4 Conservation Principles for Systems and Control Volumes 47 2.5 Speed of Sound and Mach Number 54 2.6 Stagnation State 56 2.7 Quasi-One-Dimensional Flow 58 2.8 Area-Mach Number Relationship 62 2.9 Sonic Throat 63 2.10 Waves in Supersonic Flow 66 2.11 Normal Shocks 67 2.12 Oblique Shocks 71 2.13 Conical Shocks 74 2.14 Expansion Waves 79 2.15 Frictionless, Constant-Area Duct Flow with Heat Transfer: Rayleigh Flow 83 2.16 Adiabatic Flow of a Calorically Perfect Gas in a Constant-Area Duct with Friction: Fanno Flow 92 2.17 Friction (drag) coefficient Cf and D’Arcy Friction Factor fD 105 2.18 Dimensionless Parameters 105 2.19 Fluid Impulse 108 2.20 Summary of Fluid Impulse 115 References 116 Problems 116 3 Engine Thrust and Performance Parameters 127 3.1 Introduction 127 3.1.1 Takeoff Thrust 133 3.2 Installed Thrust—Some Bookkeeping Issues on Thrust and Drag 133 3.3 Engine Thrust Based on the Sum of Component Impulse 138 3.4 Rocket Thrust 141 3.5 Airbreathing Engine Performance Parameters 142 3.5.1 Specific Thrust 142 3.5.2 Specific Fuel Consumption and Specific Impulse 143 3.5.3 Thermal Efficiency 144 3.5.4 Propulsive Efficiency 147 3.5.5 Engine Overall Efficiency and Its Impact on Aircraft Range and Endurance 150 3.6 Modern Engines, Their Architecture, and Some Performance Characteristics 153 3.7 Summary 156 References 157 Problems 158 4 Gas Turbine Engine Cycle Analysis 167 4.1 Introduction 167 4.2 The Gas Generator 167 4.3 Aircraft Gas Turbine Engines 169 4.3.1 The Turbojet Engine 169 4.3.1.1 The Inlet 169 4.3.1.2 The Compressor 173 4.3.1.3 The Burner 179 4.3.1.4 The Turbine 184 4.3.1.5 The Nozzle 193 4.3.1.6 Thermal Efficiency of a Turbojet Engine 200 4.3.1.7 Propulsive Efficiency of a Turbojet Engine 208 4.3.1.8 The Overall Efficiency of a Turbojet Engine 209 4.3.1.9 Performance Evaluation of a Turbojet Engine 210 4.3.2 The Turbojet Engine with an Afterburner 211 4.3.2.1 Introduction 211 4.3.2.2 Analysis 213 4.3.2.3 Optimum Compressor Pressure Ratio for Maximum (Ideal) Thrust Turbojet Engine with Afterburner 216 4.3.3 The Turbofan Engine 222 4.3.3.1 Introduction 222 4.3.3.2 Analysis of a Separate-Exhaust Turbofan Engine 223 4.3.3.3 Thermal Efficiency of a Turbofan Engine 227 4.3.3.4 Propulsive Efficiency of a Turbofan Engine 228 4.3.4 Ultra-High Bypass (UHB) Turbofan Engines 233 4.4 Analysis of a Mixed-Exhaust Turbofan Engine with an Afterburner 237 4.4.1 Mixer 238 4.4.2 Cycle Analysis 240 4.4.2.1 Solution Procedure 241 4.5 The Turboprop Engine 251 4.5.1 Introduction 251 4.5.2 Propeller Theory 252 4.5.2.1 Momentum Theory 253 4.5.2.2 Blade Element Theory 257 4.5.3 Turboprop Cycle Analysis 259 4.5.3.1 The New Parameters 259 4.5.3.2 Design Point Analysis 259 4.5.3.3 Optimum Power Split Between the Propeller and the Jet 263 4.6 Promising Propulsion and Power Technologies in Sustainable Aviation 269 4.6.1 Distributed Combustion Concepts in Advanced Gas Turbine Engine Core 269 4.6.2 Multi-Fuel (Cryogenic-Kerosene) Hybrid Propulsion Concept 272 4.6.3 Intercooled and Recuperated Turbofan Engines 274 4.6.4 Active Core Concepts 275 4.6.5 Wave-Rotor Combustion 277 4.6.6 Pulse Detonation Engine (PDE) 283 4.6.6.1 Idealized Laboratory PDE: Thrust Tube 285 4.6.6.2 Pulse Detonation Ramjet 286 4.6.6.3 Turbofan Engine with PDE 287 4.6.6.4 Pulse Detonation Rocket Engine (PDRE) 288 4.6.6.5 Vehicle-Level Performance Evaluation of PDE 288 4.6.7 Adaptive Cycle Engines (ACE) 290 4.7 Summary 294 References 295 Problems 297 5 General Aviation and Uninhabited Aerial Vehicle Propulsion System 319 5.1 Introduction 319 5.2 Cycle Analysis 320 5.2.1 Otto Cycle 320 5.2.2 Real Engine Cycles 320 5.2.2.1 Four-Stroke Cycle Engines 320 5.2.2.2 Diesel Engines 322 5.2.2.3 Two-Stroke Cycle Engines 324 5.2.2.4 Rotary (Wankel) Engines 326 5.3 Power and Efficiency 328 5.4 Engine Components and Classifications 330 5.4.1 Engine Components 330 5.4.2 Reciprocating Engine Classifications 331 5.4.2.1 Classification by Cylinder Arrangement 331 5.4.2.2 Classification by Cooling Arrangement 333 5.4.2.3 Classification by Operating Cycle 334 5.4.2.4 Classification by Ignition Type 334 5.5 Scaling of Aircraft Reciprocating Engines 335 5.5.1 Scaling of Aircraft Diesel Engines 341 5.6 Aircraft Engine Systems 343 5.6.1 Aviation Fuels and Engine Knock 343 5.6.2 Carburetion and Fuel Injection Systems 345 5.6.2.1 Float-Type Carburetors 345 5.6.2.2 Pressure Injection Carburetors 346 5.6.2.3 Fuel Injection Systems 346 5.6.2.4 Full Authority Digital Engine Control (FADEC) 346 5.6.3 Ignition Systems 346 5.6.3.1 Battery Ignition Systems 347 5.6.3.2 High Tension Ignition System 347 5.6.3.3 Low Tension Ignition System 347 5.6.3.4 Full Authority Digital Engine Control (FADEC) 347 5.6.3.5 Ignition Boosters 347 5.6.3.6 Spark Plugs 348 5.6.4 Lubrication Systems 348 5.6.5 Supercharging 349 5.7 Electric Engines 349 5.7.1 Electric Motors 350 5.7.2 Solar cells 351 5.7.3 Advanced Batteries 351 5.7.4 Fuel cells 352 5.7.5 State of the Art for Electric Propulsion – Future Technology 354 5.8 Propellers and Reduction Gears 354 References 356 Problems 359 6 Aircraft Engine Inlets and Nozzles 361 6.1 Introduction 361 6.2 The Flight Mach Number and its Impact on Inlet Duct Geometry 362 6.3 Diffusers 363 6.4 An Ideal Diffuser 364 6.5 Real Diffusers and their Stall Characteristics 365 6.6 Subsonic Diffuser Performance 367 6.7 Subsonic Cruise Inlet 372 6.8 Transition Ducts 380 6.9 An Interim Summary for Subsonic Inlets 381 6.10 Supersonic Inlets 382 6.10.1 Isentropic Convergent–Divergent Inlets 383 6.10.2 Methods to Start a Supersonic Convergent–Divergent Inlet 385 6.10.2.1 Overspeeding 386 6.10.2.2 Kantrowitz–Donaldson Inlet 388 6.10.2.3 Variable-Throat Isentropic C–D Inlet 389 6.11 Normal Shock Inlets 391 6.12 External Compression Inlets 393 6.12.1 Optimum Ramp Angles 396 6.12.2 Design and Off-Design Operation 396 6.13 Variable Geometry—External Compression Inlets 398 6.13.1 Variable Ramps 399 6.14 Mixed-Compression Inlets 399 6.15 Supersonic Inlet Types and their Performance—A Review 401 6.16 Standards for Supersonic Inlet Recovery 402 6.17 Exhaust Nozzle 404 6.18 Gross Thrust 404 6.19 Nozzle Adiabatic Efficiency 404 6.20 Nozzle Total Pressure Ratio 405 6.21 Nozzle Pressure Ratio (NPR) and Critical Nozzle Pressure Ratio (NPRcrit) 405 6.22 Relation between Nozzle Figures of Merit, ηn and πn 406 6.23 A Convergent Nozzle or a De Laval? 407 6.24 The Effect of Boundary Layer Formation on Nozzle Internal Performance 409 6.25 Nozzle Exit Flow Velocity Coefficient 409 6.26 Effect of Flow Angularity on Gross Thrust 411 6.27 Nozzle Gross Thrust Coefficient Cfg 414 6.28 Over-Expanded Nozzle Flow—Shock Losses 415 6.29 Nozzle Area Scheduling, A8 and A9 /A8 418 6.30 Nozzle Exit Area Scheduling, A9 /A8 420 6.31 Nozzle Cooling 422 6.32 Thrust Reverser and Thrust Vectoring 424 6.33 Hypersonic Nozzle 429 6.34 Exhaust Mixer and Gross Thrust Gain in a Mixed-Flow Turbofan Engine 432 6.35 Engine Noise 434 6.35.1 Subsonic Jet Noise 435 6.35.2 Chevron Nozzle 436 6.35.3 Supersonic Jet Noise 437 6.35.4 Engine Noise Mitigation through Wing Shielding 439 6.36 Nozzle-Turbine (Structural) Integration 439 6.37 Summary of Exhaust Systems 439 References 442 Problems 444 7 Combustion Chambers and Afterburners 461 7.1 Introduction 461 7.2 Laws Governing Mixture of Gases 463 7.3 Chemical Reaction and Flame Temperature 466 7.4 Chemical Equilibrium and Chemical Composition 475 7.4.1 The Law of Mass Action 476 7.4.2 Equilibrium Constant KP 478 7.5 Chemical Kinetics 487 7.5.1 Ignition and Relight Envelope 488 7.5.2 Reaction Timescale 488 7.5.3 Flammability Limits 490 7.5.4 Flame Speed 492 7.5.5 Flame Stability 494 7.5.6 Spontaneous Ignition Delay Time 498 7.5.7 Combustion-Generated Pollutants 500 7.6 Combustion Chamber 500 7.6.1 Combustion Chamber Total Pressure Loss 502 7.6.2 Combustor Flow Pattern and Temperature Profile 509 7.6.3 Combustor Liner and its Cooling Methods 511 7.6.4 Combustion Efficiency 514 7.6.5 Some Combustor Sizing and Scaling Laws 515 7.6.6 Afterburner 519 7.7 Combustion-Generated Pollutants 523 7.7.1 Greenhouse Gases, CO2 and H2 O 524 7.7.2 Carbon Monoxide, CO, and Unburned Hydrocarbons, UHC 524 7.7.3 Oxides of Nitrogen, NO and NO2 525 7.7.4 Smoke 526 7.7.5 Engine Emission Standards 527 7.7.6 Low-Emission Combustors 528 7.7.7 Impact of NO on the Ozone Layer 531 7.8 Aviation Fuels 534 7.9 Alternative Jet Fuels (AJFs) 538 7.9.1 Conversion Pathways to Jet Fuel 539 7.9.2 AJF Evaluation and Certification/Qualification 539 7.9.3 Impact of Biofuel on Emissions 540 7.10 Cryogenic Fuels 542 7.10.1 Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG) 542 7.10.1.1 Composition of Natural Gas and LNG 544 7.10.2 Hydrogen 546 7.10.2.1 Hydrogen Production 547 7.10.2.2 Hydrogen Delivery and Storage 548 7.10.3 Energy Density Comparison 549 7.11 Combustion Instability: Screech and Rumble 549 7.11.1 Screech Damper 550 7.12 Summary 550 References 551 Problems 553 8 Aerodynamics of Axial-Flow Compressors and Fans 563 8.1 Introduction 563 8.2 The Geometry 564 8.3 Rotor and Stator Frames of Reference 564 8.4 The Euler Turbine Equation 566 8.5 Axial-Flow Versus Radial-Flow Machines 568 8.6 Axial-Flow Compressors and Fans 569 8.6.1 Definition of Flow Angles 571 8.6.2 Stage Parameters 573 8.6.3 Cascade Aerodynamics 585 8.6.4 Aerodynamic Forces on Compressor Blades 598 8.6.5 Three-Dimensional Flow 605 8.6.5.1 Blade Vortex Design 606 8.6.5.2 Three-Dimensional Losses 617 8.6.5.3 Reynolds Number Effect 621 8.7 Compressor Performance Map 624 8.8 Compressor Instability – Stall and Surge 626 8.9 Multistage Compressors and their Operating Line 629 8.10 Multistage Compressor Stalling Pressure Rise and Stall Margin 634 8.11 Multistage Compressor Starting Problem 642 8.12 The Effect of Inlet Flow Condition on Compressor Performance 645 8.13 Isometric and Cutaway Views of Axial-Flow Compressor Hardware 648 8.14 Compressor Design Parameters and Principles 650 8.14.1 Blade Design – Blade Selection 654 8.14.2 Compressor Annulus Design 655 8.14.3 Compressor Stall Margin 656 8.15 Concepts in Compressor and Fan Noise Mitigation 664 8.16 Summary 668 References 671 Problems 673 9 Centrifugal Compressor Aerodynamics 689 9.1 Introduction 689 9.2 Centrifugal Compressors 690 9.3 Radial Diffuser 703 9.4 Inducer 706 9.5 Inlet Guide Vanes (IGVs) and Inducer-Less Impellers 709 9.6 Impeller Exit Flow and Blockage Effects 709 9.7 Efficiency and Performance 711 9.8 Summary 713 References 714 Problems 715 10 Aerothermodynamics of Gas Turbines 721 10.1 Introduction 721 10.2 Axial-Flow Turbines 721 10.2.1 Optimal Nozzle Exit Swirl Mach Number M θ2 733 10.2.2 Turbine Blade Losses 736 10.2.2.1 Blade Profile Loss 737 10.2.2.2 Secondary Flow Losses 739 10.2.2.3 Annulus Losses 741 10.2.3 Optimum Solidity 748 10.2.4 Turbine Cooling 752 10.2.4.1 Convective Cooling 756 10.2.4.2 Impingement Cooling 760 10.2.4.3 Film Cooling 761 10.2.4.4 Transpiration Cooling 763 10.3 Turbine Performance Map 764 10.4 The Effect of Cooling on Turbine Efficiency 765 10.5 Turbine Blade Profile Design 766 10.5.1 Angles 767 10.5.2 Other Blade Geometrical Parameters 768 10.5.3 Throat Sizing 769 10.5.4 Throat Reynolds Number Reo 770 10.5.5 Turbine Blade Profile Design 770 10.5.6 Blade Vibration and Campbell Diagram 771 10.5.7 Turbine Blade and Disk Material Selection and Design Criteria 772 10.6 Stresses in Turbine Blades and Disks and Useful Life Estimation 774 10.7 Axial-Flow Turbine Design and Practices 777 10.8 Gas Turbine Design Summary 785 10.9 Advances in Turbine Material and Cooling 787 10.10 Summary 788 References 789 Problems 791 11 Aircraft Engine Component Matching and Off -Design Analysis 803 11.1 Introduction 803 11.2 Engine (Steady-State) Component Matching 804 11.2.1 Engine Corrected Parameters 805 11.2.2 Inlet-Compressor Matching 805 11.2.3 Compressor–Combustor Matching 807 11.2.4 Combustor–Turbine Matching 809 11.2.5 Compressor–Turbine Matching and Gas Generator Pumping Characteristics 810 11.2.5.1 Gas Generator Pumping Characteristics 812 11.2.6 Turbine–Afterburner (Variable-Geometry) Nozzle Matching 818 11.2.6.1 Fixed-Geometry Convergent Nozzle Matching 819 11.3 Engine Off-Design Analysis 820 11.3.1 Off-Design Analysis of a Turbojet Engine 821 11.3.2 Off-Design Analysis of an Afterburning Turbojet Engine 824 11.3.3 Off-Design Analysis of a Separate-Flow Turbofan (Two-Spool) Engine 827 11.4 Unchoked Nozzles and Other Off-Design Iteration Strategies 832 11.4.1 Unchoked Exhaust Nozzle 833 11.4.2 Unchoked Turbine Nozzle 834 11.4.3 Turbine Efficiency at Off-Design 834 11.4.4 Variable Gas Properties 835 11.5 Principles of Engine Performance Testing 835 11.5.1 Force of Inlet Bellmouth on Engine Thrust Stand 837 11.5.1.1 Bellmouth Instrumentation 837 11.5.1.2 The Effect of Fluid Viscosity 839 11.5.1.3 The Force of Inlet Bellmouth on Engine Thrust Stand 840 11.6 Summary 843 References 845 Problems 846 12 Chemical Rocket and Hypersonic Propulsion 853 12.1 Introduction 853 12.2 From Takeoff to Earth Orbit 855 12.3 Chemical Rockets 856 12.4 Chemical Rocket Applications 857 12.4.1 Launch Engines 858 12.4.2 Boost Engines 859 12.4.3 Space Maneuver Engines 859 12.4.4 Attitude Control and Orbital Correction Rockets 860 12.5 New Parameters in Rocket Propulsion 860 12.6 Thrust Coefficient, CF 863 12.7 Characteristic Velocity, c* 866 12.8 Flight Performance 868 12.9 Multistage Rockets 876 12.10 Propulsive and Overall Efficiencies 878 12.11 Chemical Rocket Combustion Chamber 879 12.11.1 Liquid Propellant Combustion Chambers 880 12.11.1.1 Some Design Guidelines for Injector Plates 884 12.11.1.2 Combustion Instabilities 885 12.11.2 Solid Propellant Combustion Chambers 885 12.12 Thrust Chamber Cooling 892 12.12.1 Liquid Propellant Thrust Chambers 892 12.12.2 Cooling of Solid Propellant Thrust Chambers 897 12.13 Combustor Volume and Shape 898 12.14 Rocket Nozzles 899 12.14.1 Multiphase Flow in Rocket Nozzles 904 12.14.2 Flow Expansion in Rocket Nozzles 910 12.14.3 Thrust Vectoring Nozzles 911 12.15 High-Speed Airbreathing Engines 913 12.15.1 Supersonic Combustion Ramjet 917 12.15.1.1 Inlet Analysis 919 12.15.1.2 Scramjet Combustor 919 12.15.1.3 Scramjet Nozzle 921 12.16 Rocket-Based Airbreathing Propulsion 921 12.17 Compact Fusion Reactor: The Path to Clean, Unlimited Energy 924 12.18 Summary 925 References 926 Problems 927 A. U.S. Standard Atmosphere 931 B. Isentropic Table 935 C. Normal Shock Table 952 D. Rayleigh Flow 965 E. Fanno Flow 974 F. Prandtl–Meyer Function and Mach Angle 983 G. Oblique Shock Charts 986 H. Conical Shock Charts 991 Index 995

Read more less

Book SynopsisSince the first edition in 1948, Patty's Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology has become a flagship publication for Wiley. During its nearly seven decades in print, it has become a standard reference for the fields of occupational health and toxicology. The volumes on industrial hygiene are cornerstone reference works for not only industrial hygienists but also chemists, engineers, toxicologists, lawyers, and occupational safety personnel. Volume 3 covers Recognition and Evaluation of Physical Agents and Biohazards. All of the chapters have been updated and a new chapter on Robotics has been added. These subjects are increasing in importance to industrial hygienists.Table of ContentsContributors vii Preface ix Useful Equivalents and Conversion Factors xi Part V Physical Agents 1 Ionizing Radiation 3 Herman Cember and Thomas E. Johnson Nonionizing Radiation: Lasers 23 David H. Sliney Nonionizing Radiation: Broadband Optical 37 Margaret L. Phillips and Allene H. Butler Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields 63 Kenneth R. Foster and Richard A. Tell Nonionizing Radiation: Extremely Low Frequency 95 Mona Shum and Jesse Cooper Noise and Hearing Conservation 107 David C. Byrne and Kevin L. Michael Physiological Effects of Altered Barometric Pressure 141 Claude A. Piantadosi Hand-Arm Vibration 163 Christopher M. Nelson Cold Stress 189 Tiina M. Ikäheimo, Kalev Kuklane, Jouni J.K. Jaakkola, and Ingvar Holmér Heat Stress 219 Michael D. Larrañaga Occupational Ergonomics: Past, Present, and Future 261 Susan Kotowski, Kermit Davis, and Amit Bhattacharya Robotics in the Workplace 287 Frank J. Hearl, Vladimir Murashov, John Howard, Hongwei Hsiao, John Sammarco, Brian Lowe, and George Luxbacher Part VI Biological Agents 303 Occupational Microbiological Biohazards – Exposure, Detection, and Disease 305 Tiina Reponen Control of Biohazards 343 Nancy C. Burton Airborne and Emerging Infectious Diseases 369 Augusto Dulanto Chiang and Tara N. Palmore Index 391

Read more less

Book SynopsisSince the first edition in 1948, Patty's Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology has become a flagship publication for Wiley. During its nearly seven decades in print, it has become a standard reference for the fields of occupational health and toxicology. The volumes on industrial hygiene are cornerstone reference works for not only industrial hygienists but also chemists, engineers, toxicologists, lawyers, and occupational safety personnel. Volume 4 covers environmental and health and safety program management, with a number of new chapters on sustainability, construction health and safety, health and safety of new energies and working with cannabis.Table of ContentsContributors vii Preface ix Useful Equivalents and Conversion Factors xi Part VII Program Management 1 Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems 3 Charles F. Redinger, Alan J. Leibowitz, and Victor M. Toy Sustainability and the Role of the Safety and Health Professional 37 S. Zack Mansdorf Product Stewardship: A Viable Practice for the Industrial Hygienist 47 Thomas G. Grumbles Part VIII Specialty Areas 63 Emergency and Disaster: Preparedness, Response, and Recovery 65 Chris Laszcz-Davis, Mary Massey, Alan J. Leibowitz, Daniel Hardt, Herman Woessner, Jim Jabara, Fabrice Lebourgeois, Vicki Villarreal, Ron R. McHaney, Peggy Otum, David Barnes, and Steven P. Pereira Hazardous Wastes 125 Lisa Simkins Barnes and Meredith G. Durant Industrial Hygiene Issues in Construction 139 Bruce Lippy, Gavin H. West, Matthew Gillen, Eileen Betit, Linda M. Goldenhar, Babak Memarian, Richard Rinehart, Grace Barlet, M.K. Fletcher, Sara Brooks, and Jean Christophe Le Agriculture Hygiene 167 Kelley J. Donham and Matthew Nonnenmann Health Care Industry: Contemporary Considerations 195 Robert J. Emery, Michael A. Charlton, Bruce J. Brown, and Scott J. Patlovich Air Pollution 207 Paul G. Reinhart, Lori White, Jee Young Kim, Lindsay Wichers Stanek, Mary Ross, Barbara Buckley, and James A. Murray Health and Safety Factors in Designing an Industrial Hygiene Laboratory 255 Robert G. Lieckfield Fire Safety in the Workplace 279 Richard L. P. Custer and Pamela A. Powell Advancing the Well-Being of Workers: An Introduction to Total Worker Health‸ Approaches 297 L. Casey Chosewood and Sara L. Tamers Health and Safety Issues of New Energy Technologies 311 Brian Heramb Cannabis 333 Robert N. Phalen Indoor Air Quality in Nonindustrial Occupational Environments 357 John P. Springston, Elliott Horner, and Joseph Lstiburek Index 415 Cumulative Index 433

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsIntroduction xxi Assessment Test xxx Chapter 1 History of Analytics and Big Data 1 Evolution of Analytics Architecture Over the Years 3 The New World Order 5 Analytics Pipeline 6 Data Sources 7 Collection 8 Storage 8 Processing and Analysis 9 Visualization, Predictive and Prescriptive Analytics 9 The Big Data Reference Architecture 10 Data Characteristics: Hot, Warm, and Cold 11 Collection/Ingest 12 Storage 13 Process/Analyze 14 Consumption 15 Data Lakes and Their Relevance in Analytics 16 What is a Data Lake? 16 Building a Data Lake on AWS 19 Step 1: Choosing the Right Storage – Amazon S3 is the Base 19 Step 2: Data Ingestion – Moving the Data into the Data Lake 21 Step 3: Cleanse, Prep, and Catalog the Data 22 Step 4: Secure the Data and Metadata 23 Step 5: Make Data Available for Analytics 23 Using Lake Formation to Build a Data Lake on AWS 23 Exam Objectives 24 Objective Map 25 Assessment Test 27 References 29 Chapter 2 Data Collection 31 Exam Objectives 32 AWS IoT 33 Common Use Cases for AWS IoT 35 How AWS IoT Works 36 Amazon Kinesis 38 Amazon Kinesis Introduction 40 Amazon Kinesis Data Streams 40 Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics 54 Amazon Kinesis Video Streams 61 AWS Glue 64 Glue Data Catalog 66 Glue Crawlers 68 Authoring ETL Jobs 69 Executing ETL Jobs 71 Change Data Capture with Glue Bookmarks 71 Use Cases for AWS Glue 72 Amazon SQS 72 Amazon Data Migration Service 74 What is AWS DMS Anyway? 74 What Does AWS DMS Support? 75 AWS Data Pipeline 77 Pipeline Definition 77 Pipeline Schedules 78 Task Runner 79 Large-Scale Data Transfer Solutions 81 AWS Snowcone 81 AWS Snowball 82 AWS Snowmobile 85 AWS Direct Connect 86 Summary 87 Review Questions 88 References 90 Exercises & Workshops 91 Chapter 3 Data Storage 93 Introduction 94 Amazon S3 95 Amazon S3 Data Consistency Model 96 Data Lake and S3 97 Data Replication in Amazon S3 100 Server Access Logging in Amazon S3 101 Partitioning, Compression, and File Formats on S3 101 Amazon S3 Glacier 103 Vault 103 Archive 104 Amazon DynamoDB 104 Amazon DynamoDB Data Types 105 Amazon DynamoDB Core Concepts 108 Read/Write Capacity Mode in DynamoDB 108 DynamoDB Auto Scaling and Reserved Capacity 111 Read Consistency and Global Tables 111 Amazon DynamoDB: Indexing and Partitioning 113 Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator 114 Amazon DynamoDB Streams 115 Amazon DynamoDB Streams – Kinesis Adapter 116 Amazon DocumentDB 117 Why a Document Database? 117 Amazon DocumentDB Overview 119 Amazon Document DB Architecture 120 Amazon DocumentDB Interfaces 120 Graph Databases and Amazon Neptune 121 Amazon Neptune Overview 122 Amazon Neptune Use Cases 123 Storage Gateway 123 Hybrid Storage Requirements 123 AWS Storage Gateway 125 Amazon EFS 127 Amazon EFS Use Cases 130 Interacting with Amazon EFS 132 Amazon EFS Security Model 132 Backing Up Amazon EFS 132 Amazon FSx for Lustre 133 Key Benefits of Amazon FSx for Lustre 134 Use Cases for Lustre 135 AWS Transfer for SFTP 135 Summary 136 Exercises 137 Review Questions 140 Further Reading 142 References 142 Chapter 4 Data Processing and Analysis 143 Introduction 144 Types of Analytical Workloads 144 Amazon Athena 146 Apache Presto 147 Apache Hive 148 Amazon Athena Use Cases and Workloads 149 Amazon Athena DDL, DML, and DCL 150 Amazon Athena Workgroups 151 Amazon Athena Federated Query 153 Amazon Athena Custom UDFs 154 Using Machine Learning with Amazon Athena 154 Amazon EMR 155 Apache Hadoop Overview 156 Amazon EMR Overview 157 Apache Hadoop on Amazon EMR 158 EMRFS 166 Bootstrap Actions and Custom AMI 167 Security on EMR 167 EMR Notebooks 168 Apache Hive and Apache Pig on Amazon EMR 169 Apache Spark on Amazon EMR 174 Apache HBase on Amazon EMR 182 Apache Flink, Apache Mahout, and Apache MXNet 184 Choosing the Right Analytics Tool 186 Amazon Elasticsearch Service 188 When to Use Elasticsearch 188 Elasticsearch Core Concepts (the ELK Stack) 189 Amazon Elasticsearch Service 191 Amazon Redshift 192 What is Data Warehousing? 192 What is Redshift? 193 Redshift Architecture 195 Redshift AQUA 198 Redshift Scalability 199 Data Modeling in Redshift 205 Data Loading and Unloading 213 Query Optimization in Redshift 217 Security in Redshift 221 Kinesis Data Analytics 225 How Does It Work? 226 What is Kinesis Data Analytics for Java? 228 Comparing Batch Processing Services 229 Comparing Orchestration Options on AWS 230 AWS Step Functions 230 Comparing Different ETL Orchestration Options 230 Summary 231 Exam Essentials 232 Exercises 232 Review Questions 235 References 237 Recommended Workshops 237 Amazon Athena Blogs 238 Amazon Redshift Blogs 240 Amazon EMR Blogs 241 Amazon Elasticsearch Blog 241 Amazon Redshift References and Further Reading 242 Chapter 5 Data Visualization 243 Introduction 244 Data Consumers 245 Data Visualization Options 246 Amazon QuickSight 247 Getting Started 248 Working with Data 250 Data Preparation 255 Data Analysis 256 Data Visualization 258 Machine Learning Insights 261 Building Dashboards 262 Embedding QuickSight Objects into Other Applications 264 Administration 265 Security 266 Other Visualization Options 267 Predictive Analytics 270 What is Predictive Analytics? 270 The AWS ML Stack 271 Summary 273 Exam Essentials 273 Exercises 274 Review Questions 275 References 276 Additional Reading Material 276 Chapter 6 Data Security 279 Introduction 280 Shared Responsibility Model 280 Security Services on AWS 282 AWS IAM Overview 285 IAM User 285 IAM Groups 286 IAM Roles 287 Amazon EMR Security 289 Public Subnet 290 Private Subnet 291 Security Configurations 293 Block Public Access 298 VPC Subnets 298 Security Options during Cluster Creation 299 EMR Security Summary 300 Amazon S3 Security 301 Managing Access to Data in Amazon S3 301 Data Protection in Amazon S3 305 Logging and Monitoring with Amazon S3 306 Best Practices for Security on Amazon S3 308 Amazon Athena Security 308 Managing Access to Amazon Athena 309 Data Protection in Amazon Athena 310 Data Encryption in Amazon Athena 311 Amazon Athena and AWS Lake Formation 312 Amazon Redshift Security 312 Levels of Security within Amazon Redshift 313 Data Protection in Amazon Redshift 315 Redshift Auditing 316 Redshift Logging 317 Amazon Elasticsearch Security 317 Elasticsearch Network Configuration 318 VPC Access 318 Accessing Amazon Elasticsearch and Kibana 319 Data Protection in Amazon Elasticsearch 322 Amazon Kinesis Security 325 Managing Access to Amazon Kinesis 325 Data Protection in Amazon Kinesis 326 Amazon Kinesis Best Practices 326 Amazon QuickSight Security 327 Managing Data Access with Amazon QuickSight 327 Data Protection 328 Logging and Monitoring 329 Security Best Practices 329 Amazon DynamoDB Security 329 Access Management in DynamoDB 329 IAM Policy with Fine-Grained Access Control 330 Identity Federation 331 How to Access Amazon DynamoDB 332 Data Protection with DynamoDB 332 Monitoring and Logging with DynamoDB 333 Summary 334 Exam Essentials 334 Exercises/Workshops 334 Review Questions 336 References and Further Reading 337 Appendix Answers to Review Questions 339 Chapter 1: History of Analytics and Big Data 340 Chapter 2: Data Collection 342 Chapter 3: Data Storage 343 Chapter 4: Data Processing and Analysis 344 Chapter 5: Data Visualization 346 Chapter 6: Data Security 346 Index 349

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition xiii About the Companion Website xvii I MATLAB Programming 1 1 Getting Started 3 1.1 Running the MATLAB IDE 3 Manipulating windows 5 1.2 MATLAB variables 5 Variable assignment statements 6 Variable names 7 Variable workspace 8 1.3 Numbers and functions 8 1.4 Documentation 9 1.5 Writing simple MATLAB scripts 10 Block structure 11 Appropriate variable names 11 Useful comments 11 Units 11 Formatting for clarity 12 Basic display command 12 1.6 A few words about errors and debugging 12 Error messages are your friends 13 Sketch a plan on paper first 13 Start small and add slowly 13 1.7 Using the debugger 13 Looking ahead 14 Programming Problems 14 2 Vectors and Strings 19 2.1 Vector basics 20 2.2 Operations on vectors 21 Multiplication by a scalar 21 Addition with a scalar 21 Element-by-element operation with two vectors 21 Functions of vectors 22 Length of vectors 22 Subarrays 23 Concatenating vectors 23 2.3 Special vector functions 23 Statistical Functions 24 2.4 Using rand and randi 25 2.5 String basics 25 2.6 String operations 27 2.7 Character vectors 29 2.8 Getting information from the user 30 Looking ahead 31 Programming Problems 31 3 Plotting 35 3.1 The plot command 35 Axis scaling 38 Plot labeling 39 3.2 Tabulating and plotting a simple function 39 3.3 Bar graphs and histograms 43 Histograms 45 3.4 Drawing several plots on one graph 45 Multiple plots with a single plot command 46 Combining multiple plots with a hold command 48 Thickening plotted curves 49 3.5 Adding lines and text 50 3.6 Changing object properties 52 Looking ahead 54 Programming Problems 55 4 Matrices 57 4.1 Entering and manipulating matrices 57 Size of a matrix 59 Matrix transpose 60 4.2 Operations on matrices 60 Arithmetic operations with a scalar 60 Addition and subtraction of two matrices of the same size 61 Functions of matrices 61 Matrix multiplication 62 The identity matrix 62 The inverse of a matrix 63 The determinant of a matrix 64 Matrix–vector multiplication 64 4.3 Solving linear systems: the backslash operator 65 Extended example: solving circuit problems 65 Wire segments 66 Wire junctions 66 Voltage sources 66 Resistors 67 Ground 67 4.4 Special matrix functions 71 Looking ahead 72 Programming Problems 72 5 Control Flow Commands 75 5.1 Conditional execution: the if statement 75 5.2 Logical expressions 79 5.3 Logical variables 80 5.4 for loops 81 Good programming practice 84 5.5 while loops 84 5.6 Other control flow commands 86 Switch-case statement 86 Break statement 86 Programming Problems 87 6 Animation 93 6.1 Basic animation 94 6.2 Animating function plots 98 6.3 Kinematics of motion 101 One-dimensional motion: constant speed 101 Motion with constant acceleration 104 Time-marching dynamics: nonconstant force 106 6.4 Looking ahead 108 Programming Problems 108 7 Writing Your Own MATLAB Functions 114 7.1 MATLAB function files 115 Declaring MATLAB functions 115 7.2 Function inputs and outputs 116 7.3 Local workspaces 117 7.4 Multiple outputs 117 7.5 Function files 117 7.6 Other functional forms 118 Subfunctions 118 Nested functions 122 Anonymous functions 122 7.7 Optional arguments for functions 123 7.8 Looking forward 124 Programming Problems 125 8 More MATLAB Data Classes and Structures 132 8.1 Cell arrays 132 8.2 Structures 133 8.3 Complex numbers 134 8.4 Function handles 135 8.5 Tables 135 8.6 Other data classes and data structures 136 Programming Problems 137 II Building Gui Tools 139 9 Building GUI Tools with App Designer 141 9.1 The App Designer interface 142 9.2 Getting started: HelloTool 144 9.3 Components communicating: SliderTool 148 9.4 Transforming a MATLAB program into a GUI tool: DampedEfieldTool 150 Step0: Write and debug the program 151 Step1: Plan the GUI 152 Step 2: Create the GUI in App Designer 153 Step 3: Connect program inputs and outputs to the GUI components 155 Step 4: Add callbacks to invoke the primary model function 157 9.5 Test and improve 157 Many ways to do things 159 Key points from this chapter 159 Programming Problems 160 10 More GUI Techniques 168 10.1 Sharing data between callbacks 169 10.2 More GUI components 170 Text and Numeric Edit Fields 170 Drop Down 171 Check Box 171 Label 172 List Box 172 Radio Button Group 173 Image 173 Communicating user choices 173 Tab Group 174 Menu bar 174 Toolbar 176 Text Area 176 The uses of invisibility 176 10.3 Popups 176 Progress dialogue 176 Wait bar 178 Input dialogue 178 Confirm dialogue 179 10.4 Responding to keyboard input 181 10.5 Mouse events and object dragging 181 III Advanced Topics 187 11 More Graphics 189 11.1 Logarithmic plots 189 11.2 Plotting functions on two axes 192 11.3 Plotting surfaces 194 11.4 Plotting vector fields 199 11.5 Working with images 200 Importing and manipulating bit-mapped images 200 Placing images on surface objects 207 11.6 Rotating composite objects in three dimensions 209 12 More Mathematics 213 12.1 Derivatives 214 Derivatives of mathematical functions expressed as MATLAB functions 214 Derivatives of tabulated functions 215 12.2 Integration 218 Integrating tabulated functions 218 Integrating mathematical functions expressed as MATLAB functions 221 12.3 Zeros of a function of one variable 225 12.4 Function minimization 227 Finding a minimum of a function of one variable 227 Multidimensional minimization 229 Fitting to an arbitrary function by multidimensional minimization 229 Solving simultaneous nonlinear equations by multidimensional minimization 233 12.5 Solving ordinary differential equations 235 Plotting a slope field 238 12.6 Eigenvalues and eigenvectors 239 13 Reading and Writing Files 242 13.1 Saving and loading data in .mat files 242 13.2 Reading and writing spreadsheet files 244 13.3 Writing text files 245 The write matrix command 245 Writing formatted text files 246 Formatting a string using sprintf 249 13.4 Reading data from a text file 249 Reading into a cell array 250 Reading complicated text data files 250 13.5 A GUI interface to filenames using uiputfile and uigetfile 252 Appendix Using latex Commands 255 Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisClear presentation of a new control process applied toinduction machine (IM), surface mounted permanent magnet synchronous motor (SMPM-SM) and interior permanent magnet synchronous motor (IPM-SM) Direct Eigen Control forInduction Machinesand Synchronous Motors provides a clear and consise explanation of a new method in alternating current (AC) motor control. Unlike similar books on the market, it does not present various control algorithms for each type of AC motor but explains one method designed to control all AC motor types: Induction Machine (IM), Surface Mounted Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (SMPM-SM) (i.e. Brushless) and Interior Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (IPM-SM). This totally new control method can be used not only for AC motor control but also to control input filter current and voltage of an inverter feeding an AC motor. Accessible and clear, describes a new fast type of motor control applied toinduction machineTable of ContentsForeword by Prof. Dr Ing. Jean-Luc Thomas xiii Foreword by Dr Abdelkrim Benchaïb xv Acknowledgements xvii Introduction xix 1 Induction Machine 1 1. 1 Electrical Equations and Equivalent Circuits 1 1. 2 Working out the State-Space Equation System 9 1. 3 Discretized State-Space Equation Inversion 22 1. 4 Control 31 1. 5 Conclusion on the Induction Machine Control 63 2 Surface-Mounted Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor 65 2. 1 Electrical Equations and Equivalent Circuit 66 2. 2 Working out the State-Space Equation System 69 2. 3 Discretized State-Space Equation Inversion 76 2. 4 Control 84 2. 5 Conclusion on SMPM-SM 118 3 Interior Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 121 3. 1 Electrical Equations and Equivalent Circuits 122 3. 2 Working out the State-Space Equation System 127 3. 3 Discretized State-Space Equation Inversion 134 3. 4 Control 143 3. 5 Conclusions on the IPM-SM 189 4 Inverter Supply – LC Filter 191 4. 1 Electrical Equations and Equivalent Circuit 191 4. 2 Working out the State-Space Equation System 193 4. 3 Discretized State-Space Equation Inversion 198 4. 4 Control 201 4. 5 Conclusions on Power LC Filter Stabilization 211 5 Conclusion 213 Appendix A Calculation of Vector PWM 217 A.1 PWM Types 218 A.2 Working out the Control Voltage Vector 218 A.3 Other Examples of Vector PWM 221 A.4 Sampled Shape of the Voltage and Current Waves 224 Appendix B Transfer Matrix Calculation 225 B.1 First Eigenvector Calculation 225 B.2 Second Eigenvector Calculation 227 B.3 Third Eigenvector Calculation 228 B.4 Fourth Eigenvector Calculation 230 B.5 Transfer Matrix Calculation 231 Appendix C Transfer Matrix Inversion 233 C.1 Transfer Matrix Determinant Calculation 234 C.2 First Row, First Column 234 C.3 First Row, Second Column 235 C.4 First Row, Third Column 235 C.5 First Row, Fourth Column 235 C.6 Second Row, First Column 236 C.7 Second Row, Second Column 236 C.8 Second Row, Third Column 236 C.9 Second Row, Fourth Column 237 C.10 Third Row, First Column 237 C.11 Third Row, Second Column 237 C.12 Third Row, Third Column 237 C.13 Third Row, Fourth Column 237 C.14 Fourth Row, First Column 238 C.15 Fourth Row, Second Column 238 C.16 Fourth Row, Third Column 238 C.17 Fourth Row, Fourth Column 238 C.18 Inverse Transfer Matrix Calculation 238 Appendix D State-Space Eigenvector Calculation 239 Appendix E F and G Matrix Calculations 245 E.1 Transition Matrix Calculation 245 E.2 Discretized Input Matrix Calculation 249 References 251 Index 253

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an in-depth look at the current and developing trends in the telecommunications industry, as well as examining the complex issues of developing, introducing, and managing cutting-edge technologies.Table of ContentsList of Figures xv About the Author xix Foreword xxi Preface xxiii Acknowledgments xxv List of Acronyms xxvii Part I NETWORKS 1 Carrier Networks 3 1.1 Operating Global Networks 3 1.1.1 The Power of Redundancy 4 1.1.2 The Virtuous Cycle 6 1.1.3 Measurement and Accountability 7 1.2 Engineering Global Networks 8 1.2.1 Architecture 8 1.2.2 Systems Engineering 8 1.2.3 Capacity Management 8 1.3 Network Taxonomy 10 1.3.1 Voice Systems 10 1.3.2 Data Systems 12 1.3.3 Networks 13 1.3.4 Network Systems 13 1.4 Summary 14 References 14 2 Network Systems Hardware 15 2.1 Models 15 2.2 Telco Systems Model 16 2.2.1 Form and Function 16 2.2.2 Frames and Shelves 20 2.2.3 Chassis 20 2.2.4 Line I/O 21 2.2.5 Power Supply Cards 25 2.2.6 Network Fabric Cards 25 2.2.7 Application Processing 28 2.3 Modular Computing – Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture (AdvancedTCA™) 29 2.3.1 Chassis 29 2.4 Blade Center Model 30 2.4.1 Midplane Design 31 2.4.2 Flexible High Speed Interconnection 32 2.4.3 Management Controller 32 2.4.4 Power and Fans 33 2.5 Summary 33 References 33 3 Network Systems Software 35 3.1 Carrier Grade Software 35 3.1.1 Real-Time 35 3.1.2 Reliable 36 3.1.3 Scalable 36 3.1.4 Upgradable and Manageable 38 3.2 Defensive Programming 38 3.2.1 Are You Really Sure? 38 3.2.2 Default Parameters 39 3.2.3 Heap Management 39 3.2.4 Exception Handling and Phased Recovery 39 3.2.5 Last Gasp Forensics 40 3.2.6 Buffer Discards and Dumps 40 3.3 Managed Objects 40 3.3.1 Administrative States 42 3.3.2 Service States 42 3.4 Operational Tests and Fault Conditions 43 3.4.1 Service Turn Up 43 3.4.2 Interrupt or Fault Induced 43 3.4.3 Out of Service Retries 43 3.4.4 On Demand 44 3.5 Alarms 44 3.5.1 Notifications 44 3.5.2 Severity 44 3.5.3 Scope 45 3.5.4 Creation and Persistence 46 3.5.5 Ethernet NIC Example 46 3.6 Network System Data Management 49 3.6.1 Management Information Bases (MIBs) 51 3.6.2 Syslog 52 3.6.3 Audits 53 3.7 Summary 54 References 54 4 Service and Network Objectives 55 4.1 Consumer Wireline Voice 55 4.1.1 Service Request 55 4.1.2 Address Signaling 56 4.1.3 Call Setup 56 4.1.4 Alerting 56 4.1.5 Call Completion 56 4.1.6 Disconnect 56 4.1.7 Network Service Objectives 57 4.1.8 Consumer Wireline Voice Network Model 57 4.1.9 Local Loops 58 4.1.10 Originating Office A 58 4.1.11 Toll Connect Group A–C 59 4.1.12 Tandem Office C 60 4.1.13 Toll Completing Group C–B 60 4.1.14 Terminating Office B 60 4.1.15 Long Term Downtime 60 4.1.16 Measurement Summary 60 4.2 Enterprise Voice over IP Service 61 4.2.1 Five 9’s 61 4.2.2 Meaningful and Measurable Objectives 61 4.3 Technology Transitions 65 4.4 Summary 66 References 66 5 Access and Aggregation Networks 69 5.1 Wireline Networks 70 5.1.1 Voice Services 70 5.1.2 Broadband Services 74 5.1.3 DSL 74 5.1.4 DSL Design and Engineering 76 5.1.5 DSL Operations 79 5.1.6 DSL Objectives, Metrics, and Line Management 80 5.1.7 ADSL Aggregation Networks 82 5.1.8 ADSL2+ and VDSL Aggregation Networks 82 5.1.9 Fiber to the Home (FTTH) 83 5.1.10 Fiber to the Curb (FTTC) 87 5.1.11 Fiber to the Node (FTTN) 87 5.1.12 FTTH Design and Engineering 87 5.1.13 FTTH Operations 90 5.1.14 FTTH Aggregation Networks 91 5.2 Hybrid Fiber Coax (HFC) Networks 92 5.2.1 Node Design 93 5.2.2 Digital TV 93 5.2.3 DOCSIS 94 5.2.4 HFC Design and Engineering 94 5.2.5 HFC Operations 95 5.3 Wireless Mobile Networks 96 5.3.1 GSM 97 5.3.2 Universal Mobile Telecommunications Systems (UMTS) 106 5.3.3 Long Term Evolution (LTE) 111 5.4 Wireless Design and Engineering 118 5.4.1 Air Interface 118 5.4.2 Mobility 121 5.4.3 Inter-Radio Access Technology (IRAT) 122 5.4.4 Device Behavior 122 5.5 Summary 123 References 123 6 Backbone Networks 125 6.1 Transport 127 6.1.1 Transport Services 127 6.1.2 Transport Resiliency and Protection 130 6.2 IP Core 135 6.2.1 Regional IP Backbones 136 6.2.2 Points of Presence (POPs) 137 6.2.3 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) 137 6.2.4 Route Reflectors 143 6.3 Backbone Design and Engineering 143 6.3.1 Location and Size of POPs 144 6.3.2 Fault Recovery 144 6.3.3 Quality of Service QoS 145 6.3.4 Traffic Demand 146 6.3.5 Control Plane 146 6.4 Summary 147 References 147 7 Cloud Services 149 7.1 Competition 149 7.2 Defining the Cloud 150 7.2.1 Architecture 150 7.2.2 Infrastructure 151 7.2.3 Intelligent Networks and Intelligent Clouds 152 7.2.4 Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) 156 7.2.5 Application Servers and Enablers 162 7.2.6 IMS Design and Engineering 164 7.3 Cloud Services 166 7.3.1 Network-Based Security 166 7.3.2 Voice over IP (VoIP) Services 167 7.3.3 Conferencing 170 7.3.4 Compute and Storage 170 7.3.5 The Mobile Cloud 170 7.4 Summary 171 References 171 8 Network Peering and Interconnection 173 8.1 Wireline Voice 173 8.1.1 Interexchange Carriers (IXCs) 174 8.1.2 Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs) 177 8.2 SS7 Interconnection 178 8.2.1 Services 178 8.3 IP Interconnection 180 8.3.1 VPN Peering 180 8.3.2 Internet Peering 180 8.3.3 Public Peering 183 8.3.4 Mobility Peering 185 8.4 Summary 187 References 188 Part II TEAMS AND SYSTEMS 9 Engineering and Operations 191 9.1 Engineering 192 9.1.1 Systems Engineers 192 9.1.2 Network Planning 196 9.1.3 Network and Central Office Engineers 196 9.1.4 Outside Plant Engineers 197 9.1.5 Common Systems Engineers 197 9.2 Operations 197 9.2.1 Network Operations Center (NOCs) 198 9.2.2 Tiered Maintenance 202 9.3 Summary 204 References 205 10 Customer Marketing, Sales, and Care 207 10.1 Industry Markets 207 10.1.1 Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs) 207 10.1.2 Interexchange Carriers (IXCs) 210 10.2 Consumer Markets 211 10.2.1 Product Marketing 212 10.2.2 Consumer Care 214 10.3 Enterprise Markets 218 10.3.1 Pre-Sales Support 219 10.3.2 Sales Support 220 10.3.3 Engineering and Implementation 220 10.4 Summary 220 References 221 11 Fault Management 223 11.1 Network Management Work Groups 223 11.2 Systems Planes 224 11.2.1 Bearer Planes 224 11.2.2 Control Planes 225 11.2.3 Management Planes 226 11.3 Management Systems 227 11.3.1 Network Management Systems 227 11.3.2 Element Management Systems 230 11.3.3 Network Elements 231 11.3.4 Management Interfaces 231 11.3.5 Specialized Management Systems 240 11.4 Management Domains 244 11.4.1 Optical Networks 245 11.4.2 IP/MPLS Networks 246 11.4.3 Other Domains 247 11.5 Network Management and the Virtuous Cycle 247 11.5.1 Notifications 247 11.5.2 Sectionalization 249 11.5.3 Fault Isolation 249 11.6 Summary 250 References 251 12 Support Systems 253 12.1 Support Systems Standards and Design 253 12.2 Capacity Management Systems 255 12.2.1 Work Groups 256 12.2.2 Data Collection 257 12.2.3 Engineering Rules 259 12.2.4 Capacity Management Applications 260 12.2.5 Supply Chain Management 261 12.3 Service Fulfillment 261 12.3.1 Offers and Proposals 262 12.3.2 Service Ordering 264 12.3.3 Service Activation 267 12.4 Design and Engineering 268 12.5 Summary 268 References 268 Part III TRANSFORMATION 13 Integration and Innovation 271 13.1 Technology Integration 271 13.1.1 Technology Scanning 272 13.1.2 Technology Selection 273 13.1.3 Network System Testing and Verification 277 13.1.4 Support Systems Integration 287 13.2 Lifecycle Support 288 13.3 Invention and Innovation 290 13.3.1 The Role of Research 291 13.3.2 The Bridge to Research 292 13.4 Summary 295 References 296 14 Disasters and Outages 297 14.1 Disasters 297 14.1.1 Carrier Teams 298 14.1.2 Disaster Response 300 14.1.3 Engineering and Design 300 14.2 Outages 302 14.2.1 Anatomy of an Outage 302 14.2.2 Congestion Onset 307 14.2.3 Congestion Propagation 307 14.2.4 Root Cause 308 14.2.5 Contributing Cause 309 14.2.6 Triggering Events 309 14.2.7 Teams in an Outage 309 14.2.8 Press and External Affairs 311 14.3 The Vicious Cycle 313 14.3.1 Engineering and Operational Defense 314 14.4 Summary 316 References 316 15 Technologies that Matter 317 15.1 Convergence or Conspiracy? 317 15.1.1 Enter the World Wide Web 318 15.1.2 Silicon Valley – A Silent Partner 318 15.1.3 US Telecommunication Policy 318 15.1.4 The Conspiracy – A Confluence of Events 319 15.1.5 Local Phone Service in Jeopardy 320 15.1.6 Technologies in Response 322 15.2 Technologies Beyond 2012 324 15.2.1 IPv6 324 15.2.2 Invisible Computing 332 15.2.3 Beyond 400G 334 15.3 HTML5 and WEBRTC 335 15.3.1 Video Evolution 337 15.3.2 High Definition Voice 338 15.4 Summary 340 References 341 16 Carriers Transformed 343 16.1 Historical Transformations 343 16.1.1 Stored Program Control Switching 1965–1985 343 16.1.2 Digital Wireline Communications 1975–2000 344 16.1.3 Digital Wireless Communication 1990–Onwards 345 16.2 Regulation and Investment 346 16.2.1 Regulation 346 16.2.2 Investment 347 16.3 Consumer Wireline Networks and Services 347 16.3.1 Market Trends 347 16.3.2 Technology 348 16.4 Wireless Networks and Services 351 16.4.1 Market Trends 351 16.4.2 Technology 352 16.5 Backbone Networks 352 16.6 Science and Technology Matter 353 References 353 Appendix A: IPv6 Technologies 355 Appendix B: The Next Generation Network and Why We’ll Never See It 361 Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book discusses in-depth the concept of distributed artificial intelligence (DAI) and its application to cognitive communications In this book, the authors present an overview of cognitive communications, encompassing both cognitive radio and cognitive networks, and also other application areas such as cognitive acoustics. The book also explains the specific rationale for the integration of different forms of distributed artificial intelligence into cognitive communications, something which is often neglected in many forms of technical contributions available today. Furthermore, the chapters are divided into four disciplines: wireless communications, distributed artificial intelligence, regulatory policy and economics and implementation. The book contains contributions from leading experts (academia and industry) in the field. Key Features: Covers the broader field of cognitive communications as a whole, addressing application to communication systemsTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Tables xxv About the Editors xxvii Preface xxix PART I INTRODUCTION 1 Introduction to Cognitive Communications 3 David Grace 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 A NewWay of Thinking 4 1.3 History of Cognitive Communications 6 1.4 Key Components of Cognitive Communications 8 1.5 Overview of the Rest of the Book 9 1.5.1 Part 2: Wireless Communications 10 1.5.2 Part 3: Application of Distributed Artificial Intelligence 11 1.5.3 Part 4: Regulatory Policy and Economics 12 1.5.4 Part 5: Implementation 13 1.6 Summary and Conclusion 14 References 14 PART II WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS 2 Cognitive Radio and Networks for Heterogeneous Networking 19 Haesik Kim and Aarne M€ammel€a 2.1 Introduction 19 2.1.1 Historical Sketch 19 2.1.2 Cognitive Radio and Networks 21 2.1.3 Heterogeneous Networks 22 2.2 Cognitive Radio for Heterogeneous Networks 26 2.2.1 Channel Sensing and Network Sensing 26 2.2.2 Interference Mitigation 27 2.2.3 Power Control 31 2.3 Applying Cognitive Networks to Heterogeneous Networks 37 2.3.1 Network Policy for Coexistence of Different Networks 37 2.3.2 Cooperation Mechanisms 39 2.3.3 Network Resource Allocation 41 2.3.4 Self-Organization Mechanisms 44 2.3.5 Handover Mechanisms 45 2.4 Performance Evaluation 47 2.5 Conclusion 50 References 50 3 Channel Assignment and Power Allocation Algorithms in Multi-Carrier-Based Cognitive Radio Environments 53 Musbah Shaat and Faouzi Bader 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 The Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Transmission Scheme 54 3.2.1 Why OFDM is Appropriate for CR 55 3.3 Resource Management in Non-Cognitive OFDM Environments 56 3.3.1 Single User OFDM Systems 56 3.3.2 Multiple User OFDM Systems (OFDMA) 57 3.3.3 Resource Allocation Algorithms in Non-Cognitive OFDM Systems 58 3.4 Resource Management in OFDM-Based Cognitive Radio Systems 58 3.4.1 Algorithms Dealing with In-Band Interference 59 3.4.2 Algorithms Dealing with Mutual Interference 60 3.4.3 System Model 61 3.4.4 Problem Formulation 63 3.4.5 Resource Management in Downlink OFDM-Based CR Systems 64 3.4.6 Resource Management in Uplink OFDM-Based CR Systems 76 3.5 Conclusions 88 References 89 4 Filter Bank Techniques for Multi-Carrier Cognitive Radio Systems 93 Yun Cui, Zhifeng Zhao, Rongpeng Li, Guangchao Zhang and Honggang Zhang 4.1 Introduction 93 4.2 Basic Features of Filter Banks-Based Multi-Carrier Techniques 94 4.2.1 Introduction to the Filter Bank System 95 4.2.2 The Polyphase Structure of Filter Banks 96 4.2.3 Basic Structure of Filter Banks-Based Multi-Carrier Systems 97 4.3 Adaptive Threshold Enhanced Filter Bank for Spectrum Detection in IEEE 802.22 98 4.3.1 Multi-Stage Analysis Filter Banks for Spectrum Detection 99 4.3.2 Complexity and Detection Precision Analysis 101 4.3.3 Spectrum Detection in IEEE 802.22 103 4.3.4 Power Estimation with Adaptive Threshold 106 4.4 Transform Decomposition for Spectrum Interleaving in Multi-Carrier Cognitive Radio Systems 108 4.4.1 FFT Pruning in Cognitive Radio Systems 108 4.4.2 Transform Decomposition for General DFT 110 4.4.3 Improved Transform Decomposition Method for DFT with Sparse Input Points 111 4.4.4 Numerical Results and Computational Complexity Analysis 114 4.5 Remaining Problems in Filter Banks-Based Multi-Carrier Systems 115 4.6 Summary and Conclusion 117 References 117 5 Distributed Clustering of Cognitive Radio Networks: A Message-Passing Approach 119 Kareem E. Baddour, Oktay Ureten and Tricia J. Willink 5.1 Introduction 119 5.1.1 Inter-Node Collaboration in Decentralized Cognitive Networks 119 5.1.2 Scalability Issues and Overhead Costs 120 5.1.3 Self-Organization Based on Distributed Clustering 120 5.2 Clustering Techniques for Cognitive Radio Networks 122 5.3 A Message-Passing Clustering Approach Based on Affinity Propagation 124 5.4 Case Studies 126 5.4.1 Clustering Based on Local Spectrum Availability 127 5.4.2 Sensor Selection for Cooperative Spectrum Sensing 132 5.5 Implementation Challenges 138 5.6 Conclusions 140 References 140 PART III APPLICATION OF DISTRIBUTED ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 6 Machine Learning Applied to Cognitive Communications 145 Aimilia Bantouna, Kostas Tsagkaris, Vera Stavroulaki, Panagiotis Demestichas and Giorgos Poulios 6.1 Introduction 145 6.2 State of the Art 146 6.3 Learning Techniques 148 6.3.1 Bayesian Statistics 148 6.3.2 Supervised Neural Networks (NNs) 150 6.3.3 Self-Organizing Maps (SOMs): An Unsupervised Neural Network 153 6.3.4 Reinforcement Learning 157 6.4 Advantages and Disadvantages of Applying Machine Learning to Cognitive Radio Networks 158 6.5 Conclusions 159 Acknowledgement 160 References 160 7 Reinforcement Learning for Distributed Power Control and Channel Access in Cognitive Wireless Mesh Networks 163 Xianfu Chen, Zhifeng Zhao and Honggang Zhang 7.1 Introduction 163 7.2 Applying Reinforcement Learning to Distributed Power Control and Channel Access 165 7.2.1 Conjecture-Based Multi-Agent Q-Learning for Distributed Power Control in CogMesh 165 7.2.2 Learning with Dynamic Conjectures for Opportunistic Spectrum Access in CogMesh 176 7.3 Future Challenges 191 7.4 Conclusions 192 References 192 8 Reinforcement Learning-Based Cognitive Radio for Open Spectrum Access 195 Tao Jiang and David Grace 8.1 Open Spectrum Access 195 8.2 Reinforcement Learning-Based Spectrum Sharing in Open Spectrum Bands 196 8.2.1 Learning Model 196 8.2.2 Basic Algorithms 200 8.2.3 Performance 200 8.3 Exploration Control and Efficient Exploration for Reinforcement Learning-Based Cognitive Radio 208 8.3.1 Exploration Control Techniques for Cognitive Radios 208 8.3.2 Efficient Exploration Techniques and Learning Efficiency for Cognitive Radios 218 8.4 Conclusion 229 References 230 9 Learning Techniques for Context Diagnosis and Prediction in Cognitive Communications 231 Aimilia Bantouna, Kostas Tsagkaris, Vera Stavroulaki, Giorgos Poulios and Panagiotis Demestichas 9.1 Introduction 231 9.2 Prediction 232 9.2.1 Building Knowledge: Learning Network Capabilities and User Preferences/ Behaviours 232 9.2.2 Application to Context Diagnosis and Prediction: The Case of Congestion 248 9.3 Future Problems 253 9.4 Conclusions 254 References 255 10 Social Behaviour in Cognitive Radio 257 Husheng Li 10.1 Introduction 257 10.2 Social Behaviour in Cognitive Radio 258 10.2.1 Cooperation Formation 258 10.2.2 Channel Recommendations 261 10.3 Social Network Analysis 267 10.3.1 Model of Recommendation Mechanism 267 10.3.2 Interacting Particles 268 10.3.3 Epidemic Propagation 273 10.4 Conclusions 281 References 281 PART IV REGULATORY POLICY AND ECONOMICS 11 Regulatory Policy and Economics of Cognitive Radio for Secondary Spectrum Access 285 Maziar Nekovee and Peter Anker 11.1 Introduction 285 11.2 Spectrum Regulations: Why and How? 286 11.3 Overview of Regulatory Bodies and Their Inter-Relation 287 11.3.1 ITU 287 11.3.2 CEPT/ECC 288 11.3.3 European Union 289 11.3.4 ETSI 290 11.3.5 National Spectrum Management Authority 291 11.4 Why Secondary Spectrum Access? 291 11.5 Candidate Bands for Secondary Access 293 11.5.1 Terrestrial Broadcasting Bands 294 11.5.2 Radar Bands 294 11.5.3 IMT Bands 295 11.5.4 Military Bands 296 11.6 Regulatory and Policy Issues 296 11.6.1 UK Regulatory Environment 300 11.6.2 US Regulatory Environment 301 11.6.3 European Regulatory Environment 302 11.6.4 Regulatory Environments Elsewhere 303 11.7 Technology Enablers and Options for Secondary Sharing 304 11.7.1 Cognitive Radio 304 11.7.2 Technology Options for Secondary Access 306 11.8 Economic Impact and Business Opportunities of SSA 308 11.8.1 Stakeholders and Economic of SSA 309 11.8.2 Use Cases and Business Models 310 11.9 Outlook 313 11.10 Conclusions 314 Acknowledgements 315 References 315 PART V IMPLEMENTATION 12 Cognitive Radio Networks in TV White Spaces 321 Maziar Nekovee and Dave Wisely 12.1 Introduction 321 12.2 Research and Development Challenges 324 12.2.1 Geolocation Databases 324 12.2.2 Sensing 327 12.2.3 Beacons 330 12.2.4 Physical Layer 330 12.2.5 System Issues 331 12.2.6 Devices 335 12.3 Regulation and Standardization 335 12.3.1 Regulation 335 12.3.2 Standardization 338 12.4 Quantifying Spectrum Opportunities 343 12.5 Commercial Use Cases 346 12.6 Conclusions 354 Acknowledgement 355 References 355 13 Cognitive Femtocell Networks 359 Faisal Tariq and Laurence S. Dooley 13.1 Introduction 359 13.2 Femtocell Network Architecture 361 13.2.1 Underlay and Overlay Architectures for Femtocell Networks 362 13.2.2 Home Femtocell and Enterprise Femtocell 366 13.2.3 Access Mechanism: Closed, Open and Hybrid Access 369 13.2.4 Possible Operating Spectrum 371 13.3 Interference Management Strategies 372 13.3.1 Cross-Tier Interference Management 373 13.3.2 Intra-Tier Interference Management 376 13.4 Self Organized Femtocell Networks (SOFN) 381 13.4.1 Self-Configuration 383 13.4.2 Self-Optimization 383 13.4.3 Self-Healing and Self-Protection 388 13.5 Future Research Directions 388 13.5.1 Green Femtocell Networks 388 13.5.2 Communication Hub for Smart Homes 389 13.5.3 MIMO-Based Interference Alignment for Femtocell Networks 389 13.5.4 Enhanced FFR 390 13.5.5 CoMP-Based Femtocell Network 391 13.5.6 Holistic Approach to SOFN 391 13.6 Conclusion 391 References 391 14 Cognitive Acoustics: A Way to Extend the Lifetime of Underwater Acoustic Sensor Networks 395 Lu Jin, Defeng (David) Huang, Lin Zou and Angela Ying Jun Zhang 14.1 The Concept of Cognitive Acoustics 395 14.2 Underwater Acoustic Communication Channel 397 14.2.1 Propagation Delay 397 14.2.2 Severe Attenuation 397 14.2.3 Ambient Noise 398 14.3 Some Distinct Features of Cognitive Acoustics 401 14.3.1 Purposes of Deployment 401 14.3.2 Grey Space 402 14.3.3 Cost of Field Measurement and System Deployment 402 14.4 Fundamentals of Reinforcement Learning 402 14.4.1 Markov Decision Process 402 14.4.2 Reinforcement Learning 403 14.4.3 Q-Learning 403 14.5 An Application Scenario: Underwater Acoustic Sensor Networks 404 14.5.1 System Description 404 14.5.2 State Space, Action Set and Transition Probabilities 406 14.5.3 Reward Function 407 14.5.4 Routing Protocol Discussion 409 14.6 Numerical Results 410 14.7 Conclusion 414 Acknowledgements 414 References 414 15 CMOS RF Transceiver Considerations for DSA 417 Mark S. Oude Alink, Eric A.M. Klumperink, Andre B.J. Kokkeler, Gerard J.M. Smit and Bram Nauta 15.1 Introduction 417 15.1.1 Terminology 418 15.1.2 Transceivers for DSA: More than an ADC and DAC 420 15.1.3 Flexible Software-Defined Transceiver 421 15.1.4 Why CMOS Transceivers? 421 15.2 DSATransceiver Requirements 421 15.3 Mathematical Abstraction 423 15.4 Filters 426 15.4.1 Integrated Filters 426 15.4.2 External Filters 427 15.5 Receiver Considerations and Implementation 428 15.5.1 Sub-Sampling Receiver 429 15.5.2 Heterodyne Receivers 430 15.5.3 Direct-Conversion Receivers 432 15.6 Cognitive Radio Receivers 436 15.6.1 Wideband RF-Section 436 15.6.2 No External RF-Filterbank 437 15.6.3 Wideband Frequency Generation 447 15.7 Transmitter Considerations and Implementation 449 15.8 Cognitive Radio Transmitters 451 15.8.1 Improving Transmitter Linearity 451 15.8.2 Reducing Harmonic Components 452 15.8.3 The Polyphase Multipath Technique 453 15.9 Spectrum Sensing 456 15.9.1 Analogue Windowing 458 15.9.2 Channelized Receiver 459 15.9.3 Crosscorrelation Spectrum Sensing 459 15.9.4 Improved Image and Harmonic Rejection Using Crosscorrelation 461 15.10 Summary and Conclusions 462 References 462 Index 465

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers an unified treatment of the problems solved by publish/subscribe, how to design and implement the solutions In this book, the author provides an insight into the publish/subscribe technology including the design, implementation, and evaluation of new systems based on the technology. The book also addresses the basic design patterns and solutions, and discusses their application in practical application scenarios. Furthermore, the author examines current standards and industry best practices as well as recent research proposals in the area. Finally, necessary content matching, filtering, and aggregation algorithms and data structures are extensively covered as well as the mechanisms needed for realizing distributed publish/subscribe across the Internet. Key Features: Addresses the basic design patterns and solutions Covers applications and example cases including; combining Publish/Subscribe with cloud, Twitter, Facebook, moTable of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Notes on Contributors xv Preface xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Components of a Pub/Sub System 4 1.2.1 Basic System 4 1.2.2 Distribution and Overlay Networks 5 1.2.3 Agreements 6 1.2.4 The Event Loop 7 1.2.5 Basic Properties 7 1.3 A Pub/Sub Service Model 9 1.4 Distributed Pub/Sub 10 1.5 Interfaces and Operations 11 1.6 Pub/Sub Semantics for Targeted Delivery 13 1.7 Communication Techniques 15 1.8 Environments 17 1.9 History 18 1.9.1 Research Systems 19 1.9.2 Standards 22 1.9.3 Internet Technology 23 1.9.4 A Taxonomy 24 1.10 Application Areas 26 1.11 Structure of the Book 27 References 29 2 Networking and Messaging 31 2.1 Networking 31 2.1.1 Overview 31 2.1.2 Sockets, Middleware, and Applications 33 2.1.3 Naming and Addressing 34 2.1.4 Organization 35 2.1.5 Firewalls and NATs 35 2.2 Multicast 36 2.2.1 IP (Network Layer) IP-Multicast 36 2.2.2 Application-Layer Multicast 38 2.3 Reverse Path Forwarding and Routing 38 2.4 Causality and Clocks 39 2.4.1 Causal Ordering and Lamport Clocks 39 2.4.2 Vector Clocks 40 2.4.3 Total Ordering 40 2.4.4 Discussion 41 2.5 Message Passing and RPC/RMI 42 2.5.1 Store and Forward 44 2.5.2 Concurrent Message Processing 44 2.5.3 Semantics and QoS 46 2.6 Web Services 46 2.6.1 Overview 47 2.6.2 Asynchronous Processing 48 2.6.3 The Connector Model 49 2.6.4 Web Service Platform 50 2.6.5 Enterprise Service Bus (ESB) 52 2.6.6 Service Composition 52 2.7 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) 53 2.7.1 SIP Framework 53 2.7.2 Method Types 54 2.7.3 Establishing a Session 55 2.7.4 Extensions 55 2.8 Summary 56 References 56 3 Overlay Networks and Distributed Hash Tables 59 3.1 Overview 59 3.2 Usage 61 3.3 Consistent Hashing 62 3.4 Geometries 63 3.5 DHTs 64 3.5.1 DHT APIs 65 3.5.2 Chord 65 3.5.3 Pastry 67 3.5.4 Discussion 72 3.6 Gossip Systems 73 3.6.1 Overview 73 3.6.2 View Shuffling 75 3.6.3 Gossip for Pub/Sub 76 3.7 Summary 77 References 77 4 Principles and Patterns 79 4.1 Introduction 79 4.2 General Pub/Sub Model 80 4.2.1 Principles and Characteristics 80 4.2.2 Message Service 82 4.2.3 General Patterns 82 4.2.4 Event Notification Patterns 82 4.3 Architectural Patterns 83 4.4 Design Patterns 85 4.4.1 Structural Patterns 85 4.4.2 Behavioural Patterns 86 4.4.3 Concurrency Patterns 86 4.5 Design Patterns for Pub/Sub 86 4.5.1 Broker 86 4.5.2 Observer 87 4.5.3 Model-View-Control (MVC) 89 4.5.4 Rendezvous Point 91 4.5.5 Handoff with Rendezvous 91 4.5.6 Client-Initiated Connection 92 4.5.7 Other Patterns 93 4.6 Event Notifier Pattern 94 4.6.1 Overview 94 4.6.2 Structure 95 4.6.3 Distributed Event Notifier 97 4.6.4 Design Considerations 98 4.7 Enterprise Integration Patterns 101 4.8 Summary 103 References 103 5 Standards and Products 105 5.1 CORBA Event Service 105 5.2 CORBA Notification Service and Channel Management 106 5.3 OMG Data Distribution Service (DDS) 109 5.3.1 Overview 110 5.3.2 QoS Policies 111 5.3.3 Real-Time Communications 111 5.3.4 Applications 112 5.4 SIP Event Framework 113 5.5 Java Delegation Event Model 114 5.6 Java Distributed Event Model 114 5.7 Java Message Service (JMS) 115 5.7.1 Two Communication Models 116 5.7.2 Message Types and Selection 117 5.7.3 JMS Process 118 5.7.4 Message Delivery 120 5.7.5 Transactions 121 5.7.6 Advanced Issues 121 5.7.7 JMS in Java EE and Implementations 121 5.8 TibCo Rendezvous 122 5.9 COM+ and .NET 123 5.10 Websphere MQ 125 5.10.1 Overview 125 5.10.2 Pub/Sub in WebSphere MQ 126 5.11 Advanced Message Queuing Protocol (AMQP) 127 5.12 MQ Telemetry Transport (MQTT) 129 5.13 Summary 130 References 132 6 Web Technology 133 6.1 REST 133 6.2 AJAX 134 6.3 RSS and Atom 135 6.4 SOAP 137 6.5 XMPP 139 6.6 Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP) 140 6.7 W3C DOM Events 141 6.8 WS-Eventing and WS-Notification 142 6.9 Summary 143 References 143 7 Distributed Publish/Subscribe 145 7.1 Overview 145 7.2 Filtering Content 148 7.3 Routing Function 150 7.4 Topic-Based Routing 153 7.4.1 Mechanisms 154 7.4.2 Channelization Problem 154 7.4.3 Distributed Overlay with Many Topics 155 7.4.4 Dynamic Clustering in Topic-Based Pub/Sub 155 7.4.5 Summary 155 7.5 Filter-Based Routing 155 7.6 Content-Based Routing 157 7.6.1 Addressing Model 158 7.6.2 Propagating Routing Information 159 7.6.3 Routing Behaviour: Subscriptions 160 7.6.4 Routing Behaviour: Advertisements 161 7.6.5 Routing Tables 162 7.6.6 Forwarding 163 7.6.7 Performance Issues 164 7.6.8 A Generalized Broker with Advertisements 164 7.7 Rendezvous-Based Routing 166 7.8 Routing Invariants 167 7.8.1 Configurations 167 7.8.2 Pub/Sub Configurations 168 7.8.3 False Positives and Negatives 169 7.8.4 Weakly Valid Routing Configuration 169 7.8.5 Mobility-Safety 170 7.8.6 Stabilization and Eventual Correctness 170 7.8.7 Soft State 171 7.9 Summary 172 References 174 8 Matching Content Against Constraints 177 8.1 Overview 177 8.2 Matching Techniques 178 8.3 Filter Preliminaries 180 8.4 The Counting Algorithm 181 8.4.1 Overview 182 8.4.2 Algorithms 183 8.5 Matching with Posets 186 8.5.1 Poset Preliminaries 187 8.5.2 SIENA Poset 188 8.5.3 Poset-Derived Forest 191 8.5.4 Matching Events 192 8.6 Tree Matcher 193 8.7 XFilter and YFilter 194 8.8 Bloom Filters 196 8.8.1 Definition 197 8.8.2 Summary Subscriptions 198 8.8.3 Multicast Forwarding 198 8.8.4 Content-Based Forwarding 198 8.8.5 Multi-Level Bloom Filters 200 8.9 Summary 200 References 202 9 Research Solutions 205 9.1 Gryphon 205 9.2 The Cambridge Event Architecture (CEA) 207 9.3 Scalable Internet Event Notification Architecture (SIENA) 208 9.3.1 Event Namespace 209 9.3.2 Routing 209 9.3.3 Forwarding 210 9.3.4 Mobility Support 211 9.3.5 CBCB Routing Scheme 211 9.4 Elvin 213 9.4.1 Clustering 213 9.4.2 Federation 214 9.4.3 Quench 214 9.4.4 Mobile Support 214 9.4.5 Nondestructive Notification Receipt 215 9.5 JEDI 215 9.6 PADRES 217 9.6.1 Modular Design 217 9.6.2 Load Balancing 218 9.6.3 Composite Events 218 9.7 REDS 219 9.8 GREEN 220 9.9 Rebeca 220 9.10 XSIENA and StreamMine 221 9.11 Fuego Event Service 222 9.11.1 Fuego Middleware 222 9.11.2 Event Service 223 9.11.3 Filtering 224 9.11.4 Client-Side API 224 9.11.5 Event Router 224 9.11.6 Data Structures for Content-Based Routing 225 9.12 STEAM 227 9.13 ECho and JECho 227 9.14 DHT-Based Systems 228 9.14.1 Scribe 228 9.14.2 Bayeux and Tapestry 230 9.14.3 Hermes 231 9.14.4 Other Systems 233 9.15 Summary 234 References 235 10 IR-Style Document Dissemination in DHTs 239 10.1 Introduction 239 10.2 Data Model and Problem Statement 240 10.2.1 Data Model 240 10.2.2 Problem Statement and Challenges 241 10.3 STAIRS: Threshold-Based Document Filtering in DHTs 242 10.3.1 Overview of DHT-Based P2P Networks 242 10.3.2 Solution Framework 242 10.3.3 Document Forwarding Algorithm 244 10.4 Recent Progress and Discussion 246 10.4.1 Recent Progress 246 10.4.2 Discussion 247 10.5 Summary 248 References 248 11 Advanced Topics 251 11.1 Security 251 11.1.1 Overview 251 11.1.2 Security Threats 252 11.1.3 Security Issues in Pub/Sub Networks 253 11.1.4 EventGuard 254 11.1.5 QUIP 255 11.1.6 Hermes 255 11.1.7 Encrypting Attributes 257 11.1.8 Privacy 257 11.2 Composite Subscriptions 258 11.3 Filter Merging 260 11.4 Load Balancing 263 11.5 Content-Based Channelization 265 11.6 Reconfiguration 266 11.6.1 Middleware Component Reconfiguration 267 11.6.2 Topology Reconfiguration with Failures and Mobile Brokers 267 11.6.3 Self-Organizing Pub/Sub with Clustering 269 11.7 Mobility Support 270 11.7.1 Generic Pub/Sub Mobility 272 11.7.2 Graph Based Mobility with Optimizations 274 11.8 Congestion Control 277 11.8.1 Rate-Control Using Posets 277 11.8.2 Explicit Signalling 279 11.8.3 Rerouting to Avoid Congestion 279 11.9 Evaluation of Pub/Sub Systems 280 11.10 Summary 282 References 283 12 Applications 287 12.1 Cloud Computing 287 12.1.1 Pub/Sub for Cloud 288 12.1.2 The Windows Azure AppFabric Service Bus 288 12.1.3 Amazon Simple Queue Service (SQS) 291 12.1.4 PubNub 291 12.2 SOA and XML Brokering 292 12.3 Facebook Services 294 12.3.1 Facebook Messages 294 12.3.2 Facebook Chat and Messenger 295 12.4 PubSubHubbub 297 12.5 Complex Event Processing (CEP) 299 12.6 Online Advertisement 301 12.7 Online Multiplayer Games 303 12.8 Apple Push Notification Service (APNS) 303 12.9 Internet of Things 304 12.10 Summary 305 References 306 13 Clean-Slate Datacentric Pub/Sub Networking 309 13.1 Datacentric Communication Model 309 13.1.1 Naming of Data 310 13.1.2 Content Security 312 13.2 CCN 314 13.2.1 CCN Node Operation 314 13.2.2 CCN Transport Model 315 13.2.3 Interest Routing 316 13.3 PSIRP/PURSUIT 317 13.4 Internet Interdomain Structure 318 13.4.1 Policy Routing Problem 320 13.4.2 PURSUIT Global Rendezvous 321 13.5 Summary 323 References 325 14 Conclusions 327 Index 333

Read more less

Book SynopsisTaking a coherent and logical approach, this book describes the potential use of co-ordinated multipoint systems supported by radio over fiber. It covers an impressive breadth of topics, ranging from components, subsystem and system architecture, to network management and business perspectives.Trade Review“The book will be very useful for specialists in optical communications.” (Optics & Photonics News, 3 May 2013) Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Foreword xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxi List of Abbreviations xxiii 1 Background and Introduction 1 Paulo P. Monteiro, Atýlio Gameiro and Nathan J. Gomes 1.1 The Trends and Challenges to Achieving 4G Wireless 2 1.2 The FUTON Concept for Next-Generation Distributed and Heterogeneous Radio Architectures 8 1.3 Overview of this Book 12 2 Trends inWireless Communications 17 Aarne Mammela, Mika Lasanen and Jarno Pinola 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Basic Transmission Problems and Solutions 18 2.3 Regulation and Standardization 37 2.4 Conclusions 41 3 System Concepts for the Central Processing of Signals 47 Atýlio Gameiro and Daniel Castanheira 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Wireless Trends 48 3.3 Architecture Options 51 3.4 The Global Centralized Architecture 52 3.5 FUTON Scenarios 55 3.6 The Optical Infrastructure 58 3.7 Conclusions 60 4 Introduction to Radio over Fiber 61 Nathan J. Gomes and David Wake 4.1 Introduction 61 4.2 The Concept of a Radio over Fiber System 62 4.3 Categories of Radio over Fiber Systems 64 4.4 Performance of Radio over Fiber Systems 72 4.5 Applications of Radio over Fiber Technology 79 4.6 Conclusions 84 5 Radio over Fiber System Design for Distributed Broadband Wireless Systems 91 David Wake and Nathan J. Gomes 5.1 Introduction 91 5.2 Radio over Fiber Link Design Issues 93 5.3 Example Link Design 97 5.4 Analog or Digital Transmission? 108 5.5 Conclusions 110 6 Optical Network Architectures for the Support of Future Wireless Systems 113 Sýlvia Pato and Jo~ao Pedro 6.1 Introduction 113 6.2 Using PONs to Support Radio over Fiber Services 114 6.3 Candidate Architectures 117 6.4 Power-Loss Budget Analysis 122 6.5 Comparative Economic Analysis 128 6.6 Support of Legacy Systems 130 6.7 Conclusions 131 7 Optical Transmitters for Low-Cost Broadband Transport 133 Guilhem de Valicourt, Romain Brenot, Frederic Van Dijk and Guanghua Duan 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Basics of Semiconductor Lasers and Reflective SOAs 133 7.3 Semiconductor Lasers for Radio over Fiber Applications 139 7.4 Reflective Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers 148 7.5 Conclusions 157 8 Algorithms for Coordinated Multipoint Techniques 159 Fabian Diehm, Mohamed Kamoun and Gerhard Fettweis 8.1 Introduction 159 8.2 Basic Ideas about CoMP 160 8.3 CoMP in Cellular Systems: Benefits and Practical Design 163 8.4 Numerical Illustrations of CoMP Concepts 169 8.5 CoMP in the FUTON System Concept 174 8.6 The FUTON Prototype: CoMP with the FUTON RoF Architecture 177 8.7 Conclusions 186 9 Cross-Layer Resource Allocation and Scheduling 191 Ilkka Harjula, Mikko Hiivala, Vinay Uday Prabhu, Dimitris Toumpakaris and Huiling Zhu 9.1 Introduction 191 9.2 Low-Complexity Chunk-Based Resource Allocation for the Downlink 192 9.3 Modified MAC-Aware Per-User Unitary Rate Control Scheme 197 9.4 Channel Estimation Based on Superimposed Pilots 201 9.5 Conclusions 209 10 Compensation of Impairments in the Radio over Fiber Infrastructure 211 Atso Hekkala, Mika Lasanen, Mikko Hiivala, Luis Vieira, Nathan J. Gomes, Vincent Kotzsch and Gerhard Fettweis 10.1 Introduction 211 10.2 Compensation Techniques for RoF Links 212 10.3 RoF Link Model 214 10.4 Distortion Compensation Algorithms and Architectures 222 10.5 Distortion Compensation Analyses, Simulations and Measurements 227 10.6 Impact of Timing Delays in Centralized Distributed Antenna Systems 232 10.7 Conclusions 243 11 Radio over Fiber Network Management 247 Carlos Santiago, Bodhisattwa Gangopadhyay and ArturArsenio 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Overview of RoF Management Systems 248 11.3 RoF Manager Architecture 251 11.4 Interoperation of RoF Manager and Middleware 256 11.5 Conclusions 262 12 System-Level Evaluation 265 Ramiro Samano-Robles and Atýlio Gameiro 12.1 Introduction 265 12.2 System-Level Simulation of Wireless Networks and DAS 269 12.3 The FUTON System-Level Simulator 272 12.4 Radio Resource Management Implementation for the DBWS 285 12.5 Results of the Simulation 286 12.6 Conclusions 289 13 Business Evaluation and Perspectives 291 George Agapiou, Vitor Sim~oes Ribeiro, Angela Maria Ferro Venturi, Silmar Freire Palmeira and A. Manuel de Oliveira Duarte 13.1 Introduction 291 13.2 Evolution of Services in Advanced Access Technologies 292 13.3 Business Model Description 293 13.4 Business Plan 294 13.5 Market Characterization 296 13.6 Modeling the Business Plan 297 13.7 Deployment Models 304 13.8 Conclusions 312 14 Summary and Conclusions 313 Paulo P. Monteiro, Atýlio Gameiro and Nathan J. Gomes 14.1 Introduction 313 14.2 Main Achievements of the FUTON Project 313 14.3 Technical Benefits 314 14.4 Business Benefits 315 14.5 Business Vision 315 References 316 Index 317

Read more less

Book SynopsisOur society increasingly depends on computer-based systems; the number of applications deployed has increased dramatically in recent years and this trend is accelerating. Many of these applications are expected to provide their services continuously. The Service Availability Forum has recognized this need and developed a set of specifications to help software designers and developers to focus on the value added function of applications, leaving the availability management functions for the middleware. A practical and informative reference for the Service Availability Forum specifications, this book gives a cohesive explanation of the founding principles, motivation behind the design of the specifications, and the solutions, usage scenarios and limitations that a final system may have. Avoiding complex mathematical explanations, the book takes a pragmatic approach by discussing issues that are as close as possible to the daily software design/development by practitioners, and yet atTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Foreword xv Preface xix Acknowledgments xxv List of Abbreviations xxvii Part I INTRODUCTION TO SERVICE AVAILABILITY 1 Definitions, Concepts, and Principles 3 Francis Tam 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Why Service Availability? 4 1.2.1 Dossier on Unavailability of Service 4 1.2.2 Issues and Challenges 5 1.3 Service Availability Fundamentals 6 1.3.1 System, Behavior, and Service 6 1.3.2 Dependable Computing Concepts 8 1.3.3 The Meaning of Availability 10 1.4 Achieving Service Availability 13 1.4.1 Following the Framework of Fault Tolerance 13 1.4.2 Redundancy is a Requisite 14 1.4.3 Dealing with Failures 16 1.4.4 Upgrade Matters 19 1.5 Conclusion 20 2 The Birth of the Service Availability Forum 23 Francis Tam 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Technology Environment 23 2.3 Business Environment 24 2.3.1 Ecosystem 25 2.3.2 COTS and Open Systems 26 2.4 The Service Availability Forum Era 27 2.5 Concluding Remarks 28 Part II THE SA FORUM SYSTEM: SERVICES AND FRAMEWORKS 3 Overview of the Service Availability Architecture 33 Dave Penkler 3.1 Introduction 33 3.1.1 Background and Business Context 33 3.1.2 Goals and Requirements 34 3.1.3 Service Availability Architecture Scope and Presentation 36 3.2 HA Concepts Applied 39 3.2.1 To Be or Not to Be High Availability Aware 39 3.2.2 HA Aware Application Perspective 42 3.3 Architecture 43 3.3.1 Basic Architectural Model 43 3.3.2 The AIS Services and Frameworks Architecture 47 3.3.3 Service Dependencies 58 3.4 Open Issues 59 3.4.1 The Optional Features Issue 60 3.4.2 Integrated AIS Service API 60 3.4.3 Common Low Level Communication Facility Interface 60 3.4.4 Common Distributed Process Management Interface 61 3.4.5 System Trace Service 61 3.4.6 Diagnostics Framework 61 3.4.7 Overload Control Framework 61 3.5 Conclusion 62 4 The SA Forum Information Model: The Heart of Control and Monitoring 63 Maria Toeroe 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Background 64 4.2.1 Management Models Out There 64 4.2.2 The SA Forum Needs 65 4.3 The SA Forum Information Model 67 4.3.1 Overview of the SA Forum Solution 67 4.3.2 Administrative and Management Aspects 80 4.3.3 Application Information Models 81 4.3.4 Open Issues and Recommendations 81 4.4 Conclusion 83 5 Consistent and High Level Platform View 85 Maria Toeroe 5.1 Introduction 85 5.2 Hardware Platform Interface 86 5.2.1 Background 86 5.2.2 Overview of the Hardware Platform Interface 87 5.2.3 The HPI Model 88 5.2.4 HPI Capability Discovery 93 5.2.5 Error Handling and Administrative Operations 94 5.2.6 Open Issues and Conclusions 95 5.3 Platform Management Service 96 5.3.1 The Conception of PLM 96 5.3.2 Overview of the SA Forum Platform Management 97 5.3.3 The PLM Information Model 98 5.3.4 Tracking of PLM Entities 107 5.3.5 Administrative and Management Aspects 110 5.3.6 Service Interaction 118 5.3.7 Open Issues and Conclusions 120 5.4 Cluster Membership Service 121 5.4.1 Background 121 5.4.2 Overview of the Cluster Membership Service 122 5.4.3 CLM Configuration: The Bootstrap Trap 125 5.4.4 Are You a Member? 126 5.4.5 Administrative and Management Aspects 127 5.4.6 Service Interaction 129 5.4.7 Open Issues 130 5.4.8 Recommendation 131 5.5 Conclusion 131 6 Model Based Availability Management: The Availability Management Framework 133 Maria Toeroe 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Background 134 6.2.1 Error Detection and Repair 134 6.2.2 Fault Zones and Error Escalation 135 6.2.3 Separation of Services from Serving Entities 136 6.2.4 Service Provisioning Roles 136 6.2.5 Delicacies of Service State Replication 137 6.3 The Availability Management Framework 138 6.3.1 Overview of the SA Forum Solution 138 6.3.2 Components and Component Service Instances 139 6.3.3 The AMF Information Model 148 6.3.4 Redundancy Models 167 6.3.5 The AMF Administrative Interface 176 6.3.6 Interactions Between AMF and Other AIS Services 187 6.3.7 Open Issues 190 6.3.8 Recommendation 191 6.4 Conclusion 191 7 Communication and Synchronization Utilities 193 Maria Toeroe and Sayandeb Saha 7.1 Introduction 193 7.2 Event Service 194 7.2.1 Background: Event Service Issues, Controversies, and Problems 194 7.2.2 Overview of the SA Forum Event Service 195 7.2.3 Event Service Architecture and Model 196 7.2.4 User Perspective 200 7.2.5 Administrative and Management Aspects 201 7.2.6 Service Interactions 201 7.2.7 Open Issues and Recommendations 202 7.3 Message Service 202 7.3.1 Need for Reliability and Load Distribution 202 7.3.2 Overview of the SA Forum Message Service 203 7.3.3 Message Service Architecture and Model 205 7.3.4 User Perspective 207 7.3.5 Administrative and Management Aspects 210 7.3.6 Service Interaction 210 7.3.7 Open Issues and Recommendations 211 7.4 Checkpoint Service 212 7.4.1 Background: Why Checkpoints 212 7.4.2 Overview of the SA Forum Checkpoint Service 213 7.4.3 Checkpoint Service Model 215 7.4.4 User Perspective 217 7.4.5 Administrative and Management Aspects 220 7.4.6 Service Interaction 221 7.4.7 Open Issues 222 7.4.8 Recommendation 222 7.5 Conclusion 223 7.5.1 Common Issue: Entity Names 223 7.5.2 Conclusion 223 8 Services Needed for System Management 227 Maria Toeroe 8.1 Introduction 227 8.2 Log Service 228 8.2.1 Background: Data, Data, and More Data 228 8.2.2 Overview of the SA Forum Solution 229 8.2.3 The LOG Information Model 231 8.2.4 User Perspective 232 8.2.5 Administrative and Management Aspects 233 8.2.6 Service Interaction 233 8.2.7 Open Issues and Recommendations 235 8.3 Notification Service 236 8.3.1 Background: Issues, Controversies, and Problems 236 8.3.2 Overview of the SA Forum Notification Service 237 8.3.3 User Perspective 239 8.3.4 Correlation of Notifications 241 8.3.5 Administrative and Management Aspects 243 8.3.6 Service Interaction 244 8.3.7 Open Issues and Recommendation 246 8.4 Information Model Management Service 247 8.4.1 Background: Issues, Controversies, and Problems 247 8.4.2 Overview of the SA Forum IMM Solution 249 8.4.3 The Object Manager API 251 8.4.4 The Object Implementer API 255 8.4.5 IMM XML File 258 8.4.6 Administrative and Management Aspects 258 8.4.7 Service Interaction 258 8.4.8 Open Issues 260 8.4.9 Recommendation 261 8.5 Conclusion 262 9 Model-Based Software Management: The Software Management Framework 265 Maria Toeroe 9.1 Introduction 265 9.2 Background 266 9.3 Software Management a la Carte 268 9.3.1 Overview of the SA Forum Solution 268 9.3.2 Entity Types File: Is It Eaten or Drunk by SMF? 271 9.3.3 The Upgrade Campaign and Its Specification 273 9.3.4 Upgrade Campaign Execution Status and Failure Handling 279 9.3.5 Administrative and Management Aspects 285 9.3.6 User Perspective 288 9.3.7 Service Interaction 289 9.3.8 Open Issues 291 9.3.9 Recommendation 292 9.4 Conclusion 294 10 Combining the Services 297 Maria Toeroe 10.1 Introduction 297 10.2 Application Design and Development 297 10.3 Application Platform Design 299 10.4 Operation and Maintenance 301 Part III SA FORUM MIDDLEWARE IN ACTION 11 SA Forum Programming Model and API Conventions 305 Francis Tam 11.1 Introduction 305 11.2 Programming Model 306 11.2.1 AIS Area Service Interfaces 306 11.2.2 Real-Time Support 306 11.2.3 Naming Conventions and Type Definitions 308 11.2.4 Usage Model and Library Life Cycle 309 11.2.5 Tracking 311 11.3 Making Sense of the API Specifications 312 11.3.1 Structure of Service API Specification 314 11.3.2 Administration API 315 11.4 Practical Topics 316 11.4.1 Interacting with POSIX 316 11.4.2 Allocating and Freeing Memory 319 11.4.3 Handling Pointers 319 11.4.4 Finding Out Implementation Limits 320 11.4.5 When an Area Service is Unavailable 321 11.4.6 Backward Compatibility 322 11.5 Concluding Remarks 322 12 SA Forum Java Mappings: Specifications, Usage, and Experience 325 Robert Hyerle and Jens Jensen 12.1 Introduction 325 12.2 Background 325 12.2.1 Early Exploration of Java Mappings in Hewlett–Packard 325 12.2.2 Java in Ericsson 326 12.2.3 The SA Forum Java Mapping Initiative 327 12.3 Understanding the Java Mappings 328 12.3.1 Java Application Integration Architecture 328 12.3.2 Naming 329 12.3.3 Package Structure 330 12.3.4 The Underlying Objects 330 12.3.5 Types 331 12.3.6 Parameters, Exceptions, and Method Signatures 332 12.3.7 Factories, Callbacks, and Life-cycles 333 12.3.8 Callbacks and the Selection Object in Java 334 12.4 Using the Java Mappings 335 12.4.1 Integrating AIS Services with Java Applications 335 12.4.2 Integrating AIS Services with Containerized Java Applications 342 12.4.3 AIS Services in Mixed Language and Mixed Implementation Environments 343 12.5 Going Further 343 12.5.1 The Java Mapping Roadmap 343 12.5.2 Related Java Standards and Other References 344 13 SA Forum Middleware Implementations 347 Mario Angelic and Ulrich Kleber 13.1 Introduction 347 13.1.1 OpenHPI 347 13.1.2 OpenSAF 348 13.2 The OpenHPI Project 348 13.2.1 Overview of the OpenHPI Solution 348 13.2.2 User Perspective 351 13.2.3 OpenHPI Tools 353 13.2.4 Open Issues and Recommendations 354 13.3 The OpenSAF Project 355 13.3.1 Background 355 13.3.2 OpenSAF Architecture 356 13.3.3 SA Forum Compliant Services 360 13.3.4 OpenSAF Infrastructure Services 364 13.3.5 Managing OpenSAF 365 13.3.6 Deploying OpenSAF 367 13.4 Conclusion 368 14 Integration of the VideoLAN Client with OpenSAF: An Example 371 Anik Mishra and Ali Kanso 14.1 Introduction 371 14.2 Going Under the Hood: The VLC Workflow 372 14.3 Integrating VLC with OpenSAF 373 14.3.1 Nonproxied-Non-SA-Aware Integration 374 14.3.2 SA-Aware VLC Integration 379 14.3.3 SA-Aware VLC with Service Continuity 384 14.4 Summary and Conclusion 387 15 Migration Paths for Legacy Applications 391 Mario Angelic 15.1 Introduction 391 15.2 Reasons for Migration 392 15.2.1 Benefits for System Owners 392 15.2.2 Benefits for ISVs 392 15.3 Integration Criteria 393 15.3.1 Main Factors 393 15.3.2 Easy Management 394 15.3.3 Streamlined Architecture 396 15.3.4 Code Quality 397 15.3.5 Integration Levels 397 15.4 How to Migrate 399 15.4.1 Availability Integration 399 15.4.2 Manageability Integration 409 15.5 Open Issues 413 15.6 Conclusion 413 16 Overcoming Complexity: Formal Modeling Techniques at the Rescue 415 Maria Toeroe and Ferhat Khendek 16.1 Introduction 415 16.2 Background 416 16.2.1 The Model-Based Approach 416 16.2.2 Starting Points in the Specifications 417 16.3 Model-Based Software Management 419 16.3.1 Configuration Model 419 16.3.2 Configuration Generation 420 16.3.3 Upgrade Campaign Generation 424 16.3.4 Analytical Models and How They Can Help 427 16.4 Conclusion 428 17 Conclusion 431 17.1 Summary 431 17.2 The Future 433 References 435 Index 443

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides coverage of the major theories and technologies involved in the lifecycle of 3D video content delivery Presenting the technologies used in end-to-end 3D video communication systems, this reference covers 3D graphics and video coding, content creation and display, and communications and networking.Table of ContentsPreface ix About the Authors xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why 3D Communications? 1 1.2 End-to-End 3D Visual Ecosystem 3 1.3 3D Visual Communications 10 1.4 Challenges and Opportunities 11 References 15 2 3D Graphics and Rendering 17 2.1 3DTV Content Processing Procedure 19 2.2 3D Scene Representation with Explicit Geometry – Geometry Based Representation 22 2.3 3D Scene Representation without Geometry – Image-Based Representation 43 2.4 3D Scene Representation with Implicit Geometry – Depth-Image-Based Representation 51 References 57 3 3D Display Systems 63 3.1 Depth Cues and Applications to 3D Display 63 3.2 Stereoscopic Display 65 3.3 Autostereoscopic Display 71 3.4 Multi-View System 78 3.5 Recent Advances in Hologram System Study 83 References 84 4 3D Content Creation 85 4.1 3D Scene Modeling and Creation 85 4.2 3D Content Capturing 87 4.3 2D-to-3D Video Conversion 101 4.4 3D Multi-View Generation 125 References 126 5 3D Video Coding and Standards 129 5.1 Fundamentals of Video Coding 129 5.2 Two-View Stereo Video Coding 142 5.3 Frame-Compatible Stereo Coding 144 5.4 Video Plus Depth Coding 148 5.5 Multiple View Coding 156 5.6 Multi-View Video Plus Depth (MVD) Video 160 5.7 Layered Depth Video (LDV) 163 5.8 MPEG-4 BIFS and AFX 165 5.9 Free-View Point Video 166 References 167 6 Communication Networks 171 6.1 IP Networks 171 6.2 Wireless Communications 174 6.3 Wireless Networking 193 6.4 4G Standards and Systems 193 References 203 7 Quality of Experience 205 7.1 3D Artifacts 205 7.2 QoE Measurement 220 7.3 QoE Oriented System Design 247 References 250 8 3D Video over Networks 259 8.1 Transmission-Induced Error 259 8.2 Error Resilience 267 8.3 Error Concealment 270 8.4 Unequal Error Protection 275 8.5 Multiple Description Coding 279 8.6 Cross-Layer Design 282 References 286 9 3D Applications 289 9.1 Glass-Less Two-View Systems 289 9.2 3D Capture and Display Systems 291 9.3 Two-View Gaming Systems 294 9.4 3D Mobile 298 9.5 Augmented Reality 302 References 309 10 Advanced 3D Video Streaming Applications 313 10.1 Rate Control in Adaptive Streaming 313 10.2 Multi-View Video View Switching 321 10.3 Peer-to-Peer 3D Video Streaming 325 10.4 3D Video Broadcasting 328 10.5 3D Video over 4G Networks 329 References 331 Index 335

Read more less

Book SynopsisPhysics of Energy Sourcesprovides readers with a balanced presentation of the fundamental physics needed to understand and analyze conventional and renewable energy sources including nuclear, solar, wind and water power. It also presents various ways in which energy can be stored for future use.Table of ContentsEditors’ preface to the Manchester Physics Series xiAuthor’s preface xiii1 Introduction 11.1 Energy consumption 11.2 Energy sources 31.3 Renewable and non-renewable energy sources 51.4 The form and conversion of energy 61.4.1 Thermal energy sources 71.4.2 Mechanical energy sources 71.4.3 Photovoltaic sources 71.4.4 Energy storage 8Problems 1 92 The atomic nucleus 112.1 The composition and properties of nuclei 122.1.1 The composition of nuclei 122.1.2 The size of a nucleus 142.1.3 The distributions of nuclear matter and charge 192.1.4 The mass of a nucleus 212.1.5 The charge of a nucleus 242.1.6 Nuclear binding energy 272.1.7 Binding energy curve of the nuclides 302.1.8 The semi-empirical mass formula 322.2 Nuclear forces and energies 352.2.1 Characteristics of the nuclear force 352.2.2 Nuclear energies 362.2.3 Quantum mechanical description of a particle in a potential well 392.3 Radioactivity and nuclear stability 472.3.1 Segré chart of the stable nuclides 482.3.2 Decay laws of radioactivity 492.3.3 α, β and γ decay 57Problems 2 673 Nuclearpower 713.1 How to get energy from the nucleus 713.2 Nuclear reactions 733.2.1 Nuclear reactions 733.2.2 Q-value of a nuclear reaction 743.2.3 Reaction cross-sections and reaction rates 763.3 Nuclear fission 823.3.1 Liquid-drop model of nuclear fission 833.3.2 Induced nuclear fission 863.3.3 Fission cross-sections 873.3.4 Fission reactions and products 883.3.5 Energy in fission 903.3.6 Moderation of fast neutrons 923.3.7 Uranium enrichment 933.4 Controlled fission reactions 973.4.1 Chain reactions 973.4.2 Control of fission reactions 1013.4.3 Fission reactors 1033.4.4 Commercial nuclear reactors 1053.4.5 Nuclear waste 1073.5 Nuclear fusion 1093.5.1 Fusion reactions 1103.5.2 Energy in fusion 1113.5.3 Coulomb barrier for nuclear fusion 1133.5.4 Fusion reaction rates 1133.5.5 Performance criteria 1153.5.6 Controlled thermonuclear fusion 117Problems 3 1234 Solar power 1274.1 Stellar fusion 1284.1.1 Star formation and evolution 1284.1.2 Thermonuclear fusion in the Sun: the proton–proton cycle 1314.1.3 Solar radiation 1324.2 Blackbody radiation 1344.2.1 Laws of blackbody radiation 1354.2.2 Emissivity 1374.2.3 Birth of the photon 1414.3 Solar radiation and its interaction with the Earth 1454.3.1 Characteristics of solar radiation 1454.3.2 Interaction of solar radiation with Earth and its atmosphere 1474.3.3 Penetration of solar energy into the ground 1554.4 Geothermal energy 1594.4.1 Shallow geothermal energy 1604.4.2 Deep geothermal energy 1614.5 Solar heaters 1624.5.1 Solar water heaters 1624.5.2 Heat transfer processes 1654.5.3 Solar thermal power systems 1724.6 Heat engines: converting heat into work 1744.6.1 Equation of state of an ideal gas 1754.6.2 Internal energy, work and heat: the first law of thermodynamics 1774.6.3 Specific heats of gases 1814.6.4 Isothermal and adiabatic expansion 1834.6.5 Heat engines and the second law of thermodynamics 185Problems 4 1965 Semiconductor solar cells 2015.1 Introduction 2015.2 Semiconductors 2045.2.1 The band structure of crystalline solids 2045.2.2 Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors 2085.3 The p–n junction 2145.3.1 The p–n junction in equilibrium 2145.3.2 The biased p–n junction 2175.3.3 The current–voltage characteristic of a p–n junction 2195.3.4 Electron and hole concentrations in a semiconductor 2225.3.5 The Fermi energy in a p–n junction 2275.4 Semiconductor solar cells 2295.4.1 Photon absorption at a p–n junction 2295.4.2 Power generation by a solar cell 2315.4.3 Maximum power delivery from a solar cell 2355.4.4 The Shockley–Queisser limit 2385.4.5 Solar cell construction 2405.4.6 Increasing the efficiency of solar cells and alternative solar cell materials 243Problems 5 2486 Windpower 2516.1 A brief history of wind power 2516.2 Origin and directions of the wind 2536.2.1 The Coriolis force 2536.3 The flow of ideal fluids 2566.3.1 The continuity equation 2576.3.2 Bernoulli’s equation 2586.4 Extraction of wind power by a turbine 2636.4.1 The Betz criterion 2656.4.2 Action of wind turbine blades 2686.5 Wind turbine design and operation 2716.6 Siting of a wind turbine 277Problems 6 2807 Water power 2837.1 Hydroelectric power 2847.1.1 The hydroelectric plant and its principles of operation 2847.1.2 Flow of a viscous fluid in a pipe 2867.1.3 Hydroelectric turbines 2887.2 Wave power 2917.2.1 Wave motion 2927.2.2 Water waves 3067.2.3 Wave energy converters 3197.3 Tidal power 3247.3.1 Origin of the tides 3257.3.2 Variation and enhancement of tidal range 3357.3.3 Harnessing tidal power 341Problems 7 3468 Energy storage 3498.1 Types of energy storage 3508.2 Chemical energy storage 3518.2.1 Biological energy storage 3518.2.2 Hydrogen energy storage 3518.3 Thermal energy storage 3528.4 Mechanical energy storage 3558.4.1 Pumped hydroelectric energy storage 3558.4.2 Compressed air energy storage 3578.4.3 Flywheel energy storage 3618.5 Electrical energy storage 3648.5.1 Capacitors and super-capacitors 3658.5.2 Superconducting magnetic storage 3678.5.3 Rechargeable batteries 3688.5.4 Fuel cells 3708.6 Distribution of electrical power 372Problems 8 374Solutions to problems 377Index 397

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive and in-depth review of analog circuit layout, schematic architecture, device, power network and ESD design This book will provide a balanced overview of analog circuit design layout,analog circuit schematic development, architecture of chips,and ESD design. It will start at an introductory level and will bring the reader right up to the state-of-the-art. Two critical design aspects for analog and power integrated circuits are combined. The first design aspect covers analog circuit design techniques to achieve the desired circuit performance. The second and main aspect presents the additional challenges associated with the design of adequate and effective ESD protection elements and schemes. A comprehensive list of practical application examples is used to demonstrate the successful combination of both techniques and any potential design trade-offs. Chapter One looks at analog design discipline, including layout and analog matching and analTable of ContentsAbout the Author xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxiii 1 Analog, ESD, and EOS 1 1.1 ESD in Analog Design 1 1.2 Analog Design Discipline and ESD Circuit Techniques 2 1.2.1 Analog Design: Local Matching 3 1.2.2 Analog Design: Global Matching 3 1.2.3 Symmetry 3 1.2.3.1 Layout Symmetry 4 1.2.3.2 Thermal Symmetry 4 1.2.4 Analog Design: Across Chip Linewidth Variation 4 1.3 Design Symmetry and ESD 5 1.4 ESD Design Synthesis and Architecture Flow 6 1.5 ESD Design and Noise 7 1.6 ESD Design Concepts: Adjacency 8 1.7 Electrical Overstress 8 1.7.1 Electrical Overcurrent 10 1.7.2 Electrical Overvoltage 11 1.7.3 Electrical Overstress Events 11 1.7.3.1 Characteristic Time Response 11 1.7.4 Comparison of EOS versus ESD Waveforms 13 1.8 Reliability Technology Scaling and the Reliability Bathtub Curve 13 1.8.1 The Shrinking Reliability Design Box 14 1.8.2 Application Voltage, Trigger Voltage, and Absolute Maximum Voltage 14 1.9 Safe Operating Area 15 1.9.1 Electrical Safe Operating Area 16 1.9.2 Thermal Safe Operating Area (T-SOA) 16 1.9.3 Transient Safe Operating Area 16 1.10 Closing Comments and Summary 17 References 18 2 Analog Design Layout 19 2.1 Analog Design Layout Revisited 19 2.1.1 Analog Design: Local Matching 20 2.1.2 Analog Design: Global Matching 21 2.1.3 Symmetry 21 2.1.4 Layout Design Symmetry 21 2.1.5 Thermal Symmetry 22 2.2 Common Centroid Design 22 2.2.1 Common Centroid Arrays 22 2.2.2 One-Axis Common Centroid Design 22 2.2.3 Two-Axis Common Centroid Design 23 2.3 Interdigitation Design 24 2.4 Common Centroid and Interdigitation Design 24 2.5 Passive Element Design 25 2.6 Resistor Element Design 25 2.6.1 Resistor Element Design: Dogbone Layout 25 2.6.2 Resistor Design: Analog Interdigitated Layout 26 2.6.3 Dummy Resistor Layout 26 2.6.4 Thermoelectric Cancellation Layout 27 2.6.5 Electrostatic Shield 28 2.6.6 Interdigitated Resistors and ESD Parasitics 28 2.7 Capacitor Element Design 29 2.8 Inductor Element Design 30 2.9 Diode Design 33 2.10 MOSFET Design 35 2.11 Bipolar Transistor Design 36 2.12 Closing Comments and Summary 36 References 37 3 Analog Design Circuits 39 3.1 Analog Circuits 39 3.2 Single-Ended Receivers 40 3.2.1 Single-Ended Receivers 40 3.2.2 Schmitt Trigger Receivers 41 3.3 Differential Receivers 41 3.4 Comparators 43 3.5 Current Sources 43 3.6 Current Mirrors 44 3.6.1 Widlar Current Mirror 44 3.6.2 Wilson Current Mirror 45 3.7 Voltage Regulators 46 3.7.1 Buck Converters 46 3.7.2 Boost Converters 46 3.7.3 Buck–Boost Converters 47 3.7.4 Cuk Converters 48 3.8 Voltage Reference Circuits 49 3.8.1 Brokaw Bandgap Voltage Reference 49 3.9 Converters 49 3.9.1 Analog-to-Digital Converter 50 3.9.2 Digital-to-Analog Converters 50 3.10 Oscillators 50 3.11 Phase Lock Loop 50 3.12 Delay Locked Loop 50 3.13 Closing Comments and Summary 52 References 52 4 Analog ESD Circuits 55 4.1 Analog ESD Devices and Circuits 55 4.2 ESD Diodes 55 4.2.1 Dual Diode and Series Diodes 55 4.2.2 Dual Diode–Resistor 56 4.2.3 Dual Diode–Resistor–Dual Diode 56 4.2.4 Dual Diode–Resistor–Grounded-Gate MOSFET 58 4.2.5 Back-to-Back Diode Strings 58 4.2.5.1 Back-to-Back Symmetric Diode String 59 4.2.5.2 Back-to-Back Asymmetric Diode String 59 4.3 ESD MOSFET Circuits 59 4.3.1 Grounded-Gate MOSFET 60 4.3.2 RC-Triggered MOSFET 61 4.4 ESD Silicon-Controlled Rectifier Circuits 62 4.4.1 Unidirectional SCR 62 4.4.2 Bidirectional SCR 62 4.4.3 Medium-Level Silicon-Controlled Rectifier 62 4.4.4 Low-Voltage-Triggered SCR 64 4.5 Laterally Diffused MOS Circuits 64 4.5.1 LOCOS-Defined LDMOS 65 4.5.2 STI-Defined LDMOS 66 4.5.3 STI-Defined Isolated LDMOS 66 4.6 DeMOS Circuits 68 4.6.1 DeNMOS 68 4.6.2 DeNMOS-SCR 69 4.7 Ultrahigh-Voltage LDMOS Circuits 69 4.7.1 Ultrahigh-Voltage LDMOS 70 4.7.2 Ultrahigh-Voltage LDMOS SCR 71 4.8 Closing Comments and Summary 72 References 72 5 Analog and ESD Design Synthesis 73 5.1 Early ESD Failures in Analog Design 73 5.2 Mixed-Voltage Interface: Voltage Regulator Failures 73 5.2.1 ESD Protection Solution for Voltage Regulator: GGNMOS ESD Bypass between Power Rails 75 5.2.2 ESD Protection Solution for Voltage Regulator: Series Diode String ESD Bypass 76 5.3 Separation of Analog Power from Digital Power AVDD to DVDD 76 5.4 ESD Failure in Phase Lock Loop (PLL) and System Clock 77 5.5 ESD Failure in Current Mirrors 77 5.6 ESD Failure in Schmitt Trigger Receivers 78 5.7 Isolated Digital and Analog Domains 82 5.8 ESD Protection Solution: Connectivity of AVDD to VDD 82 5.9 Connectivity of AVSS to DVSS 83 5.10 Digital and Analog Domain with ESD Power Clamps 84 5.11 Digital and Analog Domain with Master/Slave ESD Power Clamps 86 5.12 High-Voltage, Digital, and Analog Domain Floor Plan 87 5.13 Closing Comments and Summary 88 References 88 6 Analog-to-Digital ESD Design Synthesis 89 6.1 Digital and Analog 89 6.2 Interdomain Signal Line ESD Failures 90 6.2.1 Digital-to-Analog Signal Line Failures 90 6.3 Digital-to-Analog Core Spatial Isolation 92 6.4 Digital-to-Analog Core Ground Coupling 92 6.4.1 Digital-to-Analog Core Resistive Ground Coupling 93 6.4.2 Digital-to-Analog Core Diode Ground Coupling 93 6.5 Domain-to-Domain Signal Line ESD Networks 94 6.6 Domain-to-Domain Third-Party Coupling Networks 94 6.7 Domain-to-Domain Cross-Domain ESD Power Clamp 95 6.8 Digital-to-Analog Domain Moat 96 6.9 Digital-to-Analog Domain Moat with Through-Silicon Via 96 6.10 Domain-to-Domain ESD Design Rule Check and Verification Methods 97 6.11 Closing Comments and Summary 97 References 97 7 Analog-ESD Signal Pin Co-synthesis 101 7.1 Analog Signal Pin 101 7.2 Analog Signal Differential Receiver 102 7.2.1 Analog Signal CMOS Differential Receivers 102 7.2.2 Analog Signal Bipolar Differential Receivers 104 7.3 Analog CMOS Differential Receiver 108 7.3.1 Analog Differential Receiver Capacitance Loading 108 7.3.2 Analog Differential Receiver ESD Mismatch 109 7.4 Analog Differential Pair ESD Signal Pin Matching with Common Well Layout 110 7.5 Analog Differential Pair Common Centroid Design Layout: Signal Pin-to-Signal Pin and Parasitic ESD Elements 113 7.6 Closing Comments and Summary 115 References 116 8 Analog and ESD Circuit Integration 119 8.1 Analog and Power Technology and ESD Circuit Integration 119 8.1.1 Analog ESD: Isolated and Nonisolated Designs 119 8.1.2 Integrated Body Ties 119 8.1.3 Self-Protecting versus Non-Self-Protecting Designs 120 8.2 ESD Input Circuits 120 8.2.1 Analog Input Circuit Protection 120 8.2.2 High-Voltage Analog Input Circuit Protection 120 8.2.3 Analog Input High-Voltage Grounded-Gate NMOS (GGNMOS) 121 8.2.4 Two-Stage High-Voltage Analog Input Circuit Protection 122 8.3 Analog ESD Output Circuits 123 8.3.1 Analog ESD Output Networks and Distinctions 123 8.3.2 Analog Open-Drain ESD Output Networks 123 8.4 Analog ESD Ground-to-Ground Networks 124 8.4.1 Back-to-Back CMOS Diode String 125 8.4.2 HV GGNMOS Diode-Configured Ground-to-Ground Network 125 8.5 ESD Power Clamps 125 8.5.1 ESD Power Clamp Issues for the High-Voltage Domain 125 8.5.2 HV Domain ESD Protection and ABS MAX 126 8.5.3 HV Domain VIN or VCC Input 126 8.5.4 HV Grounded-Gate NMOS (GGNMOS) 126 8.5.5 HV Series Cascode ESD Network 127 8.5.6 ESD Power Clamp Bidirectionality and Return Diodes 128 8.5.7 Alternative Solutions: LDO Current Limits 128 8.5.8 Alternative Solutions: External EOS Diode 129 8.6 ESD Power Clamps for Low-Voltage Digital and Analog Domain 129 8.6.1 Classification of ESD Power Clamps 130 8.6.2 ESD Power Clamp: Key Design Parameters 131 8.6.3 Design Synthesis of ESD Power Clamps 132 8.6.4 Transient Response Frequency Trigger Element and the ESD Frequency Window 132 8.6.5 ESD Power Clamp Frequency Design Window 133 8.6.6 Design Synthesis of ESD Power Clamp: Voltage-Triggered ESD Trigger Elements 133 8.6.7 Design Synthesis of ESD Power Clamp: The ESD Power Clamp Shunting Element 135 8.6.8 ESD Power Clamp Trigger Condition versus Shunt Failure 136 8.6.9 ESD Clamp Element: Width Scaling 136 8.6.10 ESD Clamp Element: On-Resistance 136 8.6.11 ESD Clamp Element: Safe Operating Area 137 8.7 ESD Power Clamp Issues 137 8.7.1 Power-Up and Power-Down 137 8.7.2 False Triggering 137 8.7.3 Precharging 138 8.7.4 Postcharging 138 8.8 ESD Power Clamp Design 138 8.8.1 Native Power Supply RC-Triggered MOSFET ESD Power Clamp 138 8.8.2 Nonnative Power Supply RC-Triggered MOSFET ESD Power Clamp 139 8.8.3 ESD Power Clamp Networks with Improved Inverter Stage Feedback 140 8.8.4 Forward-Bias Triggered ESD Power Clamps 141 8.8.5 IEC 61000-4-2 Responsive ESD Power Clamps 142 8.8.6 Precharging and Postcharging Insensitive ESD Power Clamps 142 8.8.7 ESD Power Clamp Design Synthesis and Return Diode 143 8.9 Bipolar ESD Power Clamps 144 8.9.1 Bipolar ESD Power Clamps with Zener Breakdown Trigger Element 144 8.9.2 Bipolar ESD Power Clamps with Bipolar Transistor BVCEO Breakdown Trigger Element 145 8.10 Closing Comments and Summary 145 References 146 9 System-Level EOS Issues for Analog Design 147 9.1 EOS Protection Devices 147 9.1.1 EOS Protection Device: Voltage Suppression Devices 147 9.1.2 EOS Protection Device: Current-Limiting Devices 148 9.2 EOS Protection Device: Directionality 150 9.2.1 Classification: I–V Characteristic Type 150 9.2.2 Unidirectionality 150 9.2.3 Bidirectionality 150 9.3 System-Level Pulse Model 152 9.3.1 IEC 61000-4-2 System-Level Pulse Model 152 9.3.2 Human Metal Model (HMM) 152 9.3.3 IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Test 154 9.4 EOS Transient Voltage Suppression (TVS) 155 9.4.1 EOS Diodes 155 9.4.2 EOS Schottky Diodes 156 9.4.3 EOS Zener Diodes 156 9.4.4 EOS Thyristor Surge Protection 157 9.4.5 EOS Metal-Oxide Varistors (MOV) 157 9.4.6 EOS Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) 159 9.5 EOS Current Suppression Devices 161 9.5.1 EOS PTC Device 161 9.5.2 EOS Conductive Polymer 162 9.5.3 EOS Fuses 163 9.5.3.1 Rated Current IN 164 9.5.3.2 Speed 164 9.5.3.3 I 2t Value 164 9.5.3.4 Breaking Capacity 164 9.5.3.5 Rated Voltage 164 9.5.3.6 Voltage Drop 164 9.5.3.7 Temperature Derating 164 9.5.4 EOS eFUSEs 165 9.5.5 Circuit Breakers 166 9.6 EOS and EMI Prevention: Printed Circuit Board Design 166 9.6.1 Printed Circuit Board Power Plane and Ground Design 167 9.6.2 Printed Circuit Board Design Guidelines: Component Selection and Placement 168 9.6.3 Printed Circuit Board Design Guidelines: Trace Routing and Planes 168 9.6.4 Printed Circuit Board Card Insertion Contacts 170 9.6.5 System-Level Printed Circuit Board: Ground Design 170 9.7 Closing Comments and Summary 171 References 171 10 Latchup Issues for Analog Design 173 10.1 Latchup in Analog Applications 173 10.2 I/O-to-I/O Latchup 173 10.3 I/O-to-I/O Latchup: N-Well to N-Well 175 10.4 I/O-to-I/O Latchup: N-Well to NFET 177 10.5 I/O-to-I/O Latchup: NFET to NFET 179 10.6 I/O-to-I/O Latchup: N-Well Guard Ring between Adjacent Cells 180 10.7 Latchup of Analog I/O to Adjacent Structures 181 10.7.1 Latchup in Core-Dominated Semiconductor Chips 181 10.7.2 Latchup and Grounded N-Wells 181 10.7.3 Latchup and Decoupling Capacitors 181 10.7.4 Adjacency Design Rule Checking and Verification 181 10.8 Analog I/O to Core 182 10.9 Core-to-Core Analog–Digital Floor Planning 182 10.9.1 Analog–Digital Moats and Guard Rings 183 10.10 High-Voltage Guard Rings 184 10.11 Through-Silicon Via (TSV) 185 10.12 Trench Guard Rings 186 10.13 Active Guard Rings 187 10.14 Closing Comments and Summary 190 References 191 11 Analog ESD Library and Documents 195 11.1 Analog Design Library 195 11.2 Analog Device Library: Passive Elements 195 11.2.1 Resistors 196 11.2.2 Capacitors 196 11.2.3 Inductors 197 11.3 Analog Device Library: Active Elements 197 11.4 Analog Design Library: Repository of Analog Circuits and Cores 198 11.4.1 Analog Design Library: Reuse Library 198 11.5 ESD Device Library 198 11.6 Cadence-Based Parameterized Cells (PCells) 199 11.6.1 ESD Hierarchical PCell Physical Layout Generation 200 11.6.2 ESD Hierarchical PCell Schematic Generation 201 11.6.3 ESD Design with Hierarchical Parameterized Cells 201 11.6.4 Hierarchical PCell Graphical Method 202 11.6.5 Hierarchical PCell Schematic Method 204 11.7 Analog ESD Documents 208 11.7.1 ESD Technology Design Manual Section 208 11.7.1.1 ESD Required Specifications 209 11.7.1.2 ESD Supported Standards 209 11.7.1.2.1 Human Body Model (HBM) 209 11.7.1.2.2 Machine Model (MM) 209 11.7.1.2.3 Charged Device Model (CDM) 209 11.7.1.2.4 IEC 61000-4-2 210 11.7.1.2.5 Human Metal Model (HMM) 210 11.7.1.2.6 Transmission Line Pulse (TLP) 210 11.7.1.2.7 Very Fast Transmission Line Pulse (VF-TLP) 210 11.7.1.3 ESD Supported Designs 210 11.7.1.4 ESD Design Rules 210 11.7.1.5 ESD Design Recommendations 211 11.7.1.6 ESD Guard Ring Rules 211 11.7.1.7 ESD Layout Design Practices 211 11.7.1.8 Do’s and Don’ts 211 11.8 ESD Cookbook 212 11.9 Electrical Overstress (EOS) Documents 213 11.9.1 EOS Design Release Process 214 11.9.2 Electrical Overstress (EOS) Cookbook 214 11.9.2.1 Table of Pin Types 216 11.9.3 Electrical Overstress Checklist 218 11.9.4 Electrical Overstress Design Reviews 220 11.10 Closing Comments and Summary 220 References 220 12 Analog ESD and Latchup Design Rule Checking and Verification 223 12.1 Electronic Design Automation 223 12.2 Electrical Overstress (EOS) and ESD Design Rule Checking 223 12.2.1 ESD Design Rule Checking 224 12.2.2 Electrostatic Discharge Layout-versus-Schematic Verification 225 12.2.3 ESD Electrical Rule Check (ERC) 226 12.3 Electrical Overstress (EOS) Electronic Design Automation 227 12.3.1 Electrical Overstress (EOS) Design Rule Checking 227 12.3.2 Electrical Overstress (EOS) Layout-versus-Schematic (LVS) Verification 228 12.3.3 Electrical Overstress (EOS) Electrical Rule Check (ERC) 229 12.3.4 Electrical Overstress Programmable Electrical Rule Check 230 12.4 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Design Rule Checking and Verification 230 12.5 Electrical Overstress and Latchup Design Rule Checking (DRC) 232 12.5.1 Latchup Design Rule Checking 232 12.5.2 Latchup Electrical Rule Check (ERC) 237 12.5.2.1 N-Well Contact to P-Channel MOSFET Resistance 237 12.5.2.2 P-Well or P-Substrate Contact to N-Channel MOSFET Resistance 237 12.5.2.3 Guard Ring Resistance 237 12.6 Whole-Chip Checking and Verification Methods 240 12.7 Cross-Domain Signal Line Checking and Verification 241 12.7.1 Cross-Domain Signal Line Checking and Verification Flow System 241 12.7.2 Cross-Domain Analog Signal Line Checking and Verification Flow System 243 12.7.3 Cross-Domain Checking and Verification: Resistance Extraction Methodology 244 12.8 Closing Comments and Summary 246 References 246 Appendix: Standards 251 Appendix: Glossary of Terms 255 Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book focuses on the key functional areas of LTE Self-Organizing Networks (SON), first introducing LTE network scenarios, technologies, and general SON concepts, and on to the latest status of 3GPP standardization.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv List of Contributors xix Acknowledgements xxi List of Abbreviations xxiii 1. Introduction 1 1.1 Self-Organising Networks (SON) 3 1.2 The Transition from Conventional Network Operation to SON 6 1.2.1 Automation of the Network Rollout 9 1.2.2 Automation of Network Optimisation and Troubleshooting 10 1.2.3 SON Characteristics and Challenges 11 References 12 2. LTE Overview 13 2.1 Introduction to LTE and SAE 13 2.1.1 3GPP Structure, Timeline and LTE Specifications 14 2.1.2 LTE Requirements 16 2.1.3 System Architecture Overview 16 2.1.4 Evolved UTRAN 18 2.1.5 E-UTRAN Functional Elements 19 2.1.6 Evolved Packet Core 21 2.1.7 Voice over LTE (VoLTE) 24 2.1.8 LTE-Advanced 24 2.1.9 Network Management 30 2.2 LTE Radio Access Network Scenarios and Their Evolution 33 2.2.1 LTE Radio Coverage Scenario 33 2.2.2 LTE for Capacity Enhancement in Existing GERAN/UTRAN 34 2.2.3 Enhancing LTE Capacity, the Multi-Layer LTE 34 2.2.4 Data Offloading, LIPA-SIPTO 35 2.2.5 Multi-Radio Access Network Scenarios or non-GPP 36 References 37 3. Self-Organising Networks (SON) 39 3.1 Vision 39 3.2 NGMN Operator Use Cases and 3GPP SON Use Cases 42 3.2.1 Operational Use Cases 42 3.2.2 NGMN SON Use Cases and Requirements 47 3.2.3 SON Use Cases in 3GPP 50 3.3 Foundations for SON 52 3.3.1 Control Engineering: Feedback Loops 53 3.3.2 Autonomic Computing and Autonomic Management 55 3.3.3 SON Research Projects 57 3.4 Architecture 60 3.4.1 Use-Case Related Criteria 62 3.4.2 System-Level Criteria 64 3.5 Business Value 65 3.5.1 The Economics of eNB Sites 65 3.5.2 General Mode of Operation of SON 68 3.5.3 Installation and Planning 71 3.5.4 Network Optimisation 72 3.5.5 Fault Management 73 3.5.6 Conclusions 74 3.6 SON Operational and Technical Challenges 75 3.6.1 Transition of Operational Processes to SON 75 3.6.2 Technical (Engineering) Challenges 78 References 80 4. Self-Configuration (‘Plug-and-Play’) 81 4.1 Auto-Connectivity and -Commissioning 82 4.1.1 Preparation 85 4.1.2 Connectivity Setup, Site-Identification and Auto-Commissioning 87 4.1.3 LTE-A Relay Auto-Connectivity 93 4.1.4 Conclusions 100 4.2 Dynamic Radio Configuration 100 4.2.1 Generation of Initial Transmission Parameters 106 4.2.2 Physical Cell-ID Allocation 111 4.2.3 Automatic Neighbour Relationship Setup (ANR) 118 4.2.4 DRC Architecture 130 4.2.5 Conclusions 132 References 133 5. Self-Optimisation 135 5.1 Mobility Robustness Optimisation 136 5.1.1 Goals of MRO 136 5.1.2 Cell Changes and Interference Challenges 137 5.1.3 MRO Relevant Parameters 140 5.1.4 Causes for Mobility Problems 144 5.1.5 MRO Solutions 146 5.1.6 MRO Time Scales 151 5.1.7 MRO Performance 152 5.2 Mobility Load Balancing and Traffic Steering 157 5.2.1 Introduction to Traffic Steering 157 5.2.2 SON Policies for Mobility Load Balancing 159 5.2.3 A Theoretical View of Load Balancing 160 5.2.4 Standardised Features and Procedures to Direct UEs to the Desired Layer 166 5.2.5 Exemplary Results of MLB 182 5.2.6 Uplink Load Balancing 189 5.2.7 Interactions Between TS/MLB and MRO 190 5.3 Energy Saving 193 5.3.1 Introduction 193 5.3.2 Requirements 195 5.3.3 Energy Saving Management 195 5.3.4 eNB Overlaid Scenario 196 5.3.5 Capacity-Limited Network 198 5.3.6 Equipment/Local ES 200 5.3.7 Example Scenarios and Expected Gains 201 5.3.8 Summary 204 5.4 Coverage and Capacity Optimisation 204 5.4.1 CCO with Adaptive Antennas 205 5.4.2 Performance Analysis for Antenna Parameter Optimisation Based CCO 208 5.4.3 CCO with TX Power 216 5.5 RACH Optimisation 217 5.5.1 General 217 5.5.2 PRACH Configuration 218 5.5.3 RACH Configuration 219 5.5.4 RACH/PRACH Configuration Example 221 5.5.5 RA Performance 222 5.5.6 Self-Optimisation Framework 223 5.5.7 UE Reporting 223 5.5.8 Inter-eNB Communication 225 5.6 RRM and SON (Interference Coordination, P0 Optimisation) 226 5.6.1 Interference Coordination 226 5.6.2 P0 Optimisation 230 References 232 6. Self-Healing 235 6.1 Introduction 236 6.1.1 3GPP Use Cases 236 6.1.2 3GPP Self-Healing Process and its Management 237 6.1.3 Cell Degradation Management 238 6.2 Cell Degradation Detection 242 6.3 Cell Degradation Diagnosis and Prediction 248 6.3.1 Rule Based Systems 250 6.3.2 Bayesian Networks 251 6.3.3 Case Based Reasoning 253 6.3.4 Neural Networks 255 6.3.5 Active Measurements 256 6.3.6 Prediction 257 6.4 Cell Outage Compensation 259 6.4.1 Activation of Cell Outage Compensation 260 6.4.2 Means of Cell Outage Compensation 260 6.4.3 Interaction between Cell Outage Compensation and Self-Configuration Functions 263 References 264 7. Supporting Function: Minimisation of Drive Tests (MDT) 267 7.1 Introduction 267 7.1.1 General 267 7.1.2 History and Background 269 7.2 Relation to SON 272 7.3 Requirements 273 7.4 Use Cases 275 7.4.1 Operator Scenarios 276 7.4.2 Coverage Optimisation 277 7.4.3 Mobility Optimisation 281 7.4.4 Capacity Optimisation 281 7.4.5 Parameterisation for Common Channels 282 7.4.6 QoS Verification 282 7.5 Overall Architecture 283 7.6 Managing MDT 285 7.6.1 Subscriber and Equipment Trace 285 7.6.2 MDT Configuration Parameters 285 7.6.3 Subscription Based MDT 287 7.6.4 Area Based MDT 292 7.6.5 Supporting Functionality in the Management System 293 7.6.6 MDT Reporting 293 7.7 MDT Radio Interface Procedures 295 7.7.1 Immediate MDT 296 7.7.2 Logged MDT 298 7.7.3 RLF Reporting 303 7.7.4 Measurement Parameters 305 7.7.5 Location Information 308 7.8 Conclusion 309 References 310 8. SON for Core Networks 311 8.1 Introduction 311 8.2 SON for Packet Core Networks 311 8.2.1 Packet Core Element Auto-Configuration 311 8.2.2 Automatic Neighbour Relation 313 8.2.3 S1 Flex (MME Pooling) 314 8.2.4 Signalling Optimisation 315 8.2.5 Latency Optimisation 317 8.2.6 Fast Gateway Convergence with Bidirectional Forward Detection 318 8.2.7 Dynamic IP Pool Allocation 318 8.2.8 Energy Saving 319 8.3 SON for Voice Core Networks 319 8.3.1 Voice Over IP Quality Monitoring and Management 319 8.3.2 Resource Optimisation in Voice Core Network 320 References 321 9. SON Operation 322 9.1 SON Function Interactions 323 9.1.1 Spatial Characteristic 324 9.1.2 Temporal Characteristic 324 9.1.3 Categories of SON Conflicts 326 9.1.4 Network Parameters Related to SON Functions 329 9.1.5 Examples for Conflicts between SON Functions 330 9.2 Coordination of SON Functions 334 9.2.1 Basic Options for SON Coordination 334 9.2.2 Goals of SON Function Coordination 338 9.2.3 SON Coordination Function Concept 340 9.2.4 Coordination Schemes 346 9.2.5 Related Work 352 9.2.6 SON Function Coordination Example 352 9.3 Conclusions 355 References 356 10. SON for Heterogeneous Networks (HetNet) 357 10.1 Introduction 357 10.2 Standardisation and Network Architecture 359 10.2.1 Network Architecture for HetNet 361 10.3 Self-Configuration 362 10.3.1 Auto-Connectivity and -Commissioning 363 10.3.2 Automatic Site Identification and Hardware-to-Site Mapping 364 10.3.3 Automatic Neighbour Relations (ANR) 365 10.4 Self-Optimisation: Interference Management 365 10.4.1 Interference Characteristics in HetNet Scenarios 365 10.4.2 Basic Interference Management Techniques 366 10.4.3 Scenarios with Macro eNBs and Micro/Pico eNBs 369 10.4.4 Enhanced Time-Domain Interference Management: eICIC 370 10.4.5 Outlook on Further Interference Management Innovations 374 10.5 Self-Optimisation: Mobility Aspects; MRO and Traffic Steering 375 10.5.1 Mobility Robustness Optimisation 375 10.5.2 Multi-Layer Traffic Steering and Load Balancing 377 10.5.3 IEEE 802.11 (WiFi) Integration 378 References 378 11. Future Research Topics 379 11.1 Future Mobile Network Scenarios 379 11.1.1 Heterogeneous Networks 379 11.1.2 Cloud RAN 380 11.1.3 Requirements for Future OAM Systems 381 11.2 Cognitive Radio Networks (CRN) 381 11.2.1 From SON to CRN 381 11.2.2 Definitions 382 11.2.3 Framework 383 11.2.4 Artificial Intelligence 385 11.3 Applications 387 11.3.1 Self-Configuration 387 11.3.2 Self-Optimisation 387 11.3.3 Self-Healing 388 11.3.4 Operation 388 11.4 Conclusion 389 References 389 Index 391

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe relative motion between the transmitter and the receiver modifies the nonstationarity properties of the transmitted signal. In particular, the almost-cyclostationarity property exhibited by almost all modulated signals adopted in communications, radar, sonar, and telemetry can be transformed into more general kinds of nonstationarity. A proper statistical characterization of the received signal allows for the design of signal processing algorithms for detection, estimation, and classification that significantly outperform algorithms based on classical descriptions of signals.Generalizations of Cyclostationary Signal Processingaddresses these issues and includes the following key features: Presents the underlying theoretical framework, accompanied by details of their practical application, for the mathematical models of generalized almost-cyclostationary processes and spectrally correlated processes; two classes of signals finding growing importance in areas sTrade Review“This book is written both for advanced readers with the background of graduate students in engineering and for specialists (e.g., mathematicians).” (Zentralblatt MATH, 1 May 2013) Table of ContentsDedication iii Acknowledgements xiii Introduction xv 1 Background 1 1.1 Second-Order Characterization of Stochastic Processes 1 1.1.1 Time-Domain Characterization 1 1.1.2 Spectral-Domain Characterization 2 1.1.3 Time-Frequency Characterization 4 1.1.4 Wide-Sense Stationary Processes 5 1.1.5 Evolutionary Spectral Analysis 5 1.1.6 Discrete-Time Processes 7 1.1.7 Linear Time-Variant Transformations 8 1.2 Almost-Periodic Functions 10 1.2.1 Uniformly Almost-Periodic Functions 11 1.2.2 AP Functions in the Sense of Stepanov,Weyl, and Besicovitch 12 1.2.3 Weakly AP Functions in the Sense of Eberlein 13 1.2.4 Pseudo AP Functions 14 1.2.5 AP Functions in the Sense of Hartman and Ryll-Nardzewski 15 1.2.6 AP Functions Defined on Groups and with Values in Banach and Hilbert Spaces 16 1.2.7 AP Functions in Probability 16 1.2.8 AP Sequences 17 1.2.9 AP Sequences in Probability 18 1.3 Almost-Cyclostationary Processes 18 1.3.1 Second-OrderWide-Sense Statistical Characterization 18 1.3.2 Jointly ACS Signals 20 1.3.3 LAPTV Systems 24 1.3.4 Products of ACS Signals 27 1.3.5 Cyclic Statistics of Communications Signals 29 1.3.6 Higher-Order Statistics 30 1.3.7 Cyclic Statistic Estimators 32 1.3.8 Discrete-Time ACS Signals 32 1.3.9 Sampling of ACS Signals 33 1.3.10 Multirate Processing of Discrete-Time ACS Signals 37 1.3.11 Applications 37 1.4 Some Properties of Cumulants 38 1.4.1 Cumulants and Statistical Independence 38 1.4.2 Cumulants of Complex Random Variables and Joint Complex Normality 392 Generalized Almost-Cyclostationary Processes 43 2.1 Introduction 43 2.2 Characterization of GACS Stochastic Processes 47 2.2.1 Strict-Sense Statistical Characterization 48 2.2.2 Second-OrderWide-Sense Statistical Characterization 49 2.2.3 Second-Order Spectral Characterization 59 2.2.4 Higher-Order Statistics 61 2.2.5 Processes with Almost-Periodic Covariance 65 2.2.6 Motivations and Examples 66 2.3 Linear Time-Variant Filtering of GACS Processes 70 2.4 Estimation of the Cyclic Cross-Correlation Function 72 2.4.1 The Cyclic Cross-Correlogram 72 2.4.2 Mean-Square Consistency of the Cyclic Cross-Correlogram 76 2.4.3 Asymptotic Normality of the Cyclic Cross-Correlogram 80 2.5 Sampling of GACS Processes 84 2.6 Discrete-Time Estimator of the Cyclic Cross-Correlation Function 87 2.6.1 Discrete-Time Cyclic Cross-Correlogram 87 2.6.2 Asymptotic Results 91 2.6.3 Asymptotic Results 95 2.6.4 Concluding Remarks 102 2.7 Numerical Results 104 2.7.1 Aliasing in Cycle-Frequency Domain 105 2.7.2 Simulation Setup 105 2.7.3 Cyclic Correlogram Analysis with Varying N 105 2.7.4 Cyclic Correlogram Analysis with Varying N and T 106 2.7.5 Discussion 111 2.7.6 Conjecturing the Nonstationarity Type of the Continuous-Time Signal 114 2.7.7 LTI Filtering of GACS Signals 116 2.8 Summary 116 3 Complements and Proofs on Generalized Almost-Cyclostationary Processes 123 3.1 Proofs for Section 2.2.2 “Second-OrderWide-Sense Statistical Characterization” 123 3.2 Proofs for Section 2.2.3 “Second-Order Spectral Characterization” 125 3.3 Proofs for Section 2.3 “Linear Time-Variant Filtering of GACS Processes” 129 3.4 Proofs for Section 2.4.1 “The Cyclic Cross-Correlogram” 131 3.5 Proofs for Section 2.4.2 “Mean-Square Consistency of the Cyclic Cross-Correlogram” 136 3.6 Proofs for Section 2.4.3 “Asymptotic Normality of the Cyclic Cross-Correlogram” 147 3.7 Conjugate Covariance 150 3.8 Proofs for Section 2.5 “Sampling of GACS Processes” 151 3.9 Proofs for Section 2.6.1 “Discrete-Time Cyclic Cross-Correlogram” 152 3.10 Proofs for Section 2.6.2 “Asymptotic Results as 158 3.11 Proofs for Section 2.6.3 “Asymptotic Results as 168 3.12 Proofs for Section 2.6.4 “Concluding Remarks” 176 3.13 Discrete-Time and Hybrid Conjugate Covariance 177 4 Spectrally Correlated Processes 181 4.1 Introduction 182 4.2 Characterization of SC Stochastic Processes 186 4.2.1 Second-Order Characterization 186 4.2.2 Relationship among ACS, GACS, and SC Processes 194 4.2.3 Higher-Order Statistics 195 4.2.4 Motivating Examples 200 4.3 Linear Time-Variant Filtering of SC Processes 205 4.3.1 FOT-Deterministic Linear Systems 205 4.3.2 SC Signals and FOT-Deterministic Systems 207 4.4 The Bifrequency Cross-Periodogram 208 4.5 Measurement of Spectral Correlation – Unknown Support Curves 215 4.6 The Frequency-Smoothed Cross-Periodogram 222 4.7 Measurement of Spectral Correlation – Known Support Curves 225 4.7.1 Mean-Square Consistency of the Frequency-Smoothed Cross-Periodogram 225 4.7.2 Asymptotic Normality of the Frequency-Smoothed Cross-Periodogram 229 4.7.3 Final Remarks 231 4.8 Discrete-Time SC Processes 233 4.9 Sampling of SC Processes 236 4.9.1 Band-Limitedness Property 237 4.9.2 Sampling Theorems 239 4.9.3 Illustrative Examples 243 4.10 Multirate Processing of Discrete-Time Jointly SC Processes 256 4.10.1 Expansion 257 4.10.2 Sampling 260 4.10.3 Decimation 262 4.10.4 Expansion and Decimation 265 4.10.5 Strictly Band-Limited SC Processes 267 4.10.6 Interpolation Filters 268 4.10.7 Decimation Filters 270 4.10.8 Fractional Sampling Rate Converters 271 4.11 Discrete-Time Estimators of the Spectral Cross-Correlation Density 272 4.12 Numerical Results 273 4.12.1 Simulation Setup 273 4.12.2 Unknown Support Curves 273 4.12.3 Known Support Curves 274 4.13 Spectral Analysis with Nonuniform Frequency Resolution 281 4.14 Summary 2865 Complements and Proofs on Spectrally Correlated Processes 291 5.1 Proofs for Section 4.2 “Spectrally Correlated Stochastic Processes” 291 5.2 Proofs for Section 4.4 “The Bifrequency Cross-Periodogram” 292 5.3 Proofs for Section 4.5 “Measurement of Spectral Correlation – Unknown Support Curves” 298 5.4 Proofs for Section 4.6 “The Frequency-Smoothed Cross-Periodogram” 306 5.5 Proofs for Section 4.7.1 “Mean-Square Consistency of the Frequency-Smoothed Cross-Periodogram” 309 5.6 Proofs for Section 4.7.2 “Asymptotic Normality of the Frequency-Smoothed Cross-Periodogram” 325 5.7 Alternative Bounds 333 5.8 Conjugate Covariance 334 5.9 Proofs for Section 4.8 “Discrete-Time SC Processes” 337 5.10 Proofs for Section 4.9 “Sampling of SC Processes” 339 5.11 Proofs for Section 4.10 “Multirate Processing of Discrete-Time Jointly SC Processes” 3426 Functional Approach for Signal Analysis 355 6.1 Introduction 355 6.2 Relative Measurability 356 6.2.1 Relative Measure of Sets 356 6.2.2 Relatively Measurable Functions 357 6.2.3 Jointly Relatively Measurable Functions 358 6.2.4 Conditional Relative Measurability and Independence 360 6.2.5 Examples 361 6.3 Almost-Periodically Time-Variant Model 361 6.3.1 Almost-Periodic Component Extraction Operator 361 6.3.2 Second-Order Statistical Characterization 363 6.3.3 Spectral Line Regeneration 365 6.3.4 Spectral Correlation 366 6.3.5 Statistical Function Estimators 367 6.3.6 Sampling, Aliasing, and Cyclic Leakage 369 6.3.7 FOT-Deterministic Systems 371 6.3.8 FOT-Deterministic Linear Systems 372 6.4 Nonstationarity Classification in the Functional Approach 374 6.5 Proofs of FOT Counterparts of Some Results on ACS and GACS Signals 3757 Applications to Mobile Communications and Radar/Sonar 381 7.1 Physical Model for the Wireless Channel 381 7.1.1 Assumptions on the Propagation Channel 381 7.1.2 Stationary TX, Stationary RX 382 7.1.3 Moving TX, Moving RX 383 7.1.4 Stationary TX, Moving RX 387 7.1.5 Moving TX, Stationary RX 388 7.1.6 Reflection on Point Scatterer 388 7.1.7 Stationary TX, Reflection on Point Moving Scatterer, Stationary RX (Stationary Bistatic Radar) 390 7.1.8 (Stationary)Monostatic Radar 391 7.1.9 Moving TX, Reflection on a Stationary Scatterer, Moving RX 392 7.2 Constant Velocity Vector 393 7.2.1 Stationary TX, Moving RX 393 7.2.2 Moving TX, Stationary RX 394 7.3 Constant Relative Radial Speed 395 7.3.1 Moving TX, Moving RX 395 7.3.2 Stationary TX, Moving RX 398 7.3.3 Moving TX, Stationary RX 401 7.3.4 Stationary TX, Reflection on a Moving Scatterer, Stationary RX (Stationary Bistatic Radar) 404 7.3.5 (Stationary)Monostatic Radar 406 7.3.6 Moving TX, Reflection on a Stationary Scatterer, Moving RX 406 7.3.7 Non synchronized TX and RX oscillators 407 7.4 Constant Relative Radial Acceleration 407 7.4.1 Stationary TX, Moving RX 408 7.4.2 Moving TX, Stationary RX 408 7.5 Transmitted Signal: Narrow-Band Condition 409 7.5.1 Constant Relative Radial Speed 411 7.5.2 Constant Relative Radial Acceleration 414 7.6 Multipath Doppler Channel 416 7.6.1 Constant Relative Radial Speeds – Discrete Scatterers 416 7.6.2 Continuous Scatterer 416 7.7 Spectral Analysis of Doppler-Stretched Signals – Constant Radial Speed 417 7.7.1 Second-Order Statistics (Continuous-Time) 417 7.7.2 Multipath Doppler Channel 422 7.7.3 Doppler-Stretched Signal (Discrete-Time) 427 7.7.4 Simulation of Discrete-Time Doppler-Stretched Signals 430 7.7.5 Second-Order Statistics (Discrete-Time) 432 7.7.6 Illustrative Examples 437 7.7.7 Concluding Remarks 443 7.8 Spectral Analysis of Doppler-Stretched Signals – Constant Relative Radial Acceleration 448 7.8.1 Second-Order Statistics (Continuous-Time) 449 7.9 Other Models of Time-Varying Delays 452 7.9.1 Taylor Series Expansion of Range and Delay 452 7.9.2 Periodically Time-Variant Delay 454 7.9.3 Periodically Time-Variant Carrier Frequency 454 7.10 Proofs 4558 Bibliographic Notes 463 8.1 Almost-Periodic Functions 463 8.2 Cyclostationary Signals 463 8.3 Generalizations of Cyclostationarity 464 8.4 Other Nonstationary Signals 464 8.5 Functional Approach and Generalized Harmonic Analysis 464 8.6 Linear Time-Variant Processing 465 8.7 Sampling 465 8.8 Complex Random Variables, Signals, and Systems 465 8.9 Stochastic Processes 465 8.10 Mathematics 466 8.11 Signal Processing and Communications 466 References 467 List of Abbreviations 475

Read more less